Nokia Solutions and Networks T5CR1 48V SC4812T 800 MHz CDMA BTS Frame User Manual Exhibit

Nokia Solutions and Networks 48V SC4812T 800 MHz CDMA BTS Frame Users Manual Exhibit

UserManual.wiki >

Nokia Solutions and Networks >

T5CR1 User Manual HTML Version

Users Manual Exhibit

1X SCt 4812T BTS

Optimization/ATP

Software Release 2.16.1.x

800, 1700, and 1900 MHz

CDMA

English

Aug 2002

68P09255A61-4

FIELD TRIAL

Notice

While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorola, Inc. assumes no liability resulting

from any inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from use of the information obtained herein. The information in this

document has been carefully checked and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for

inaccuracies or omissions. Motorola, Inc. reserves the right to make changes to any products described herein and reserves the

right to revise this document and to make changes from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any person

of revisions or changes. Motorola, Inc. does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product,

software, or circuit described herein; neither does it convey license under its patent rights or the rights of others.

It is possible that this publication may contain references to, or information about Motorola products (machines and

programs), programming, or services that are not announced in your country. Such references or information must not be

construed to mean that Motorola intends to announce such Motorola products, programming, or services in your country.

Copyrights

This instruction manual, and the Motorola products described in this instruction manual may be, include or describe

copyrighted Motorola material, such as computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in

the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted material, including

the exclusive right to copy, reproduce in any form, distribute and make derivative works of the copyrighted material.

Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola material contained herein or in the Motorola products described in this

instruction manual may not be copied, reproduced, distributed, merged or modified in any manner without the express

written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either

directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of

Motorola, as arises by operation of law in the sale of a product.

Usage and Disclosure Restrictions

License Agreement

The software described in this document is the property of Motorola, Inc. It is furnished by express license agreement

only and may be used only in accordance with the terms of such an agreement.

Copyrighted Materials

Software and documentation are copyrighted materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by law. No part of the

software or documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any

language or computer language, in any form or by any means, without prior written permission of Motorola, Inc.

High Risk Activities

Components, units, or third-party products used in the product described herein are NOT fault-tolerant and are NOT

designed, manufactured, or intended for use as on-line control equipment in the following hazardous environments

requiring fail-safe controls: the operation of Nuclear Facilities, Aircraft Navigation or Aircraft Communication Systems,

Air Traffic Control, Life Support, or Weapons Systems (“High Risk Activities”). Motorola and its supplier(s) specifically

disclaim any expressed or implied warranty of fitness for such High Risk Activities.

Trademarks

and Motorola are registered trademarks of Motorola, Inc.

Product and service names profiled herein are trademarks of Motorola, Inc. Other manufacturers’ products or services

profiled herein may be referred to by trademarks of their respective companies.

Printed on

Recyclable Paper

REV012501

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS

Optimization/ATP

Table of Contents

Table of Contents 68P09255A61-4

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

ii Aug 2002

Contents

Foreword xvi. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General Safety xix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Revision History xxi. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Patent Notification xxii. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 1 Introduction 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Optimization Manual: Scope and Layout 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Scope of This Document 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Document Composition 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CDMA LMF Product Description 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Purpose of the Optimization 1-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Why Optimize? 1-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

What Is Optimization? 1-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

When to Optimize 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Abbreviations and Acronyms 1-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Abbreviations and Acronyms 1-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Required Test Equipment 1-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Policy 1-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Equipment Calibration 1-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Cable Calibration 1-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Equipment Warm-up 1-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Equipment Specifications 1-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LMF Hardware Requirements 1-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Equipment List 1-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Optional Equipment 1-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Required Documentation 1-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Required Documents 1-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Intended Reader Profile 1-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BTS Equipment Identification 1-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Equipment Overview 1-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ancillary Equipment Frame Identification 1-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Logical BTS 1-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BTS Frame Description 1-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Frame Module Location & Identification 1-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sector Configuration 1-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 2 Preliminary Operations 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preliminary Operations: Overview 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cell Site Types 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CDF 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Site Equipage Verification 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Initial Installation of Boards/Modules 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting Frame C-CCP Shelf Configuration Switch 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pre-Power-up Tests 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Objective 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Equipment 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cabling Inspection 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents

68P09255A61-4

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

iii

Aug 2002

DC Power Pre-test (BTS Frame) 2-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DC Power Pre-test (RFDS) 2-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Initial Power-up Tests 2-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power-up Procedures 2-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Common Power Supply Verification 2-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Initial Power-up (RFDS) 2-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Initial Power-up (BTS) 2-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 3 Optimization/Calibration 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Optimization/Calibration - Introduction 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Optimization Process 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cell Site Types 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cell-Site Data File 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BTS System Software Download 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Site Equipage Verification 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Isolate Span Lines/Connect LMF 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Isolate BTS from T1/E1 Spans 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LMF to BTS Connection 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preparing the LMF 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LMF Operating System Installation 3-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Copy CDF Files from CBSC 3-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Creating a Named HyperTerminal Connection for MMI Connection 3-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Folder Structure Overview 3-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pinging the Processors 3-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using CDMA LMF 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Basic LMF Operation 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Graphical User Interface Overview 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Command Line Interface Overview 3-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Logging into a BTS 3-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Logging Out 3-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Establishing an MMI Communication Session 3-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Download the BTS 3-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Download the BTS - Overview 3-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Download Code to Devices 3-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Download Code and Data to Non-MGLI Devices 3-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select CSM Clock Source 3-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Enable CSMs 3-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Enable MCCs 3-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Enable Redundant GLIs 3-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification 3-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CSM & LFR Background 3-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Low Frequency Receiver/

High Stability Oscillator 3-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front Panel LEDs 3-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CSM Frequency Verification 3-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Null Modem Cable 3-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Equipment Setup: GPS & LFR/HSO Verification 3-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GPS Initialization/Verification 3-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LFR Initialization/Verification 3-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HSO Initialization/Verification 3-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents 68P09255A61-4

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

iv Aug 2002

Test Equipment Set-up 3-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connecting Test Equipment to the BTS 3-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Supported Test Sets 3-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Equipment Reference Chart 3-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Equipment Warm-up 3-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibrating Cables 3-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setup for TX Calibration 3-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setup for Optimization/ATP 3-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX ATP Setup 3-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Set Calibration 3-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Set Calibration Background 3-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Purpose of Test Set Calibration 3-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Selecting Test Equipment 3-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Manually Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab 3-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatically Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab 3-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibrating Test Equipment 3-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Agilent E4406A Transmitter Tester Self-alignment (Calibration) 3-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibrating Cables 3-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibrating Cables with a CDMA Analyzer 3-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibrating TX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer 3-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer 3-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting Cable Loss Values 3-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting Coupler Loss Values 3-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Bay Level Offset Calibration 3-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction to Bay Level Offset Calibration 3-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RF Path Bay Level Offset Calibration 3-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

When to Calibrate BLOs 3-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX Path Calibration 3-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BLO Calibration Data File 3-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Equipment Setup: RF Path Calibration 3-72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX Path Calibration 3-72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Download BLO Procedure 3-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibration Audit Introduction 3-76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX Path Audit 3-76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX Audit Test 3-76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All Cal/Audit Test 3-77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Create CAL File 3-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RFDS Set-up and Calibration 3-80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RFDS Description 3-80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RFDS Parameter Settings 3-81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RFDS TSU NAM Programming 3-83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Explanation of Parameters used when Programming the TSU NAM 3-83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Valid NAM Ranges 3-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Set Antenna Map Data 3-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Set RFDS Configuration Data 3-85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RFDS Calibration 3-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Program TSU NAM 3-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing 3-88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Objective 3-88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Equipment 3-88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Redundancy/Alarm Test 3-88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Equipment Setup 3-89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power Supply Redundancy 3-89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents

68P09255A61-4

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

Aug 2002

Miscellaneous Alarm/Redundancy Tests 3-91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BBX Redundancy 3-93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CSM, GPS, & LFR/HSO Redundancy/Alarm Tests 3-94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LPA Redundancy Test 3-97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MGLI/GLI Redundancy Test 3-98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BTS Alarms Testing 3-99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Alarm Test Overview 3-99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Alarm Reporting Display 3-99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Purpose 3-100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Equipment 3-100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CDI Alarm Input Verification with Alarms Test Box 3-101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CDI Alarm Input Verification without Alarms Test Box 3-103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pin and Signal Information for Alarm Connectors 3-104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 4 Automated Acceptance Test Procedure 4-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automated Acceptance Test Procedures - All-inclusive TX & RX 4-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction 4-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reduced ATP 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ATP Tests 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ATP Test Prerequisites 4-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX OUT Connection 4-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ATP Test Procedure 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX Output Acceptance Tests: Introduction 4-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Individual Acceptance Tests 4-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test 4-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tx Mask Test 4-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX Waveform Quality (rho) Acceptance Test 4-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rho Test 4-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test 4-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pilot Offset Acceptance Test 4-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test 4-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Code Domain Power Test 4-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RX Frame Error Rate (FER) Acceptance Test 4-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FER Test 4-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Generate an ATP Report 4-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Background 4-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ATP Report 4-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 5 Prepare to Leave the Site 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Prepare to Leave the Site 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

External Test Equipment Removal 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reset All Devices 5-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Re-connect BTS T1 Spans and Integrated Frame Modem 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BTS Site Span Configuration Verification 5-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Set BTS Site Span Configuration 5-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Updating CBSC LMF Files 5-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LMF Removal 5-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Re-establish OMC-R Control/ Verifying T1/E1 5-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 6 Basic Troubleshooting 6-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Basic Troubleshooting Overview 6-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents 68P09255A61-4

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

vi Aug 2002

Overview 6-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Troubleshooting: Installation 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cannot Log into Cell-Site 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cannot Communicate to Power Meter 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cannot Communicate to Communications Analyzer 6-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Troubleshooting: Download 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cannot Download CODE to Any Device (card) 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cannot Download DATA to Any Device (Card) 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cannot ENABLE Device 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Miscellaneous Errors 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Troubleshooting: Calibration 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Bay Level Offset Calibration Failure 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cannot Load BLO 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibration Audit Failure 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BTS passed Reduced ATP tests but has forward link problem during normal operation 6-8. . . . . . . .

Cannot Perform TX Mask Measurement 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cannot Perform Rho or Pilot Time Offset Measurement 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cannot Perform Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cannot Perform Carrier Measurement 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Troubleshooting: Receive ATP 6-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Multi-FER Test Failure 6-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Troubleshooting: CSM Check-list 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Problem Description 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Intermittent 19.6608 MHz Reference Clock/GPS Receiver Operation 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

No GPS Reference Source 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checksum Failure 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GPS Bad RX Message Type 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CSM Reference Source Configuration Error 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Takes Too Long for CSM to Come INS 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting 6-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction 6-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connector Functionality 6-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting Procedure 6-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Digital Control Problems 6-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DC Power Problems 6-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX and RX Signal Routing Problems 6-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Module Status Indicators 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LED Status Combinations for All Modules (except GLI, CSM, BBX, MCC) 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DC/DC Converter LED Status Combinations 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CSM LED Status Combinations 6-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GLI2 LED Status Combinations 6-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GLI2 Pushbuttons and Connectors 6-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GLI3 Front Panel 6-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BBX LED Status Combinations 6-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MCC LED Status Combinations 6-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LPA Shelf LED Status Combinations 6-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Basic Troubleshooting - Span Control Link 6-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Span Problems (No Control Link) 6-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Set BTS Site Span Configuration 6-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents

68P09255A61-4

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

vii

Aug 2002

Appendix A Data Sheets A-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Optimization (Pre-ATP) Data Sheets A-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Verification of Test Equipment Used A-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Site Checklist A-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preliminary Operations A-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pre-Power and Initial Power Tests A-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General Optimization Checklist A-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GPS Receiver Operation A-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LFR Receiver Operation A-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LPA IM Reduction A-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LPA Convergence A-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX BLO/Power Output Verification for 3-Sector Configurations A-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX BLO/Power Output Verification for 6-Sector Configurations A-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BTS Redundancy/Alarm Tests A-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX Antenna VSWR A-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RX Antenna VSWR A-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AMR Verification A-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Site Serial Number Check List A-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-CCP Shelf A-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LPAs A-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power Conversion Shelf (-48 V BTS Only) A-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix B PN Offset/I & Q Offset Register Programming Information B-1. . . . . . . .

PN Offset Programming Information B-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PN Offset Background B-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PN Offset Usage B-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix C FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix C-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix C-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Usage & Background C-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Detailed Optimization/ATP Test Matrix C-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix D BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output D-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations D-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Usage & Background D-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix E CDMA Operating Frequency E-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operating Frequency - North American PCS Bands E-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction E-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1900 MHz PCS Channels E-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calculating 1900 MHz Center Frequencies E-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

800 MHz CDMA Channels E-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calculating 800 MHz Center Frequencies E-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operating Frequency - Korean Bands E-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1700 MHz PCS Channels E-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calculating 1700 MHz Center Frequencies E-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix F PCS Interface Setup for Manual Testing F-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Equipment Set-up F-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Purpose F-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Equipment Warm up F-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents 68P09255A61-4

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

viii Aug 2002

Prerequisites F-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HP8921A System Connectivity Test F-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Manual Cable Calibration using HP8921 with HP PCS Interface (HP83236) F-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HP PCS Interface Test Equipment Setup for Manual Testing F-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibrating Test Cable Setup using Advantest R3465 F-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix G VSWR G-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR G-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Purpose G-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test equipment G-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Equipment Setup - HP Test Set G-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Equipment Setup - Advantest Test Set G-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix H Download ROM Code H-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Download ROM Code H-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Download ROM Code H-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix I In-Service Calibration I-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction I-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Purpose I-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Equipment Warm up I-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power Delta Calibration I-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power Delta Calibration Introduction I-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HP8921A Power Delta Calibration I-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Advantest R3465 Power Delta Calibration I-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HP8935 Power Delta Calibration I-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration I-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

In-Service Calibration I-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

In-Service Calibration Introduction I-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix J GPIB Addresses J-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GPIB Addresses J-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction J-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HP437 Power Meter GPIB Address J-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB Address J-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Motorola CyberTest GPIB Address J-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HP8935 Test Set GPIB Address J-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting HP8921A and HP83236A/B GPIB Address J-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Advantest R3465 GPIB Address J-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RS232 GPIB Interface Box J-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CDMA 2000 Test Equipment Preparation J-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Advantest R3267 Spectrum Analyzer GPIB Address J-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Advantest R3562 Signal Generator GPIB Address J-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Agilent E4406A Transmitter Tester GPIB Address J-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Agilent E4432B Signal Generator GPIB Address J-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Index Index-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents

68P09255A61-4

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

Aug 2002

List of Figures

Figure 1-1: Null Modem Cable Detail 1-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-2: +27 V SC 4812T BTS Starter Frame 1-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-3: -48 V SC 4812T BTS Starter Frame 1-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-4: +27 V SC 4812T BTS Expansion Frame 1-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-5: -48 V SC 4812T BTS Expansion Frame 1-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-6: +27 V SC 4812T Starter Frame I/O Plate 1-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-7: -48 V SC 4812T Starter Frame I/O Plate 1-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-8: +27 V SC 4812T Expansion Frame I/O Plate 1-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-9: -48 V SC 4812T Expansion Frame I/O Plate 1-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-10: SC 4812T C-CCP Shelf 1-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-11: +27 V SC 4812T LPA Configuration - 4 Carrier with 2:1 Combiners 1-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-12: -48 V SC 4812T LPA Configuration - 4 Carrier, 3-Sector with 2:1 Combiners 1-29. . . . .

Figure 1-13: +27 V SC4812T LPA Configuration with Combiners/Filters 1-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-14: -48 V SC4812T LPA Configuration with Combiners/Filters 1-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-15: -48 V BTS Power Conversion Shelf 1-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-16: CDMA (COBRA) RFDS Layout 1-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 2-1: Switch Card 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 2-2: Backplane DIP Switch Settings - SC 4812T 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 2-3: +27 V BTS DC Distribution Pre-test 2-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 2-4: +27 V SC 4812T BTS Starter Frame 2-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 2-5: -48 V BTS DC Distribution Pre-test 2-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 2-6: -48 V SC 4812T BTS Starter Frame 2-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 2-7: DC Distribution Pre-test (COBRA RFDS Detail) 2-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-1: Span I/O Board T1 Span Isolation??? 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-2: LMF Connection Detail 3-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-3: LMF Folder Structure 3-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-4: BTS LAN Interconnect Diagram 3-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-5: +27 V SC 4812T Starter Frame I/O Plate 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-6: -48 V SC 4812T Starter Frame I/O Plate 3-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-7: CDMA LMF Computer Common MMI Connections 3-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-8: Null Modem Cable Detail 3-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-9: CSM MMI terminal connection 3-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-10: Cable Calibration Test Setup 3-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-11: Cable Calibration Test Setup (Advantest R3267, Agilent E4406A) 3-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-12: TX Calibration Test Setup (CyberTest, HP 8935, and Advantest) 3-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-13: TX Calibration Test Setup (Advantest R3267, Agilent E4406A, and HP8935) 3-51. . . . . .

Figure 3-14: Opt/ATP Test Setup Calibration (HP 8935) 3-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-15: Opt/ATP Test Setup (HP 8921A) 3-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-16: Opt/ATP Test Setup (Advantest R3267 and Agilent E4406A) 3-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents 68P09255A61-4

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

xAug 2002

Figure 3-17: Typical TX ATP Setup with Directional Coupler 3-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-18: Typical RX ATP Setup with Directional Coupler 3-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-19: Agilent E4406A Self-alignment 3-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-20: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for TX BLO and TX ATP Tests 3-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-21: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for RX ATP Test 3-65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-22: SC 4812T C-CCP Shelf 3-90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-23: -48 V BTS Power Conversion Shelf 3-91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-24: +27 V BTS C-CCP Fan Modules 3-92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-25: -48 V BTS C-CCP and Power Conversion Shelf Fan Modules 3-93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-26: +27 V SC 4812T Starter Frame I/O Plate 3-96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-27: Alarm Connector Location and Connector Pin Numbering 3-100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-28: AMR Connector Pin Numbering 3-101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 4-1: TX Mask Verification Spectrum Analyzer Display 4-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 4-2: Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Levels 4-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 5-1: Site and Span I/O Boards T1 Span Connections 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 5-2: MGLI2/GLI2 MMI Port Connection 5-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 6-1: CSM Front Panel Indicators & Monitor Ports 6-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 6-2: GLI2 Front Panel 6-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 6-3: GLI3 Front Panel 6-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 6-4: MCC Front Panel 6-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 6-5: MGLI/GLI Board MMI Connection Detail 6-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure E-1: North American PCS 1900 MHz Frequency Spectrum E-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure E-2: North American Cellular Telephone System Frequency Spectrum E-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure E-3: 1700 MHz PCS Frequency Spectrum E-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure F-1: Calibrating Test Setup Components F-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure F-2: Cable Calibration using Advantest R3465 F-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure G-1: Manual VSWR Test Setup Using HP8921 Test Set (1700/1900 MHz) G-3. . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure G-2: Manual VSWR Test Setup Using HP8921 Test Set (800 MHz) G-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure G-3: Manual VSWR Test Setup Using Advantest R3465 G-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure I-1: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8921A to HP437B I-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure I-2: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8921A to HP8921A I-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure I-3: Delta Calibration Setup - R3561L to HP437B I-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure I-4: Delta Calibration Setup - R3561L to R3465 I-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure I-5: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8935 to HP437B I-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure I-6: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8935 to HP8935 I-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure I-7: Delta Calibration Setup - Agilent E4432B to HP437 I-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure I-8: Delta Calibration Setup - Agilent E4432B to Agilent E4406A I-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure I-9: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using RFDS I-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure I-10: IS-95 A/B/C Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using RFDS I-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure J-1: HP437 Power Meter J-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure J-2: Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter Detail J-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents

68P09255A61-4

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

Aug 2002

Figure J-3: HP8935 Test Set J-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure J-4: HP8921A and HP83236A/B J-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure J-5: R3465 Communications Test Set J-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure J-6: RS232 GPIB Interface Box J-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure J-7: Setting Advantest R3267 GPIB Address J-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure J-8: Advantest R3562 GPIB Address Switch Setting J-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure J-9: Setting Agilent E4406A GPIB Address J-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure J-10: Setting Agilent E4432B GPIB Address J-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents 68P09255A61-4

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

xii Aug 2002

List of Tables

Table 1-1: Abbreviations and Acronyms 1-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 1-2: C-CCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Top Shelf) 1-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 1-3: C-CCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Bottom Shelf) 1-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 1-4: BTS Sector Configuration 1-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 1-5: Sector Configurations 1-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 2-1: Initial Installation of Boards/Modules 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 2-2: DC Power Pre-test (BTS Frame) 2-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 2-3: DC Power Pre-test (RFDS) 2-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 2-4: DC Input Power Cable Guidelines 2-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 2-5: Common Power Supply Verification 2-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 2-6: Initial Power-up (RFDS) 2-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 2-7: Initial Power-up (BTS) 2-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-1: T1/E1 Span Isolation 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-2: LMF to BTS Connection 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-3: LMF Operating System Installation 3-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-4: Copying CBSC CDF Files to the LMF 3-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-5: Creating a Named Hyperlink Connection for MMI Connection 3-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-6: Pinging the Processors 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-7: BTS GUI Login Procedure 3-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-8: BTS CLI Login Procedure 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-9: BTS GUI Logout Procedure 3-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-10: BTS CLI Logout Procedure 3-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-11: Establishing MMI Communications 3-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-12: Download and Enable MGLI 3-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-13: Download Code and Data to Non-MGLI Devices 3-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-14: Select CSM Clock Source 3-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-15: Enable CSMs 3-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-16: Enable MCCs 3-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-17: Enable Redundant GLIs 3-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-18: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification) 3-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/Verification 3-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-20: LFR Initialization/Verification 3-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-21: HSO Initialization/Verification 3-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-23: IS-95 A/B/C Test Equipment Setup 3-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-24: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in a Serial Connection Tab 3-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-25: Selecting Test Equipment Using Auto-Detect 3-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-26: Test Equipment Calibration 3-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-27: Agilent E4406A Self-alignment (Calibration) 3-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-28: Cable Calibration 3-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents

68P09255A61-4

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

xiii

Aug 2002

Table 3-29: Calibrating TX Cables Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer 3-63. . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-30: Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer 3-64. . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-31: Setting Cable Loss Values 3-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-32: Setting Coupler Loss Value 3-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-33: BLO BTS.cal File Array Assignments 3-70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-34: BTS.cal File Array (Per Sector) 3-70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-35: Test Equipment Setup (RF Path Calibration) 3-72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-36: BTS TX Path Calibration 3-74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-37: Download BLO 3-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-38: BTS TX Path Audit 3-77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-39: All Cal/Audit Test 3-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-40: Create CAL File 3-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-41: RFDS Parameter Settings 3-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-42: Definition of Parameters 3-83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-43: Valid NAM Field Ranges 3-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-44: Set Antenna Map Data 3-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-45: Set RFDS Configuration Data 3-85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-46: RFDS Calibration Procedure 3-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-47: Program the TSU NAM 3-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-48: Test Equipment Setup for Redundancy/Alarm Tests 3-89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-49: Power Supply/Converter Redundancy (BTS Frame) 3-89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-50: Miscellaneous Alarm Tests 3-91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-51: BBX Redundancy Alarms 3-93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-52: CSM, GPS, & LFR/HSO, Redundancy/Alarm Tests 3-94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-53: LPA Redundancy Test 3-97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-54: MGLI/GLI Redundancy Test (with MM Connection Established) 3-98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-55: CDI Alarm Input Verification Using the Alarms Test Box 3-101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-56: CDI Alarm Input Verification Without the Alarms Test Box 3-103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-57: Pin and Signal Information for Alarm Connectors 3-104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 4-1: ATP Test Procedure 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 4-2: Generating an ATP Report 4-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 5-1: External Test Equipment Removal 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 5-2: Enabling Devices 5-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 5-3: T1/E1 Span/IFM Connections 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 5-4: BTS Span Parameter Configuration 5-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 5-5: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration 5-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 5-6: Backup CAL Data to a Diskette 5-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 5-7: LMF Termination and Removal 5-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 5-8: Procedures to Copy CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSC 5-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-1: Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedures 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-2: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication Failure 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents 68P09255A61-4

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

xiv Aug 2002

Table 6-3: Troubleshooting a Communications Analyzer Communication Failure 6-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-4: Troubleshooting Code Download Failure 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-5: Troubleshooting Data Download Failure 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-6: Troubleshooting Device Enable (INS) Failure 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-7: Miscellaneous Failures 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-8: Troubleshooting BLO Calibration Failure 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-9: Troubleshooting Calibration Audit Failure 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-10: Troubleshooting Forward Link Failure (BTS Passed Reduced ATP) 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-11: Troubleshooting TX Mask Measurement Failure 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-12: Troubleshooting Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement Failure 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-13: Troubleshooting Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement Failure 6-9. . . . . . .

Table 6-14: Troubleshooting Carrier Measurement Failure 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-15: Troubleshooting Multi-FER Failure 6-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-16: No GLI Control via LMF (all GLIs) 6-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-17: No GLI Control through Span Line Connection (Both GLIs) 6-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-18: MGLI Control Good - No Control over Co-located GLI 6-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-19: MGLI Control Good - No Control over AMR 6-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-20: No BBX Control in the Shelf - No Control over Co-located GLIs 6-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-21: MGLI Control Good - No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic 6-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-22: No MCC Channel Elements 6-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-23: No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module 6-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-24: No DC Input Voltage to any C-CCP Shelf Module 6-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-25: TX and RX Signal Routing Problems 6-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-26: Troubleshoot Control Link Failure 6-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-27: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration 6-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-1: Verification of Test Equipment Used A-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-2: Site Checklist A-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-3: Preliminary Operations A-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-4: Pre-power Checklist A-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-5: Pre-power Checklist A-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-6: GPS Receiver Operation A-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-7: LFR Receiver Operation A-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-8: LPA IM Reduction A-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-9: LPA Convergence A-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-10: TX BLO Calibration (3-S: 1-C, and 2- and 4-C Non-adjacent Channels) A-9. . . . . . . . .

Table A-11: TX BLO Calibration (3-S: 2-C Adjacent Channels) A-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-12: TX BLO Calibration (3-S: 3- or 4-C Adjacent Channels) A-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-13: TX BLO Calibration (6-S: 1-C, 2-C Non-adjacent Channels) A-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-14: BTS Redundancy/Alarm Tests A-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-15: TX Antenna VSWR A-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-16: RX Antenna VSWR A-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents

68P09255A61-4

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

Aug 2002

Table A-17: AMR CDI Alarm Input Verification A-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn B-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table C-1: When RF Optimization Is required on the BTS C-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table C-2: When to Optimize Inter-frame Cabling C-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table C-3: SC 4812T BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix C-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table D-1: BBX Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm) D-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table E-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel E-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table E-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel E-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table E-3: 1700 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel (Korean Bands) E-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table F-1: System Connectivity F-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table F-2: Manual Cable Calibration Test Equipment Setup (using the HP PCS Interface) F-3. . . . . .

Table F-3: HP PCS Interface Test Equipment Setup for Manual Testing F-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table F-4: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465 F-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table G-1: VSWR Measurement Procedure - HP Test Set G-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table G-2: VSWR Measurement Procedure - Advantest Test Set G-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table H-1: Download ROM Code H-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table I-1: HP8921A Power Delta Calibration Procedure I-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table I-2: Advantest Power Delta Calibration Procedure I-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table I-3: HP8935 Power Delta Calibration Procedure I-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table I-4: Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration Procedure I-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table I-5: In-Service Calibration I-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table J-1: Verify and/or Change HP437 Power Meter GPIB Address J-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table J-2: Verify and/or Change Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB Address J-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table J-3: Verify and/or Change Motorola CyberTest GPIB Address J-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table J-4: Verify and/or Change HP8935 GPIB Address J-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table J-5: Verify and/or Change HP8921A and HP83236A GPIB Addresses J-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table J-6: Verify and/or Change Advantest R3465 GPIB Address J-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table J-7: Verify and Change Advantest R3267 GPIB Address J-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table J-8: Verify and Change Agilent E4406A GPIB Address J-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table J-9: Verify and Change Agilent E4432B GPIB Address J-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Foreword 68P09255A61-4

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

xvi Aug 2002

Foreword

Scope of manual

This manual is intended for use by cellular telephone system

craftspersons in the day-to-day operation of Motorola cellular system

equipment and ancillary devices. It is assumed that the user of this

information has a general understanding of telephony, as used in the

operation of the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN), and is

familiar with these concepts as they are applied in the cellular

mobile/portable radiotelephone environment. The user, however, is not

expected to have any detailed technical knowledge of the internal

operation of the equipment.

This manual is not intended to replace the system and equipment

training offered by Motorola, although it can be used to supplement or

enhance the knowledge gained through such training.

Text conventions

The following special paragraphs are used in this manual to point out

information that must be read. This information may be set-off from the

surrounding text, but is always preceded by a bold title in capital letters.

The three categories of these special paragraphs are:

NOTE Presents additional, helpful, non-critical information that you can

use.

Bold-text notes indicate information to help you avoid an

undesirable situation or provides additional information to

help you understand a topic or concept.

CAUTION Presents information to identify a situation in which equipment

damage could occur, thus avoiding damage to equipment.

WARNING Presents information to warn you of a potentially hazardous

situation in which there is a possibility of personal injury.

Foreword

68P09255A61-4

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

xvii

Aug 2002

The following typographical conventions are used for the presentation of

software information:

SIn text, sans serif BOLDFACE CAPITAL characters (a type style

without angular strokes: i.e., SERIF versus SANS SERIF) are used to

name a command.

SIn text, typewriter style characters represent prompts and the

system output as displayed on an operator terminal or printer.

SIn command definitions, sans serif boldface characters represent those

parts of the command string that must be entered exactly as shown and

typewriter style characters represent command output responses

as displayed on an operator terminal or printer.

SIn the command format of the command definition, typewriter

style characters represent the command parameters.

Changes to manual

Changes that occur after the printing date are incorporated into your

manual by Cellular Manual Revisions (CMRs). The information in this

manual is updated, as required, by a CMR when new options and

procedures become available for general use or when engineering

changes occur. The cover sheet(s) that accompany each CMR should be

retained for future reference. Refer to the Revision History page for a list

of all applicable CMRs contained in this manual.

Receiving updates

Technical Information Products and Services (TIPS) maintains a

customer database that reflects the type and number of manuals ordered

or shipped since the original delivery of your Motorola equipment. Also

identified in this database is a “key” individual (such as Documentation

Coordinator or Facility Librarian) designated to receive manual updates

from TIPS as they are released.

To ensure that your facility receives updates to your manuals, it is

important that the information in our database is correct and up-to-date.

Therefore, if you have corrections or wish to make changes to the

information in our database (i.e., to assign a new “key” individual),

please contact Technical Information Products and Services.

MOTOROLA, INC.

Technical Information Products and Services

Phone:

Within U.S.A. and Canada 800-872-8225. . . . .

Outside of U.S.A. and Canada +1-847-435-5700. .

FAX: +1-847-435-5541. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reporting manual errors

In the event that you locate an error or identify a deficiency in your

manual, please take time to write to us at the address above. Be sure to

include your name and address, the complete manual title and part

number (located on the manual spine, cover, or title page), the page

number (found at the bottom of each page) where the error is located,

and any comments you may have regarding what you have found. We

appreciate any comments from the users of our manuals.

Foreword 68P09255A61-4

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

xviii Aug 2002

24-hour support service

If you have any questions or concerns regarding the operation of your

equipment, please contact the Customer Network Resolution Center for

immediate assistance. The 24 hour telephone numbers are:

Arlington Heights, IL 800-433-5202. . . . . . . . . .

Arlington Heights, International +1-847-632-5390. .

Cork, Ireland 44-1793-565444. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Swindon, England 44-1793-565444. . . . . . . . . . . . .

FCC Requirements

68P09255A61-4

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

xix

Aug 2002

FCC Requirements

Content

This section presents Federal Communications Commission (FCC)

Rules Parts 15 and 68 requirements and compliance information for the

SCt4812T/ET/ET Lite series Radio Frequency Base Transceiver

Stations.

FCC Part 15 Requirements

Part 15.19a(3) - INFORMATION TO USER

NOTE This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation

is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

Part 15.21 - INFORMATION TO USER

CAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Motorola

could void your authority to operate the equipment.

15.105(b) - INFORMATION TO USER

NOTE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the

limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable

protection against harmful interference in a residential

installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio

frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance

with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio

communications. However, there is no guarantee that

interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this

equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television

reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment

OFF and ON, the user is encouraged to try to correct the

interference by one or more of the following measures:

- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from

that to which the receiver is connected.

- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for

help.

FCC Requirements 68P09255A61-4

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

xx Aug 2002

FCC Part 68 Requirements

This equipment complies with Part 68 of the Federal Communications

Commission (FCC) Rules. A label on the GLI3 board, easily visible

with the board removed, contains the FCC Registration Number for this

equipment in the format < US: IHEXDNANGLI3-1X>. If requested,

this information must be provided to the telephone company.

FCC Part 68 Registered Devices

Device FCC Part 68 ID

Group Line Interface (GLI3) * US: IHEXDNANGLI3-1X

Cisco Model 1900-27 US: 5B1DDNDN0006

ADC KENTROX Model 537 US: F81USA-31217-DE-N

* NOTE: The BTS equipment is always equipped with the GLI3, < US:

IHEXDNANGLI3-1X>, and may be used in conjunction with one or

both of the listed registered CSU devices, or another registered CSU

device not listed above.

The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment,

operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of your T1. If

this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice so that

you can modify your equipment as required to maintain uninterrupted

service.

If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone

company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of

service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone

company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised

of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is

necessary.

If you experience trouble operating this equipment with the T1, please

contact:

Global Customer Network Resolution Center (CNRC)

1501 W. Shure Drive, 3436N

Arlington Heights, Illinois 60004

Phone Number: (847) 632-5390

for repair and/or warranty information. You should not attempt to repair

this equipment yourself. This equipment contains no customer or

user-serviceable parts.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Motorola could

void your authority to operate this equipment.

General Safety

68P09255A61-4

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

xxi

Aug 2002

General Safety

Remember! . . . Safety

depends on you!!

The following general safety precautions must be observed during all

phases of operation, service, and repair of the equipment described in

this manual. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific

warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design,

manufacture, and intended use of the equipment. Motorola, Inc. assumes

no liability for the customer’s failure to comply with these requirements.

The safety precautions listed below represent warnings of certain dangers

of which we are aware. You, as the user of this product, should follow

these warnings and all other safety precautions necessary for the safe

operation of the equipment in your operating environment.

Ground the instrument

To minimize shock hazard, the equipment chassis and enclosure must be

connected to an electrical ground. If the equipment is supplied with a

three-conductor ac power cable, the power cable must be either plugged

into an approved three-contact electrical outlet or used with a

three-contact to two-contact adapter. The three-contact to two-contact

adapter must have the grounding wire (green) firmly connected to an

electrical ground (safety ground) at the power outlet. The power jack and

mating plug of the power cable must meet International Electrotechnical

Commission (IEC) safety standards.

Do not operate in an explosive

atmosphere

Do not operate the equipment in the presence of flammable gases or

fumes. Operation of any electrical equipment in such an environment

constitutes a definite safety hazard.

Keep away from live circuits

Operating personnel must:

Snot remove equipment covers. Only Factory Authorized Service

Personnel or other qualified maintenance personnel may remove

equipment covers for internal subassembly, or component

replacement, or any internal adjustment.

Snot replace components with power cable connected. Under certain

conditions, dangerous voltages may exist even with the power cable

removed.

Salways disconnect power and discharge circuits before touching them.

Do not service or adjust alone

Do not attempt internal service or adjustment, unless another person,

capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation, is present.

Do not substitute parts or

modify equipment

Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install

substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification of equipment.

Contact Motorola Warranty and Repair for service and repair to ensure

that safety features are maintained.

General Safety 68P09255A61-4

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

xxii Aug 2002

Dangerous procedure

warnings

Warnings, such as the example below, precede potentially dangerous

procedures throughout this manual. Instructions contained in the

warnings must be followed. You should also employ all other safety

precautions that you deem necessary for the operation of the equipment

in your operating environment.

WARNING Dangerous voltages, capable of causing death, are present in this

equipment. Use extreme caution when handling, testing, and

adjusting.

Revision History

68P09255A61-4

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

xxiii

Aug 2002

Revision History

Manual Number

68P09255A61-4

Manual Title

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

Version Information

The following table lists the manual version, date of version, and

remarks on the version. Revision bars printed in page margins (as shown

to the side) identify material which has changed from the previous

release of this publication.

Version

Level Date of Issue Remarks

1Mar 2002 DRAFT Manual submitted for engineering markup

2Apr 2002 PRELIMINARY

3Jul 2002 DV&V REVIEW

4Aug 2002 PRELIMINARY: Incorporate comments from DV&V and engineering.

Patent Notification 68P09255A61-4

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

xxiv Aug 2002

Patent Notification

Patent numbers

This product is manufactured and/or operated under one or more of the

following patents and other patents pending:

4128740 4661790 4860281 5036515 5119508 5204876 5247544 5301353

4193036 4667172 4866710 5036531 5121414 5204977 5251233 5301365

4237534 4672657 4870686 5038399 5123014 5207491 5255292 5303240

4268722 4694484 4872204 5040127 5127040 5210771 5257398 5303289

4282493 4696027 4873683 5041699 5127100 5212815 5259021 5303407

4301531 4704734 4876740 5047762 5128959 5212826 5261119 5305468

4302845 4709344 4881082 5048116 5130663 5214675 5263047 5307022

4312074 4710724 4885553 5055800 5133010 5214774 5263052 5307512

4350958 4726050 4887050 5055802 5140286 5216692 5263055 5309443

4354248 4729531 4887265 5058136 5142551 5218630 5265122 5309503

4367443 4737978 4893327 5060227 5142696 5220936 5268933 5311143

4369516 4742514 4896361 5060265 5144644 5222078 5271042 5311176

4369520 4751725 4910470 5065408 5146609 5222123 5274844 5311571

4369522 4754450 4914696 5067139 5146610 5222141 5274845 5313489

4375622 4764737 4918732 5068625 5152007 5222251 5276685 5319712

4485486 4764849 4941203 5070310 5155448 5224121 5276707 5321705

4491972 4775998 4945570 5073909 5157693 5224122 5276906 5321737

4517561 4775999 4956854 5073971 5159283 5226058 5276907 5323391

4519096 4797947 4970475 5075651 5159593 5228029 5276911 5325394

4549311 4799253 4972355 5077532 5159608 5230007 5276913 5327575

4550426 4802236 4972432 5077741 5170392 5233633 5276915 5329547

4564821 4803726 4979207 5077757 5170485 5235612 5278871 5329635

4573017 4811377 4984219 5081641 5170492 5235614 5280630 5339337

4581602 4811380 4984290 5083304 5182749 5239294 5285447 D337328

4590473 4811404 4992753 5090051 5184349 5239675 5287544 D342249

4591851 4817157 4998289 5093632 5185739 5241545 5287556 D342250

4616314 4827507 5020076 5095500 5187809 5241548 5289505 D347004

4636791 4829543 5021801 5105435 5187811 5241650 5291475 D349689

4644351 4833701 5022054 5111454 5193102 5241688 5295136 RE31814

4646038 4837800 5023900 5111478 5195108 5243653 5297161

4649543 4843633 5028885 5113400 5200655 5245611 5299228

4654655 4847869 5030793 5117441 5203010 5245629 5301056

4654867 4852090 5031193 5119040 5204874 5245634 5301188

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

1-1

Chapter 1

Introduction

Optimization Manual: Scope and Layout 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

1-2

Optimization Manual: Scope and Layout

Scope of This Document

This document provides information pertaining to the optimization and

audit tests of Motorola SC 4812T Base Transceiver Subsystem (BTS)

equipment frames equipped with trunked high-power Linear Power

Amplifiers (LPAs) and their associated internal and external interfaces.

This document assumes the following prerequisites:

SThe BTS frames and cabling have been installed per the BTS Frame

Installation manual, which covers the physical “bolt down” of all SC

series equipment frames, and the SC 4812T CDMA BTS Installation

manual, which covers BTS specific cabling configurations.

In most applications the same test procedure is used for all equipment

variations. However, decision break points are provided throughout the

procedure when equipment specific tests are required.

NOTE As the Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) Local

Maintenance Facility (LMF) capability comes on-line,

applicable LMF based procedures will be incorporated.

Eventually, only the CDMA LMF platform will be supported as

the recommended customer method of interfacing with and

servicing the SC series BTS equipment.

We at Motorola Technical Education & Documentation have strived to

incorporate into this document the many suggestions and inputs received

from you, the customer, since the inception of the SC product line. At

the same time, we have tried to insure that the scope of the document

targets both the novice and expert site technician and engineer with

the information required to successfully perform the task at hand. If

in some areas, the manual seems to cover the test in too much detail (or

not enough detail) we hope you will keep this in mind.

Optimization Manual: Scope and Layout68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

1-3

Document Composition

This document covers the following major areas.

SIntroduction, consisting of preliminary background information (such

as component and subassembly locations and frame layouts) to be

considered by the Cellular Field Engineer (CFE) before optimization

or tests are performed.

SPreliminary Operations, consisting of pre-power up tests, jumper

configuration of BTS sub-assemblies, and initial application of power

to the BTS equipment frames. Download of all BTS processor boards,

and LPAs.

SOptimization/Calibration, consisting of downloading all BTS

processor boards, LPA verification, radio frequency (RF) path

verification, Bay Level Offset (BLO) calibration, and Radio

Frequency Diagnostic System (RFDS) functions and calibration

SAcceptance Test Procedures (ATP), consisting of automated ATP

scripts executed by the LMF and used to verify all major transmit

(TX) and receive (RX) performance characteristics on all BTS

equipment. Also generates an ATP report.

SOptional manual performance tests used to verify specific areas of site

operation or to verify regulation compliance. These tests are typically

used to isolate faults down to the module level and information

necessary to better understand equipment operation.

SSite turnover after ATP is completed.

SAppendices that contain pertinent data sheets that are filled out

manually by the CFE at the site, Pseudorandom Noise (PN) Offset

information, an optimization/ATP matrix , output power data tables,

CDMA operating frequency programming information, manual test

setup information, procedures for verifying that the Voltage Standing

Wave Ratio (VSWR) of all antennas and associated feed lines fall

within acceptable limits, procedures for downloading ROM and RAM

code, and procedures for performing in-service ATP.

Optimization Manual: Scope and Layout 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

1-4

CDMA LMF Product Description

The CDMA LMF is a graphical user interface (GUI) based LMF. This

product is specifically designed to provide cellular communications field

personnel the vehicle to support the following CDMA BTS operations:

SInstallation

SMaintenance

SCalibration

SOptimization

Graphical User Interface Overview

The LMF uses a GUI, which works in the following way:

SSelect the device or devices.

SSelect the action to apply to the selected device(s).

SWhile action is in progress, a status report window displays the action

taking place and other status information.

SThe status report window indicates when the action is complete and

displays other pertinent information.

SClicking the OK button closes the status report window.

Command Line Interface Overview

The LMF also provides Command Line Interface (CLI) capability.

Activate the CLI by clicking on a shortcut icon on the desktop. The CLI

cannot be launched from the GUI, only from the desktop icon.

Refer to the LMF CLI Commands, R15.x manual for a complete

explanation of the CLI commands and their use.

Online Help

Task oriented online help is available in the CDMA LMF by clicking on

Help from the menu bar.

Purpose of the Optimization68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

1-5

Purpose of the Optimization

Why Optimize?

Proper optimization and calibration assures:

SAccurate downlink RF power levels are transmitted from the site.

SAccurate uplink signal strength determinations are made by the site.

What Is Optimization?

Optimization compensates for the site-specific cabling and normal

equipment variations. Cables that interconnect the BTS and Duplexer

assemblies (if used), for example, are cut and installed at the time of the

BTS frame installation at the site. Site optimization guarantees that the

combined losses of the new cables and the gain/loss characteristics and

built-in tolerances of each BTS frame do not accumulate, causing

improper site operation.

Optimization identifies the accumulated loss (or gain) for all receive and

transmit paths at the BTS site, and stores that value in a database.

SThe RX path for the starter frame starts at the ancillary equipment

frame RFDS RX directional coupler antenna feedline port, through the

ancillary equipment frame RFDS RX directional coupler antenna

feedline port, through the RX input port on the top of the frame,

through the bandpass filter, Combiner Input/Output (CIO) card,

Multicoupler Preselector Card (MPC), and additional splitter circuitry,

ending at a CDMA Channel Processor (C-CCP) backplane Broad

Band Transceiver (BBX) slot in the C-CCP shelf.

NOTE In this manual, all version of the BBX, MCC, and GLI usable in

this BTS are generically identified as BBX, MCC, or GLI unless

otherwise specified.

SThe RX path for the expansion frame starts at the ancillary equipment

frame RFDS RX directional coupler antenna feedline port, through the

ancillary equipment frame RFDS RX directional coupler antenna

feedline port, through the RX input port on the top of the starter

frame, through the bandpass filter and CIO card, out the expansion

port at the top of the starter frame, through the expansion cable to the

expansion port on the expansion frame, through the Expansion

Multicoupler Preselector Card (EMPC) and CIO, ending at a BBX slot

in the C-CCP shelf.

SThe TX path starts at the BBX, through the C-CCP backplane slot,

travels through the LPA/Combiner TX Filter and ends at the top of the

RFDS TX directional coupler antenna feedline port (CDMA), installed

on the ancillary equipment frame. If the RFDS option is added, then

the TX path continues and ends at the top of the RFDS TX directional

coupler antenna feedline port installed in the ancillary equipment

frame. The TX paths are identical for the starter and expansion

frames.

These values are factored in by the BTS equipment internally, leaving

only site specific antenna feed line loss and antenna gain characteristics

to be factored in by the CFE when determining site Effective Radiated

Power (ERP) output power requirements.

Purpose of the Optimization 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

1-6

Each C-CCP shelf BBX board is optimized to a specific RX and TX

antenna port. (One BBX board acts in a redundant capacity for BBXs

1-12, and is optimized to all antenna ports.) A single value is generated

for each path, thereby eliminating the accumulation of error that would

occur from individually measuring and summing the gain and loss of

each element in the path.

When to Optimize

New Installations

After the initial site installation, it must be prepared for operation. This

preparation includes verifying hardware installation, initial power-up,

download of operating code, and Clock Synchronization Module (CSM)

verification.

Next, the optimization is performed. Optimization includes performance

verification and calibration of all transmit and receive RF paths, and

download of accumulated calibration data.

After optimization, a series of manual pre-ATP verification tests are

covered that address alarm/redundancy tests.

After manual pre-Acceptance Test Procedure (pre-ATP) verification

tests, a series of manual ATP CDMA verification tests are covered using

the actual equipment set up. An ATP is also required before the site can

be placed in service.

Site Expansion

Optimization is required after expansion of a site.

Periodic Optimization

Periodic optimization of a site may also be required, depending on the

requirements of the overall system.

Repaired Sites

Refer to Appendix C for detailed basic guideline tables and detailed

Optimization/ATP Test Matrix outlining the minimum tests that must be

performed anytime a BTS subassembly or RF cable associated with it is

replaced.

Abbreviations and Acronyms68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

1-7

Abbreviations and Acronyms

Table 1-1 identifies the equipment related abbreviations and acronyms

used in this manual.

Table 1-1: Abbreviations and Acronyms

Acronym Definition

AMR Alarm Monitor Reporting

ATP Acceptance Test Procedure

BBX Broadband Transceiver

BBX2 Broadband Transceiver, 2nd Generation supports

IS-95A/B

BBX-1X Broadband Transceiver, 3rd Generation supports

IS-95A/B and cdma2000 1X

BLO Bay Level Offset

BTS Base Transceiver Subsystem

CBSC Centralized Base Station Controller

CCD CDMA Clock Distribution

CDMA Code Division Multiple Access

CE Channel Element

CHI Concentration Highway Interface

CIO Combiner Input/Output

CLI Command Line Interface

CM Channel Module

CNEOMI Common Network Element Operation and

Maintenance Interface

CSM Clock Synchronization Manager

CSM-I Clock Synchronization Manager, 1st Generation

CSM card hardware version

CSM-II Clock Synchronization Manager, 2nd Generation

CSM card hardware version

DRDC Duplexer/RX Filter/Directional Coupler

EMI Electromagnetic Interference

EMPC Expansion Multicoupler Preselector Card

FRU Field Replaceable Unit

GLI Group Line Interface,

GLI2 Group Line Interface, 2nd Generation card

hardware version

GLI3 Group Line Interface, 3rd Generation card

hardware version for packet backhaul

GPS Global Positioning System

HSO High Stability Oscillator

HSOX High Stability Oscillator Expansion

I&Q In-phase and Quadrature

. . . continued on next page

Abbreviations and Acronyms 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

1-8

Table 1-1: Abbreviations and Acronyms

Acronym Definition

ISB Inter Shelf Bus

LFR Low Frequency Receiver

LMF Local Maintenance Facility

LORAN LOng RAnge Navigational

LPA Linear Power Amplifier

MCC Multi-Channel CDMA

MCC8E/24E Multi-Channel CDMA, 8/24 Channels; 2nd

Generation supports IS-95A/B

MCC1X-16/48 Multi-Channel CDMA, 16/48 Channels; 3rd

Generation supports IS-95A/B and cdma2000

MGLI Master Group Line Interface

MM Mobility Manager

MMI Man Machine Interface

MPC Multicoupler Preselector Card

MSC Mobile Switching Center

OMCR Operations Maintenance Center - Radio

PDA Power Distribution Assembly

PN Pseudo-random Noise

RF Radio Frequency

RGD Remote GPS Distribution

RGPS Remote GPS

RSSI Received Signal Strength Indicator

SBPF Single Bandpass Filter

SCAP SC (Super Cell) Application Protocol

SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol

STRAU SC (Super Cell) Transcoder/Rate Adaption Unit

SU Subscriber Unit

TCH Traffic Channel

TRDC Transmit Receive filter/Directional Coupler

TSI Time Slot Interchanger

UTC Universal Time Coordinates

Required Test Equipment68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

1-9

Required Test Equipment

Policy

The LMF is used in conjunction with Motorola recommended test

equipment and is part of a “calibrated test set”. To ensure consistent,

reliable, and repeatable optimization test results, only recommended test

equipment supported by the LMF must be used to optimize the BTS

equipment.

NOTE During manual testing, you can, of course, substitute test

equipment with other test equipment models not supported by

the LMF, but those models must meet the same technical

specifications.

The customer has the responsibility of accounting for any measurement

variances and/or additional losses/inaccuracies that can be introduced

as a result of test equipment substitutions. Before beginning

optimization or troubleshooting, make sure that the test equipment

needed is on hand and operating properly.

Test Equipment Calibration

Optimum system performance and capacity depend on regular equipment

service, calibration, and characterization prior to BTS optimization.

Follow the original equipment manufacturer (OEM) recommended

maintenance and calibration schedules closely.

Test Cable Calibration

Equipment test cables are very important in optimization. Motorola

recommends that the cable calibration be run at every BTS with the test

cables attached. This method compensates for test cable insertion loss

within the test equipment itself. No other allowance for test cable

insertion loss needs to be made during the performance of tests.

Another method is to account for the loss by entering it into the LMF

during the optimization procedure. This method requires accurate test

cable characterization in a shop. The cable should be tagged with the

characterization information prior to field optimization.

Equipment Warm-up

After arriving at the a site, the test equipment should be plugged in and

turned on to allow warm up and stabilization to occur for as long as

possible. The following pieces of test equipment must be warmed-up for

a minimum of 60 minutes prior to using for BTS optimization or RFDS

calibration procedures.

SCommunications Test Set

SRubidium Time Base

SPower Meter

Required Test Equipment 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

1-10

Test Equipment Specifications

Test equipment specification requirements for the test equipment (or

configuration of test equipment) used to make up the general test

equipment (DVM, etc) are given in the following paragraphs.

LMF Hardware Requirements

Motorola recommends an LMF computer platform that meets the

following requirements:

SNotebook computer

S266 MHz (32-bit CPU) Pentium processor

SWindows 98SE or Windows 2000 operating system

S128 MB RAM for Windows 98SE; 256 MB RAM for Windows 2000

S4 GB internal hard disk drive

SCD ROM drive

S3 1/2 inch floppy drive

SColor display with 1024 x 768 pixel resolution and capability to

display more than 256 colors

SSerial port (COM 1)

SParallel port (LPT 1)

SPCMCIA Ethernet interface card (for example, 3COM Etherlink III)

with a 10Base-T-to-coax adapter

Test Equipment List

The following pieces of test equipment are required during the

optimization procedure. Common assorted tools like screwdrivers and

frame keys are not listed but are still required. Read the owner’s manual

on all of the following major pieces of test equipment to understand their

individual operation prior to use in optimization.

NOTE Always refer to specific OEM test equipment documentation for

detailed operating instructions.

Ethernet LAN Transceiver

SPCMCIA Ethernet Adpater + Ethernet UTP Adapter: 3COM Model -

Etherlink III 3C589B

Required Test Equipment68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

1-11

10BaseT/10Base2 Converter

STransition Engineering Model E-CX-TBT-03 10BaseT/10Base2

Converter

- or -

STransition Engineering Model E-CX-TBT-03 10BaseT/10Base2

Converter

NOTE Xircom Model PE3-10B2 or equivalent can also be used to

interface the LMF Ethernet connection to the frame.

3C-PC-COMBO CBL

SConnects to the 3COM PCMCIA card and eliminates the need for a

10BaseT/10base2 Converter.

RS-232 to GPIB Interface

SNational Instruments GPIB-232-CT with Motorola CGDSEDN04X

RS232 serial null modem cable or equivalent; used to interface the

LMF to the test equipment.

SStandard RS-232 cable can be used with the following modifications

(see Figure 1-1):

- This solution passes only the 3 minimum electrical connections

between the LMF and the General Purpose Information Bus (GPIB)

interface. The control signals are jumpered as enabled on both ends

of the RS-232 cable (9-pin D). TX and RX signals are crossed as

Null Modem effect. Pin 5 is the ground reference.

- Short pins 7 and 8 together, and short pins 1, 4, and 6 together on

each connector.

Figure 1-1: Null Modem Cable Detail

GND

RTS

CTS

RSD/DCD

DTR

GND

RTS

CTS

RSD/DCD

DTR

ON BOTH CONNECTORS

SHORT PINS 7, 8;

SHORT PINS 1, 4, & 6

9-PIN D-FEMALE 9-PIN D-FEMALE

DSR DSR

FW00362

Man Machine Interface (MMI) Interface Kit (Motorola part

number CGDSMMICABLE219112)

This cable is used to connect the LMF to the BTS.

Required Test Equipment 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

1-12

Communications System Analyzer

The communication system analyzer is used during optimization and

testing of the RF communications portion of BTS equipment and

provides the following functions:

(1) Frequency counter

(2) RF power meter (average and code domain)

(3) RF Signal Generator (capable of CDMA modulation)

(4) Spectrum Analyzer

(5) CDMA Code Domain analyzer

The following communication system analyzers are currently supported

by the LMF:

SHP8921A/600 Analyzer - including 83203B CDMA Interface,

manual control system card, and 83236A/B Personal communication

Interface (PCS) Interface for 1700/1900 MHz BTS.

SAdvantest R3465 Analyzer - including R3561L Test Source Unit

SCyberTest Communication Analyzer

SHewlett-Packard HP 8935 - with option 200 or R2K for 1X TX and

with Agilent E4432B Signal Generator for 1X FER

SAdvantest R3267 Analyzer - including R3562 Test Source Unit

SAgilent E4406A Analyzer - including E4432B Test Source Unit

GPIB Cables

SHewlett Packard 10833A or equivalent; 1 to 2 meters (3 to 6 feet) long

used to interconnect test equipment and LMF terminal.

Power Meter

One of the following power meters is required with the HP8921 and

Advantest analyzers:

SHewlett Packard Model HP HP437B with HP8481A power sensor

SGigatronics 8541C with model 80601A power sensor

Timing Reference Cables

STwo BNC-male to BNC-male RG316 cables; 3.05 m (10 ft.) long.

Used to connect the communications analyzer to the front timing

reference of the CSM cards in the BTS frame.

Digital Multimeter

SFluke Model 8062A with Y8134 test lead kit or equivalent; used for

precision dc and ac measurements, requiring 4-1/2 digits.

Required Test Equipment68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

1-13

Directional Coupler

SNarda Model 30661 30 dB (Motorola part no. 58D09732W01)

1900 MHz coupler terminated with two Narda Model 375BN-M

loads, or equivalent.

SNarda Model 30445 30 dB (Motorola Part No. 58D09643T01 )

800 MHz coupler terminated with two Narda Model 375BN-M loads,

or equivalent.

RF Attenuator

S20 dB fixed attenuator, 20 W (Narda 768-20); used with 1.7/1.9 GHz

test cable calibrations or during general troubleshooting procedures.

RF Terminations/Loads

SAt least three 100-Watt (or larger) non-radiating RF

terminations/loads.

Miscellaneous RF Adapters, Loads, etc

SAs required to interface test cables and BTS equipment and for

various test set ups. Should include at least two 50 Ohm loads (type

N) for calibration and one RF short, two N-Type Female-to-Female

Adapters.

LAN Cable

SBNC-to BNC 50 ohm coaxial cable [.91 m (3 ft) maximum] with an

F-to-F adapter, used to connect the 10BaseT-to-coaxial adapter to

the BTS LAN connector.

High-impedance Conductive Wrist Strap

SMotorola Model 42-80385A59; used to prevent damage from

Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) when handling or working with

modules.

Optional Equipment

NOTE Not all optional equipment specified here will be supported by

the LMF in automated tests or when executing various measure

type command line interface (CLI) commands. It is meant to

serve as a list of additional equipment that might be required

during maintenance and troubleshooting operations.

Frequency Counter

SStanford Research Systems SR620 or equivalent. If direct

measurement of the 3 MHz or 19.6608 MHz references is required.

Spectrum Analyzer

SSpectrum Analyzer (HP8594E with CDMA personality card) or

equivalent; required for manual tests.

Local Area Network (LAN) Tester

SModel NETcat 800 LAN troubleshooter (or equivalent); used to

supplement LAN tests using the ohmmeter.

Required Test Equipment 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

1-14

Span Line (T1/E1) Verification Equipment

SAs required for local application

Oscilloscope

STektronics Model 2445 or equivalent; for waveform viewing, timing,

and measurements or during general troubleshooting procedure.

2-way Splitter

SMini-Circuits Model ZFSC-2-2500 or equivalent; provides the

diversity receive input to the BTS

High Stability 10 MHz Rubidium Standard

SStanford Research Systems SR625 or equivalent - required for CSM

and Low Frequency Receiver/High Stability Oscillator (LFR/HSO)

frequency verification.

Itasca Alarms Test Box

SItasca CGDSCMIS00014 - This test box may be used as a tool to

assist in the testing of customer alarms.

Required Documentation68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

1-15

Required Documentation

Required Documents

The following documents are required to perform optimization of the

cell site equipment:

SSite Document (generated by Motorola Systems Engineering), which

includes:

- General Site Information

- Floor Plan

- RF Power Levels

- Frequency Plan (includes Site PN and Operating Frequencies)

- Channel Allocation (Paging, Traffic, etc.)

- Board Placement

- Site Wiring List

- CDF files (bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf)

SBTS Frame Installation Manual; 68P09226A18

S1X SC 4812T BTS Hardware Installation; 68P09255A60

SDemarcation Document (Scope of Work Agreement)

SCDMA LMF Operator’s Guide; 68P64114A78

SCDMA RFDS Hardware Installation manual; 68P64113A93

SCDMA RFDS User’s Guide, 68P64113A37

SLMF CLI Commands, R16, 68P09253A56

SEquipment Manuals for non-Motorola test equipment

Intended Reader Profile

The information in this manual set is intended for use by the cellular

communications craftsperson(s) in the initial installation and

configuration, as well as the day-to-day operation and maintenance of a

BTS.

The user of this information has a general understanding of telephony, as

used in the operation of the Public Switched Telephone

Network (PSTN), and is familiar with these concepts as they are applied

in the cellular and maintenance mobile/portable radiotelephone

environment.

The user also needs a working knowledge of the computer platform

operating system being used (Windows 98 or Windows 2000).

BTS Equipment Identification 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

1-16

BTS Equipment Identification

Equipment Overview

The Motorola SC 4812T BTS can consist of the following equipment

frames:

SAt least one BTS starter frame

- +27 V BTS (see Figure 1-2)

- -48 V BTS (see Figure 1-3)

SAncillary equipment frame (or wall mounted equipment)

SExpansion frames

- +27 V BTS (see Figure 1-4)

- -48 V BTS (see Figure 1-5)

Ancillary Equipment Frame Identification

NOTE Equipment listed below can be wall mounted or mounted in a

standard 19 inch frame. The description assumes that all

equipment is mounted in a frame for clarity.

If equipped with the RFDS option, the RFDS and directional couplers

are the interface between the site antennas and the BTS or Modem

frame. The RFDS equipment includes:

SDirectional couplers

SSite receive bandpass/bandreject filters

SRFDS

Logical BTS

The BTS software implements the logical BTS capability. Previously, all

BTS frames co-located at a single site had to be identified in the

network with separate and distinct BTS ID numbers. In the Logical BTS

feature, all frames located at a single BTS site are identified with unique

Frame ID numbers (Frame ID Numbers 1, 101, 201, 301) under a single

(site) BTS ID number. A logical BTS can consist of up to four

SC 4812T frames.When the LMF is connected to frame 1 of a logical

BTS, you can access all devices in all of the frames that make up the

logical BTS. A logical BTS requires a CDF file that includes equipage

information for all of the logical BTS frames and their devices and a

CBSC file that includes channel data for all of the logical BTS fames.

BTS Equipment Identification68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

1-17

Logical BTS Numbering

The first frame of a logical BTS has a -1 suffix (e.g., BTS-812-1 ).

Other frames of the logical BTS are numbered with suffixes, -101 , -201 ,

and -301 (e. g. BTS-812-201 ). When you log into a BTS, a FRAME

tab is displayed for each frame. If there is only one frame for the BTS,

there is only one tab (e.g., FRAME-282-1 ) for BTS-282. If a logical

BTS has more than one frame, there is a separate FRAME tab for each

frame (e.g. FRAME-438-1 , FRAME-438-101 , and FRAME-438-201

for a BTS-438 that has three frames). If an RFDS is included in the

CDF file, an RFDS tab (e.g., RFDS-438-1) is displayed.

Actions (e.g., ATP tests) can be initiated for selected devices in one or

more frames of a logical BTS. Refer to the Select devices help screen for

information on how to select devices.

C-CCP Shelf Card/Module Device ID Numbers

All cards/modules/boards in the frames at a single site, assigned to a

single BTS number, are also identified with unique Device ID numbers

dependent upon the Frame ID number in which they are located. Refer to

Table 1-2 and Table 1-3 for specific C-CCP Shelf Device ID numbers.

Table 1-2: C-CCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Top Shelf)

Frame Card/Module ID Number (Left to Right)

#Power

(PS-1) Power

(PS-2) Power

(PS-3) AMR

-1 GLI2

-1 MCC BBX BBX-

RMPC/

EMPC

-1

1 - - - 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 R1 -

101 ---101 101 101 102 103 104 105 106 101 102 103 104 105 106 R101 -

201 ---201 201 201 202 203 204 205 206 201 202 203 204 205 206 R201 -

301 ---301 301 301 302 303 304 305 306 301 302 303 304 305 306 R301 -

Table 1-3: C-CCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Bottom Shelf)

Frame Card/Module ID Number (Left to Right)

#HSO/

LFR CSM

-1 CSM

-2 CCD

ACCD

BAMR

-2 GLI2-

2MCC BBX SW MPC/

EMPC

-2

1 - 1 2 - - - 2 2 7 8 9 10 11 12 7 8 9 10 11 12 - -

101 -101 102 - - - 102 102 107 108 109 110 111 112 107 108 109 110 111 112 - -

201 -201 202 - - - 202 102 207 208 209 210 211 212 207 208 209 210 211 212 - -

301 -301 302 - - - 302 102 307 308 309 310 311 312 307 308 309 310 311 312 - -

BTS Equipment Identification 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

1-18

Figure 1-2: +27 V SC 4812T BTS Starter Frame

Expansion I/O

Housing

For clarity, doors are not shown.

Front Cosmetic

Panel

Power Input

Connection

TX Out (1 - 6)

Span I/O B

Span I/O A

Site I/O

RX In (1A - 6A

and 1B - 6B)

Exhaust Region

C-CCP Cage

Breakers

Combiner

Section

RGD (Needed for

Expansion only)

LPA Cage

ti-CDMA-WP-00098-v01-ildoc-ftw

BTS Equipment Identification68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

1-19

Figure 1-3: -48 V SC 4812T BTS Starter Frame

Expansion I/O

Housing

For clarity, doors are not shown.

Front Cosmetic

Panel

Power Input

Connection

TX Out (1 - 6)

Span I/O B

Span I/O A

Site I/O

RX In (1A - 6A

and 1B - 6B)

Exhaust Region

C-CCP Cage

-48Vdc

Power Supply

Breakers

Combiner

Section

RGD (Needed for

Expansion only)

LPA Cage

Power

Conversion

Shelf

Breakers

Alarms

ti-CDMA-WP-00097-v01-ildoc-ftw

BTS Equipment Identification 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

1-20

Figure 1-4: +27 V SC 4812T BTS Expansion Frame

Power Input

Connection

TX Out (1 - 6)

Span I/O B

Span I/O A

Site I/O

Expansion Port

to another BTS

Exhaust Region

C-CCP Cage

Breakers

LPA Cage

For clarity, doors are not shown.

LAN

ti-CDMA-WP-00110-v01-ildoc-ftw

Combiner

Section

BTS Equipment Identification68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

1-21

Figure 1-5: -48 V SC 4812T BTS Expansion Frame

Expansion Port

to another BTS

For clarity, doors are not shown.

Power Input

Connection

TX Out (1 - 6)

Span I/O B

Span I/O A

Site I/O

Exhaust Region

C-CCP Cage

Breakers

Combiner

Section

LPA Cage

Power

Conversion

Shelf

LAN

Breakers

Alarms

ti-CDMA-WP-00109-v01-ildoc-ftw

BTS Equipment Identification 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

1-22

BTS Frame Description

The BTS is the interface between the span lines to/from the Cellsite Base

Station Controller (CBSC) and the site antennas. This frame is described

in three sections:

SThe top interconnect plate where all connections are made.

SThe upper portion of the frame which houses circuit breakers, cooling

fans, and the C-CCP shelf.

SThe lower portion of the frame which houses the LPA fans, LPAs, and

TX filter/combiners.

SThe -48 V version of the BTS also has a section below the LPAs

containing a power conversion shelf that supplies power to the LPAs.

Use the illustrations that follow to visually identify the major

components, that make up the Motorola SC 4812T BTS frame.

Top Interconnect Plate (see Figure 1-6 or Figure 1-7)

All cabling to and from the BTS equipment frames is via the

interconnect panel on the top of each frame. Connections made here

include:

SSpan lines

SRX antennas

STX antenna

SAlarm connections

SPower input

SLAN connections

SGPS input or Remote Global Positioning System (RGPS) on the Site

I/O Board

SRemote Global Positioning System Distribution (RGD)

SLORAN-C Low Frequency Receiver (LFR) input

SExpansion frame connection

SGround connections

SRJ-45 Pass-through Connectors

C-CCP Shelf (see Figure 1-10)

SC-CCP backplane and cage

SPower supply modules

SCDMA clock distribution (CCD) boards

SCSM and HSO/LFR boards

SAlarm Monitoring and Reporting (AMR) boards

SGLI cards (may be GLI2 or GLI3)

SMPC/EMPC boards

- MPC - starter frame only

- EMPC - expansion frames

SSwitch card

SMCC boards (may be MCC8E, MCC24, or MCC-1X)

SBBX boards (may be BBX2 or BBX-1X)

SCIO boards

BTS Equipment Identification68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

1-23

PA Shelves (see Figure 1-11 or Figure 1-12)

SLPA cages

SLPA trunking backplanes

SSingle Tone Linear Power Amplifier (STLPA, or more commonly

referred to as “LPA”) modules

SLPA fan modules

SLPA Combiner Cage (+27 V BTS)

STX filter combiners or bandpass filters

-48 V Power Conversion Shelf (see Figure 1-15)

SPower conversion backplane and shelf

SPower conversion boards

SPower conversion alarm card

SFan modules

SPower distribution assembly

SAir plenum

Frame Module Location & Identification 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

1-24

Frame Module Location & Identification

Figure 1-6: +27 V SC 4812T Starter Frame I/O Plate

OUT

LAN

GPS

SPAN I/O A SITE I/O SPAN I/O B

LFR/

ALARM B 4

GND

TX OUT

FRONT

REAR

SPAN I/O ASPAN I/O B

CAUTION

LIVE TERMINALSLIVE TERMINALS +27 VDC

HSO

ALARM A

EXP I/O

RGD

ti-CDMA-WP-00114-v01-ildoc-ftw

LOW FREQUENCY

RECEIVER / HSO

SPAN I/O

RF EXPANSION PORT

(TO ANOTHER BTS)

TRANSMIT

ANTENNA

CONNECTORS

POWER INPUT

RECEIVE ANTENNA

CONNECTORS

SITE I/OSPAN I/O

GPS IN LAN CONNECTIONS

ALARM

CONNECTORS

BPR-TO-GLI

INTERCONNECT PANEL

(OPTIONAL)

Frame Module Location & Identification68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

1-25

Figure 1-7: -48 V SC 4812T Starter Frame I/O Plate

OUT

LAN

GPS

SPAN I/O A SITE I/O SPAN I/O B

LFR

ALARM B 4

GND

TX OUT

SPAN I/O ASPAN I/O B

CAUTION

LIVE TERMINALSLIVE TERMINALS WIRED FOR -48VDC

HSO/

ALARM A

EXP I/O

RGD

HSO/LFR

FRONT

REAR

SPAN I/O

RF EXPANSION

PORT (TO

ANOTHER BTS)

TRANSMIT

ANTENNA

CONNECTORS

POWER INPUT

RECEIVE ANTENNA

CONNECTORS

SITE I/OSPAN I/O

SITE I/O

ALARM

CONNECTORS

LAN

CONNECTIONS

GPS IN

ti-CDMA-WP-00099-v01-ildoc-ftw

BPR-TO-GLI

INTERCONNECT PANEL

(OPTIONAL)

Frame Module Location & Identification 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

1-26

Figure 1-8: +27 V SC 4812T Expansion Frame I/O Plate

OUT

LAN

GPS

EXP IN

SPAN I/O A SITE I/O SPAN I/O B

LFR/

ALARM B

GND

TX OUT

FRONT

REAR

SPAN I/O ASPAN I/O B

CAUTION

LIVE TERMINALSLIVE TERMINALS +27 VDC

HSO

EXP OUT

ALARM A

EXP IN

HOUSING

TRANSMIT

ANTENNA

CONNECTORS

EXP OUT

HOUSING (ADDED

ONLY WHEN

USING SECOND

EXPANSION

FRAME)

SITE I/O LFR/HSO

RGD

POWER

INPUT

LAN

SPAN I/O SPAN I/O

ti-CDMA-WP-00102-v01-ildoc-ftw

RJ-45 PASS-THROUGH

CONNECTORS

Frame Module Location & Identification68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

1-27

Figure 1-9: -48 V SC 4812T Expansion Frame I/O Plate

OUT

LAN

GPS

EXP IN

SPAN I/O A SITE I/O SPAN I/O B

LFR

ALARM B

GND

TX OUT

FRONT

REAR

SPAN I/O ASPAN I/O B

CAUTION

LIVE TERMINALS

HSO/

EXP OUT

ALARM A

EXP IN

HOUSING

TRANSMIT

ANTENNA

CONNECTORS

EXP OUT

HOUSING (ADDED

ONLY WHEN

USING SECOND

EXPANSION

FRAME)

SITE I/O

RGD

POWER

INPUT

LAN

SPAN I/O SPAN I/O

LIVE TERMINALS WIRED FOR -48 VDC

SITE I/O

HSO/LFR

RF FILTER PORTS NOT USED

IN EXPANSION FRAME

ti-CDMA-WP-00100-v01-ildoc-ftw

RJ-45 PASS-THROUGH

CONNECTORS

Frame Module Location & Identification 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

1-28

Figure 1-10: SC 4812T C-CCP Shelf

19 mm Filler Panel

PS-3

AMR-1

CSM-1

CSM-2

38 mm Filler Panel

AMR-2

GLI-1GLI-2

MCC-6

BBX-1

BBX-2

BBX-3

BBX-4

BBX-5

BBX-6

BBX-RSwitch

MPC/EMPC-1MPC/EMPC-2

CIO

BBX-7

BBX-8

BBX-9

BBX-10

BBX-1 1

BBX-12

MCC-5

MCC-4

MCC-3

MCC-2

MCC-1

MCC-12

MCC-11

MCC-10

MCC-9

MCC-8

MCC-7

PS-2

PS-1

CCD-2 CCD-1

NOTE: MCCs may be

MCC8Es, MCC24s, or

MCC-1Xs. BBXs may

be BBX2s or BBX-1Xs.

GLIs may be GLI2s or

GLI3s.

HSO/LFR

FW00295

REF

Frame Module Location & Identification68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

1-29

Figure 1-11: +27 V SC 4812T LPA Configuration - 4 Carrier with 2:1 Combiners

LPA1A

LPA1B

LPA1C

LPA1D

LPA3A

LPA3B

LPA3C

LPA3D

LPA2A

LPA2B

LPA2C

LPA2D

LPA4A

LPA4B

LPA4C

LPA4D

FAN

MODULE

(TYPICAL)

FILTERS /

COMBINERS

(2 TO 1 COMBINER

SHOWN)

Note

No adjacent carriers may exist within the same TX filter

combiner. “Adjacent” is defined as fc1 and fc2 being

1.25 MHz apart (center-to-center). “Non-adjacent” is

defined as fc1 and fc2 being >2.50 MHz apart

(center-to-center).

123

456

4-CARRIER CONFIGURATION

CARRIER

123

456

FW00296

Frame Module Location & Identification 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

1-30

Figure 1-12: -48 V SC 4812T LPA Configuration - 4 Carrier, 3-Sector with 2:1 Combiners

LPA1A

LPA1B

Note

No adjacent carriers may exist within the same TX filter

combiner. “Adjacent” is defined as fc1 and fc2 being

1.25 MHz apart (center-to-center). “Non-adjacent” is

defined as fc1 and fc2 being >2.50 MHz apart

(center-to-center).

4-CARRIER CONFIGURATION

CARRIER CARRIER

LPA1C

LPA1D

LPA3C

LPA3D

LPA2A

LPA2B

LPA2C

LPA2D

LPA4C

LPA4D

FW00481

3 4

LPA3A

LPA3B

LPA4A

LPA4B

FAN

MODULE

(TYPICAL)

FILTERS /

COMBINERS

(2 TO 1 COMBINER

SHOWN)

-48 Volt

SC 4812T

Frame Module Location & Identification68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

1-31

Sector Configuration

There are a number of ways to configure the BTS frame. Table 1-4

outlines the basic requirements. When carrier capacity is greater than

two, a 2:1 or 4:1 cavity combiner must be used. For one or two carriers,

bandpass filters or cavity combiners may be used, depending on

sectorization and channel sequencing.

Table 1-4: BTS Sector Configuration

Number

of carriers Number

of sectors Channel

spacing Filter requirements

13 or 6 N/A Bandpass Filter, Cavity Combiner

(2:1 or 4:1)

2 6 Non-adjacent Cavity Combiner (2:1 Only)

2 6 Adjacent Not supported in single frame

2 3 Non-adjacent Cavity Combiner (2:1 or 4:1)

2 3 Adjacent Bandpass Filter

3,4 3 Non-adjacent Cavity Combiner (2:1 or 4:1)

3,4 3 Adjacent Cavity Combiner (2:1 Only)

Frame Module Location & Identification 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

1-32

NOTE In Table 1-5, BBXs may be BBX2s or BBX-1Xs.

Table 1-5: Sector Configurations

Config Ref. No. Description

3-Sector/2-ADJACENT Carriers - The configuration below maps TX with optional 2:1 cavity

combiners for 3 sectors/2 carriers for adjacent channels. Note that 2:1 cavity combiners are used (6

total).

1TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 TX5 TX6 Carrier#

BBX-1 BBX-2 BBX-3 N/A N/A N/A 1

N/A N/A N/A BBX-4 BBX-5 BBX-6 2

6-Sector/2-NON-ADJACENT Carriers - The configuration below maps TX with 2:1 cavity

combiners for 6 sectors/2 carriers for non-adjacent channels.

2TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 TX5 TX6 Carrier#

BBX-1 BBX-2 BBX-3 BBX-4 BBX-5 BBX-6 1

BBX-7 BBX-8 BBX-9 BBX-10 BBX-1 1 BBX-12 2

3-Sector/2-NON-ADJACENT Carriers - The configuration below maps TX with 2:1 cavity

combiners for 3 sectors/2 carriers for non-adjacent channels.

3TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 TX5 TX6 Carrier#

BBX-1 BBX-2 BBX-3 N/A N/A N/A 1

BBX-7 BBX-8 BBX-9 N/A N/A N/A 2

3-Sector/4-ADJACENT Carriers - The configuration below maps TX with 2:1 cavity combiners

for 3 sector/4 carriers for adjacent channels.

TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 TX5 TX6 Carrier#

4BBX-1 BBX-2 BBX-3 N/A N/A N/A 1

BBX-7 BBX-8 BBX-9 N/A N/A N/A 2

N/A N/A N/A BBX-4 BBX-5 BBX-6 3

N/A N/A N/A BBX-10 BBX-11 BBX-12 4

3-Sector / 2-ADJACENT Carriers - The configuration below maps TX with bandpass filters for

3 sectors/2 carriers for adjacent channels.

5TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 TX5 TX6 Carrier#

BBX-1 BBX-2 BBX-3 N/A N/A N/A 1

N/A N/A N/A BBX-7 BBX-8 BBX-9 2

3-Sector/3 or 4-NON-ADJACENT Carriers - The configuration below maps TX with 4:1

cavity combiners for 3 sectors/3 or 4 carriers for non-adjacent channels.

TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 TX5 TX6 Carrier#

6BBX-1 BBX-2 BBX-3 N/A N/A N/A 1

BBX-7 BBX-8 BBX-9 N/A N/A N/A 2

BBX-4 BBX-5 BBX-6 N/A N/A N/A 3

BBX-10 BBX-11 BBX-12 N/A N/A N/A 4

6-Sector/1-Carrier - The configuration below maps TX with either bandpass filters or 2:1 cavity

combiners for 6 sector/1 carrier.

7TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 TX5 TX6 Carrier#

BBX-1 BBX-2 BBX-3 BBX-4 BBX-5 BBX-6 1

Frame Module Location & Identification68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

1-33

Figure 1-13: +27 V SC4812T LPA Configuration with Combiners/Filters

Numbering

456

LPA 1A

LPA 1B

LPA 1C

LPA 1D

LPA 3C

LPA 3A

LPA 3B

LPA 3D

LPA 2D

LPA 2C

LPA 2B

LPA 2A

LPA 4B

LPA 4A

LPA 4C

LPA 4D

Sector

3 Sector

Sector

3 Sector

(6 Sector)

Numbering

2 to 1 Combiner

3 Sector or 6 Sector

C1, S1-3

(C1, S1-3) C2, S1-3

(C2, S1-3)

C3, S1-3

(C1, S4-6) C4, S1-3

(C2, S4-6)

(6 Sector)

123

456

LPA 1A

LPA 1B

LPA 1C

LPA 1D

LPA 3C

LPA 3A

LPA 3B

LPA 3D

LPA 2D

LPA 2C

LPA 2B

LPA 2A

LPA 4B

LPA 4A

LPA 4C

LPA 4D

Sector

Numbering Sector

Numbering

4 to 1 Combiner

3 Sector

C1, S1-3 C2, S1-3

C3, S1-3 C4, S1-3

123

LPA 1A

LPA 1B

LPA 1C

LPA 1D LPA 2D

LPA 2C

LPA 2B

LPA 2A

Sector

3 Sector

Numbering Sector

3 Sector

Numbering

Dual Bandpass Filter

3 Sector Only

C1, S1-3 C2, S1-3

123

456

LPA 1A

LPA 1B

LPA 1C

LPA 1D

LPA 3C

LPA 3A

LPA 3B

LPA 3D

Sector

Numbering Dual Bandpass Filter

6 Sector

C1, S1-3

C1, S4-6

2 Carrier Maximum 1 Carrier Only

6 Sector

123

Note: See Table 1-5 Configuration

Reference Numbers 1, 2, 3, 4. Note: See Table 1-5 Configuration

Reference Number 6.

Note: See Table 1-5 Configuration

Reference Number 5. Note: See Table 1-5 Configuration

Reference Number 7.

FW00297

Frame Module Location & Identification 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

1-34

Figure 1-14: -48 V SC4812T LPA Configuration with Combiners/Filters

Note: See Table 1-5 Configuration

Reference Numbers 1, 2, 3, 4. Note: See Table 1-5 Configuration

Reference Number 6.

Note: See Table 1-5 Configuration

Reference Number 5. Note: See Table 1-5 Configuration

Reference Number 7.

REF FW00482

Numbering

Sector

3 Sector

Sector

3 Sector

(6 Sector)

Numbering

2 to 1 Combiner

3 Sector or 6 Sector

C1, S1-3

(C1, S1-3) C2, S1-3

(C2, S1-3)

C3, S1-3

(C1, S4-6) C4, S1-3

(C2, S4-6)

(6 Sector)

LPA 1A

LPA 1B

LPA 1C

LPA 1D

LPA 3C

LPA 3A

LPA 3B

LPA 3D

LPA 2D

LPA 2C

LPA 2B

LPA 2A

LPA 4B

LPA 4A

LPA 4C

LPA 4D

Sector

Numbering Sector

Numbering

4 to 1 Combiner

3 Sector

C1, S1-3 C2, S1-3

C3, S1-3 C4, S1-3

LPA 1A

LPA 1B 1

LPA 1C

LPA 1D

LPA 3C

LPA 3A

LPA 3B

LPA 3D

LPA 2D

LPA 2C

LPA 2B

LPA 2A

LPA 4B

LPA 4A

LPA 4C

LPA 4D

LPA 1A

LPA 1B

LPA 1C

LPA 1D LPA 2D

LPA 2C

LPA 2B

LPA 2A

Sector

3 Sector

Numbering Sector

3 Sector

Numbering

Dual Bandpass Filter

3 Sector Only

C1, S1-3 C2, S1-3

2 Carrier Maximum

LPA 1A

LPA 1B

LPA 1C

LPA 1D

LPA 3C

LPA 3A

LPA 3B

LPA 3D

Sector

Numbering

Dual Bandpass Filter

6 Sector

C1, S1-3

C1, S4-6

1 Carrier Only

6 Sector

3 Sector

Frame Module Location & Identification68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

1-35

Figure 1-15: -48 V BTS Power Conversion Shelf

FW00501

PS-6

AMR

PS-5

PS-4

PS-9

PS-8

PS-7

FAN

MODULE

PWR/ALM

REAR

FRONT

FAN

MODULE

PWR/ALM

REAR

FRONT

Frame Module Location & Identification 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

1-36

Figure 1-16: CDMA (COBRA) RFDS Layout

AMR-B

(RS-485 SERIAL)

AMR-A

(RS-485 SERIAL)

Cobra RFDS external housing

(Shown With Cover off)

POWER SUPPLY

ON/OFF ROCKER

SWITCH

MMI PORT AND

PWR/ALARM LED

Cobra RFDS Field Replaceable Unit (FRU)

(shown removed from external housing)

CHASSIS GND

POWER

CONNECTOR

Cobra RFDS RF connector

panel detail

(shown from rear)

ELECTRICAL GND

FRONT VIEW

CASU 1

CASU 2

FWTIC

SUA ESN LABEL

(FOR SC XXXX SERIES BTS)

MMI

LEDS

ESN LABEL

(FOR SC 6XX SERIES BTS)

FW00138

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

2-1

Chapter 2

Preliminary Operations

Preliminary Operations: Overview 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

2-2

Preliminary Operations: Overview

Introduction

This section first verifies proper frame equipage. This includes verifying

module placement, jumper, and dual in-line package (DIP) switch

settings against the site-specific documentation supplied for each BTS

application. Next, pre-power up and initial power-up procedures are

presented.

Cell Site Types

Sites are configured as Omni with a maximum of 4 carriers, 3-sectored

with a maximum of 4 carriers, and 6-sectored with a maximum of 2

carriers. Each type has unique characteristics and must be optimized

accordingly. For more information on the differences in site types, please

refer to the BTS/Modem Frame Hardware Installation manual.

CDF

The Cell-site Data File (CDF) contains site type and equipage data

information and passes it directly to the LMF during optimization. The

number of modem frames, C-CCP shelves, BBX boards, MCC boards

(per cage), and linear power amplifier assignments are some of the

equipage data included in the CDF.

NOTE Be sure that the correct bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf files are used

for the BTS. These should be the CDF files that are provided for

the BTS by the CBSC. Failure to use the correct CDF files can

cause system errors. Failure to use the correct CDF files to log

into a live (traffic carrying) site can shut down the site.

Site Equipage Verification

Review the site documentation. Match the site engineering equipage data

to the actual boards and modules shipped to the site. Physically inspect

and verify the equipment provided for the BTS or Modem frame and

ancillary equipment frame.

CAUTION Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap while

handling any circuit card/module to prevent damage by ESD.

After removal, the card/module should be placed on a conductive

surface or back into the anti-static shipping bag.

Preliminary Operations: Overview68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

2-3

Initial Installation of Boards/Modules

Follow the procedure in Table 2-1 to verify the initial installation of

boards/modules.

Table 2-1: Initial Installation of Boards/Modules

Step Action

1Refer to the site documentation and install all boards and modules into the appropriate shelves as

required. Verify they are NOT SEATED at this time.

NOTE

On 800 MHz systems, the Switch Card has a configuration switch that must match the site

configuration (see Figure 2-1).

2As the actual site hardware is installed, record the serial number of each module on a “Serial Number

Checklist” in the site logbook.

Figure 2-1: Switch Card

Switch Card

1234

BTS

3 Sector

6 Sector

SHIELDS

Configuration

Switch

NOTE:CONFIGURATION SWITCH ON

800 MHZ SWITCH CARD ONLY.

SHOWN FOR 3 SECTOR BTS.

SWITCH 1 CHOOSES BTS OR MF.

SWITCH 4 CHOOSES 3-SECTOR OR

6 SECTOR. SWITCHES 2 & 3 ARE NOT

USED.

FW00379

Preliminary Operations: Overview 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

2-4

Setting Frame C-CCP Shelf Configuration Switch

The backplane switch settings behind the fan module nearest the breaker

panel should be set as shown in Figure 2-2.

The switch setting must be verified and set before power is applied to the

BTS equipment.

Figure 2-2: Backplane DIP Switch Settings - SC 4812T

19 mm Filter Panel

Power Supply

AMR / MACH

HSO

CSM

39 mm Filter Panel

AMR / MACH

GLI2GLI2

MCC-6

BBX-1

BBX-2

BBX-3

BBX-4

BBX-5

BBX-6

BBX-R

Switch

MPCMPC

CIO

BBX-7

BBX-8

BBX-9

BBX-10

BBX-1 1

BBX-12

MCC-5

MCC-4

MCC-3

MCC-2

MCC-1

MCC-12

MCC-11

MCC-10

MCC-9

MCC-8

MCC-7

Power Supply

CCD CCD

FAN

MODULE

PWR/ALM

REAR

FRONT

FAN

MODULE

PWR/ALM

REAR

FRONT

OFF

SC 4812T C-CCP SHELF

FAN MODULE

REMOVED

STARTER

FRAME

SETTING

OFF

EXPANSION

FRAME 1

SETTING

OFF

EXPANSION

FRAME 2

SETTING

BOTTOM / TOP

RIGHT / LEFT

MODEM_FRAME_ID_1

MODEM_FRAME_ID_0

BOTTOM / TOP

RIGHT / LEFT

MODEM_FRAME_ID_1

MODEM_FRAME_ID_0

BOTTOM / TOP

RIGHT / LEFT

MODEM_FRAME_ID_1

MODEM_FRAME_ID_0

FW00151REF

Pre-Power-up Tests68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

2-5

Pre-Power-up Tests

Objective

This procedure checks for any electrical short circuits and verifies the

operation and tolerances of the cellsite and BTS power supply units prior

to applying power for the first time.

Test Equipment

The following test equipment is required to complete the pre-power-up

tests:

SDigital Multimeter (DMM)

CAUTION Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap while

handling the any circuit card/module to prevent damage by ESD.

Cabling Inspection

Using the site-specific documentation generated by Motorola Systems

Engineering, verify that the following cable systems are properly

connected:

SReceive RF cabling - up to 12 RX cables

STransmit RF cabling - up to six TX cables

SGPS

SLFR

NOTE For positive power applications (+27 V):

SThe positive power cable is red.

SThe negative power cable (ground) is black.

For negative power applications (-48 V):

SThe negative power cable is red or blue.

SThe positive power cable (ground) is black.

In all cases, the black power cable is at ground potential.

Pre-Power-up Tests 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

2-6

DC Power Pre-test (BTS Frame)

Before applying any power to the BTS frame, follow the procedure in

Table 2-2 while referring to Figure 2-3 and Figure 2-4 for +27 V

systems or to Figure 2-5 and Figure 2-6 for -48 V systems to verify

there are no shorts in the BTS frame DC distribution system.

Table 2-2: DC Power Pre-test (BTS Frame)

Step Action

1Physically verify that all DC power sources supplying power to the frame are OFF or disabled.

2On each frame:

SUnseat all circuit boards (except CCD and CIO cards) in the C-CCP shelf and LPA shelves, but

leave them in their associated slots.

SSet C-CCP shelf breakers to the OFF position by pulling out power distribution breakers (labeled

C-CCP 1, 2, 3 on the +27 V BTS C-CCP power distribution panel and labeled POWER

1,4,5,2,6,7,3,8,9 on the -48 V C-CCP power distribution panel).

SSet LPA breakers to the OFF position by pulling out the LPA breakers (8 breakers, labeled 1A-1B

through 4C-4D - located on the C-CCP power distribution panel in the +27 V BTS or on the

power conversion shelf power distribution panel in the -48 V BTS).

3Verify that the resistance from the power (+ or -) feed terminals with respect to the ground terminal on

the top of the frame measures > 500 Ω (see Figure 2-3).

SIf reading is < 500 Ω, a short may exist somewhere in the DC distribution path supplied by the

breaker. Isolate the problem before proceeding. A reading > 3 MΩ could indicate an open (or

missing) bleeder resistor (installed across the filter capacitors behind the breaker panel).

4Set the C-CCP (POWER) breakers to the ON position by pushing them IN one at a time. Repeat

Step 3 after turning on each breaker.

NOTENOTE

If the ohmmeter stays at 0 Ω after inserting any board/module, a short probably exists in that

board/module. Replace the suspect board/module and repeat the test. If test still fails, isolate the

problem before proceeding.

5Insert and lock the DC/DC converter modules for the C-CCP shelf and into their associated slots one

at a time. Repeat Step 3 after inserting each module.

SA typical response is that the ohmmeter steadily climbs in resistance as capacitors charge, finally

indicating approximately 500 Ω.

! CAUTION

Verify the correct power/converter modules by observing the locking/retracting tabs appear as follows:

- (in +27 V BTS C-CCP shelf)

- (in -48 V BTS C-CCP shelf)

STPN4045A

PWR CONV CDMA RCVR

STPN4009

PWR CONV CDMA RCVR

6Insert and lock all remaining circuit boards and modules into their associated slots in the C-CCP shelf.

Repeat Step 3 after inserting and locking each board or module.

SA typical response is that the ohmmeter steadily climbs in resistance as capacitors charge, stopping

at approximately 500 Ω..

7Set the LPA breakers ON by pushing them IN one at a time.

Repeat Step 3 after turning on each breaker.

SA typical response is that the ohmmeter will steadily climb in resistance as capacitors charge,

stopping at approximately 500 Ω..

. . . continued on next page

Pre-Power-up Tests68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

2-7

Table 2-2: DC Power Pre-test (BTS Frame)

Step Action

8In the -48 V BTS, insert and lock the DC/DC LPA converter modules into their associated slots one at

a time.

Repeat Step 3 after inserting each module.

SA typical response is that the ohmmeter steadily climbs in resistance as capacitors charge, finally

indicating approximately 500 Ω.

! CAUTION

Verify the correct power/converter modules by observing the locking/retracting tabs appear as follows:

- (in -48 V BTS power conversion shelf)

STPN4044A

PWR CONV LPA

9Seat all LPA and associated LPA fan modules into their associated slots in the shelves one at a time.

Repeat Step 3 after seating each LPA and associated LPA fan module.

SA typical response is that the ohmmeter will steadily climb in resistance as capacitors charge,

stopping at approximately 500 Ω..

Pre-Power-up Tests 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

2-8

Figure 2-3: +27 V BTS DC Distribution Pre-test

POWER INPUT

TOP OF FRAME

BREAKER PANEL

LPA

BREAKERS

C-CCP

BREAKERS

GND

TX OUT

CAUTION

LIVE TERMINALSLIVE TERMINALS +27 VDC

LFR/

HSO

Breakering:

S Two LPAs on each trunking backplane breakered together

S Designed for peak LPA current of 15 amps (30 amp breakers)

S Unused TX paths do not need to be terminated

S Single feed for C-CCP

S Dual feed for LPA

FW00298

. . . continued on next page

Pre-Power-up Tests68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

2-9

Figure 2-4: +27 V SC 4812T BTS Starter Frame

Expansion I/O

Housing

For clarity, doors are not shown. FW00214

Front Cosmetic

Panel

Power Input

Connection

TX Out (1 - 6)

Span I/O B

Span I/O A

Site I/O

RX In (1A - 6A

and 1B - 6B)

Exhaust Region

C-CCP Cage

Breakers

Combiner

Section

RGD (Needed for

Expansion only)

LPA Cage

Pre-Power-up Tests 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

2-10

Figure 2-5: -48 V BTS DC Distribution Pre-test

POWER INPUT

TOP OF FRAME

C-CCP BREAKER

LPA

BREAKER

GND

TX OUT

CAUTION

LIVE TERMINALSLIVE TERMINALS WIRED FOR -48 VDC

LFR

HSO/

Breakering:

S Two LPAs on each trunking backplane breakered together

S Designed for peak LPA current of 15 amps (30 A breakers)

S Unused TX paths do not need to be terminated

S Single feed for C-CCP

S Dual feed for LPA

FW00483

Pre-Power-up Tests68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

2-11

Figure 2-6: -48 V SC 4812T BTS Starter Frame

FW00477

Expansion I/O

Housing

For clarity, doors are not shown.

Front Cosmetic

Panel

Power Input

Connection

TX Out (1 - 6)

Span I/O B

Span I/O A

Site I/O

RX In (1A - 6A

and 1B - 6B)

Exhaust Region

C-CCP Cage

Breakers

Combiner

Section

RGD (Needed for

Expansion only)

LPA Cage

Power

Conversion

Shelf

Breakers

Alarms 2

Pre-Power-up Tests 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

2-12

DC Power Pre-test (RFDS)

Before applying power to the RFDS, follow the steps in Table 2-3, while

referring to Figure 2-7, to verify there are no shorts in the RFDS DC

distribution system, backplanes, or modules/boards. As of the date of

this publication, the RFDS is not used with the -48 V BTS.

NOTE Visual inspection of card placement and equipage for each frame

vs. site documentation must be completed, as covered in

Table 2-1 on page 2-3, before proceeding with this test.

Table 2-3: DC Power Pre-test (RFDS)

Step Action

1Physically verify that all DC/DC converters supplying the RFDS are OFF or disabled.

2Set the input power rocker switch P1 to the OFF position (see Figure 2-7).

3Verify the initial resistance from the power (+ or -) feed terminal with respect to ground terminal

measures > 5 kΩ , then slowly begins to increase.

SIf the initial reading is < 5 kΩ and remains constant, a short exists somewhere in the DC

distribution path supplied by the breaker. Isolate the problem before proceeding.

4Set the input power rocker switch P1 to the ON position.

Repeat Step 3.

Figure 2-7: DC Distribution Pre-test (COBRA RFDS Detail)

NOTE:

Set the input power switch ON while measuring the

resistance from the DC power - with respect to the

power + terminal on the rear of the COBRA RFDS.

INPUT POWER

SWITCH (P1)

FRONT OF COBRA RFDS

(cut away view shown for clarity)

RFDS REAR

INTERCONNECT PANEL

“-” CONNECTOR

“+” CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR (MADE

UP OF A HOUSING

AND TWO PINS)

FW00139

Initial Power-up Tests68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

2-13

Initial Power-up Tests

Power-up Procedures

WARNING Potentially lethal voltage and current levels are routed to the

BTS equipment. This test must be performed with a second

person present, acting in a safety role. Remove all rings, jewelry,

and wrist watches prior to beginning this test.

DC Input Power

In the tests to follow, power will first be verified at the input to each

BTS frame. After power is verified, cards and modules within the frame

itself will be powered up and verified one at a time.

Before applying any power, verify the correct power feed and return

cables are connected between the power supply breakers and the power

connectors at the top of each BTS frame. Verify correct cable position

referring to Figure 2-3 on page 2-8 for +27 V systems and Figure 2-5

on page 2-10 for -48 V systems.

CAUTION Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap while

handling any circuit card/module to prevent damage by ESD.

Extreme care should be taken during the removal and installation

of any card/module. After removal, the card/module should be

placed on a conductive surface or back into the anti-static bag in

which it was shipped.

NOTE For positive power applications (+27 V):

SThe positive power cable is red.

SThe negative power cable (ground) is black.

For negative power applications (-48 V):

SThe negative power cable is red or blue.

SThe positive power cable (ground) is black.

In all cases, the black power cable is at ground potential.

Motorola recommends that the DC input power cable used to connect the

frame to the main DC power source conforms to the guidelines outlined

in Table 2-4.

Table 2-4: DC Input Power Cable Guidelines

Maximum Cable Length Wire Size

30.38 m (100 ft) 107 mm2 (AWG #4/0)

54.864 m (180 ft) 185 mm2 (350 kcmil)

Greater that 54.864 m (180 ft) Not recommended

NOTE If Anderson SB350 style power connectors are used, make sure

the connector adapters are securely attached to each of the BTS

power feeds and returns. Also, make sure the cables have been

properly installed into each connector.

Initial Power-up Tests 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

2-14

Common Power Supply Verification

The procedure in Table 2-5 must be performed on any BTS frame

connected to a common power supply at the site after the common power

supply has been installed and verified per the power supply OEM

suggested procedures.

Perform the following steps to verify the power input is within

specification before powering up the individual cards/modules with the

frames themselves.

Table 2-5: Common Power Supply Verification

Step Action

1Physically verify that all DC power sources supplying the frame are OFF or disabled.

2On the RFDS (for +27 V systems only), set the input power switch P1 to the OFF position (see

Figure 2-7).

3On each frame:

SUnseat all circuit boards (except CCD and CIO cards) in the C-CCP shelf and LPA shelves, but

leave them in their associated slots.

SSet breakers to the OFF position by pulling out C-CCP and LPA breakers (see Figure 2-3 on

page 2-8 or Figure 2-5 on page 2-10 for breaker panel layout if required).

- C-CCP shelf breakers are labeled CCCP-1 , 2, 3 in the +27 V BTS and labeled POWER

1,4,5,2,6,7,3,8,9 in the -48 V BTS.

- LPA breakers are labeled 1A-1B through 4C-4D.

4Inspect input cables, verify correct input power polarity via decal on top of frame (+27 Vdc or

-48 Vdc).

5Apply power to BTS frames, one at a time, by setting the appropriate breaker in the power supply that

supplies the frame to the ON position.

6After power is applied to each frame, use a digital voltmeter to verify power supply output voltages at

the top of each BTS frame are within specifications: +27.0 Vdc or -48 Vdc nominal.

Initial Power-up Tests68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

2-15

Initial Power-up (RFDS)

The procedure in Table 2-6 must be performed on the RFDS after input

power from the common power supply has been verified. Perform the

following steps to apply initial power to the cards/modules within the

frame itself, verifying that each is operating within specification.

NOTE Visual inspection of card placement and equipage for each frame

vs. site documentation must be completed, as covered in

Table 2-1, on page 2-3, before proceeding with this test.

Table 2-6: Initial Power-up (RFDS)

Step Action

1On the RFDS, set the input power rocker switch (P1) to the ON position (see Figure 2-7).

2Verify power supply output voltages (at the top of BTS frame), using a digital voltmeter, are within

specifications: +27.0 V nominal.

Initial Power-up (BTS)

The procedure must be performed on each frame after input power from

the common power supply has been verified. Follow the steps in

Table 2-7 to apply initial power to the cards/modules within the frame

itself, verifying that each is operating within specification.

Table 2-7: Initial Power-up (BTS)

Step Action

1At the BTS, set the C-CCP (POWER) power distribution breakers (see Figure 2-3 on page 2-8 or

Figure 2-5 on page 2-10) to the ON position by pushing in the breakers.

2Insert the C-CCP fan modules. Observe that the fan modules come on line.

3! CAUTION

Verify the correct power/converter modules by observing the locking/retracting tabs appear as follows:

- (in +27 V BTS C-CCP shelf)

- (in -48 V BTS C-CCP shelf)

- (in -48 V BTS power conversion shelf)

Insert and lock the converter/power supplies into their associated slots one at a time.

•If no boards have been inserted, all three PWR/ALM LEDs would indicate RED to notify the user

that there is no load on the power supplies.

- If the LED is RED, do not be alarmed. After Step 4 is performed, the LEDs should turn GREEN;

if not, then a faulty converter/power supply module is indicated and should be replaced before

proceeding.

STPN 4045A

PWR CONV CDMA RCVR

STPN 4044A

PWR CONV LPA

STPN4009

PWR CONV CDMA RCVR

4Seat and lock all remaining circuit cards and modules in the C-CCP shelf into their associated slots.

5Seat the first equipped LPA module pair into the assigned slot in the upper LPA shelf including LPA

fan.

SIn +27 V systems, observe that the LPA internal fan comes on line.

6Repeat step 5 for all remaining LPAs.

. . . continued on next page

Initial Power-up Tests 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

2-16

Table 2-7: Initial Power-up (BTS)

Step Action

7Set the LPA breakers to the ON position (per configuration) by pushing them IN one at a time. See

Figure 1-13 on page 1-33 or Figure 1-14 on page 1-34 for configurations and Figure 2-3 on page 2-8

or Figure 2-5 on page 2-10 for LPA breaker panel layout.

On +27 V frames, engage (push) LPA circuit breakers.

SConfirm LEDs on LPAs light.

On -48 V frames, engage (push) LPA PS circuit breakers.

SConfirm LPA PS fans start.

SConfirm LEDs on -48 V power converter boards light.

SConfirm LPA fans start.

SConfirm LEDs on LPAs light.

8After all cards/modules have been seated and verified, use a digital voltmeter to verify power supply

output voltages at the top of the frame remain within specifications: +27.0 Vdc or -48 Vdc nominal.

9Repeat Steps 1 through 8 for additional co-located frames (if equipped).

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-1

Chapter 3

Optimization/Calibration

Optimization/Calibration - Introduction 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-2

Optimization/Calibration - Introduction

Introduction

This section describes procedures for isolating the BTS from the span

lines, preparing and using the LMF, downloading system operating

software, CSM reference verification/optimization, set up and calibration

of the supported test equipment, transmit/receive path verification, using

the RFDS, and verifying the customer defined alarms and relay contacts

are functioning properly.

NOTE Before using the LMF, use an editor to view the “CAVEATS”

section in the “readme.txt” file in the c:\wlmf folder for any

applicable information.

Optimization Process

After a BTS is physically installed and the preliminary operations

(power up) have been completed, use the LMF to calibrate and optimize

the BTS. Motorola recommends that the optimization be accomplished

as follows:

1. Download MGLI-1 with code and data and then enable MGLI-1.

NOTE GLIs may be GLI2s or GLI3s.

2. Use the status function and verify that all of the installed devices of

the following types respond with status information: CSM, BBX,

GLI, MCC, and TSU (if RFDS is installed). If a device is installed

and powered up but is not responding and is colored gray in the BTS

display, the device is not listed in the CDF file. The CDF file must

be corrected before the device can be accessed by the LMF.

3. Download code and data to all devices of the following types:

- CSM

- BBX (may be BBX2 or BBX-1X)

- GLI (other than MGLI-1)

- MCC (may be MCC-8E, MCC24, or MCC-1X)

4. Download the RFDS TSIC (if installed).

5. Verify the operation of the GPS and HSO or LFR signals.

6. Enable the following devices (in the order listed):

- Secondary CSM

- Primary CSM

- All MCCs

7. Connect the required test equipment for a full optimization.

8. Select the test equipment.

9. Calibrate the TX and RX test cables if they have not previously been

calibrated using the CDMA LMF that will be used for the

optimization/calibration. The cable calibration values can also be

entered manually.

Optimization/Calibration - Introduction68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-3

10. Select all of the BBXs and all of the MCCs, and use the full

optimization function. The full optimization function performs TX

calibration, BLO download, TX audit, all TX tests, and all RX tests

for all selected devices.

11. If the TX calibration fails, repeat the full optimization for any failed

paths.

12. If the TX calibration fails again, correct the problem that caused the

failure and repeat the full optimization for the failed path.

13. If the TX calibration and audit portion of the full optimization passes

for a path but some of the TX or RX tests fail, correct the problem

that caused the failure and run the individual tests as required until

all TX and RX tests have passed for all paths.

Site Types

Sites are configured as Omni/Omni or Sector/Sector (TX/RX). Each type

has unique characteristics and must be optimized accordingly.

NOTE For more information on the differences in site types, please

refer to the applicable BTS/Modem Frame Hardware Installation

and Functional Hardware Description manuals.

Cell-Site Data File

The Cell-Site Data File (CDF) contains information that defines the

BTS and data used to download files to the devices. A CDF file must be

placed in the applicable BTS folder before the LMF can be used to log

into that BTS. CDF files are normally obtained from the CBSC using a

floppy disk. A file transfer protocol (ftp) method can be used if the LMF

computer has that capability.

The CDF includes the following information:

SDownload instructions and protocol

SSite specific equipage information

SC-CCP shelf allocation plan

- BBX equipage (based on cell-site type) including redundancy

- CSM equipage including redundancy

- MCC (MCC24E, MCC8E, or MCC-1X) channel element allocation

plan. This plan indicates how the C-CCP shelf is configured, and

how the paging, synchronization, traffic, and access channel

elements (and associated gain values) are assigned among the (up to

12) MCCs in the shelf.

SCSM equipage including redundancy

SEffective Rated Power (ERP) table for all TX channels to antennas

respectively. Motorola System Engineering specifies the ERP of a

transmit antenna based on site geography, antenna placement, and

government regulations. Working from this ERP requirement, the

antenna gain, (dependent on the units of measurement specified) and

antenna feed line loss can be combined to determine the required

power at the top of the BTS frame. The corresponding BBX output

level required to achieve that power level on any channel/sector can

also be determined.

Optimization/Calibration - Introduction 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-4

NOTE Refer to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide for additional

information on the layout of the LMF directory structure

(including CDF file locations and formats).

BTS System Software Download

BTS system software must be successfully downloaded to the BTS

processor boards before optimization can be performed. BTS operating

code is loaded from the LMF computer terminal.

NOTE Before using the LMF for optimization/ATP, the correct

bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf files for the BTS must be obtained

from the CBSC and put in a bts-# folder in the LMF. Failure to

use the correct CDF files can cause wrong results. Failure to use

the correct CDF files to log into a live (traffic carrying) site

can shut down the site.

The CDF is normally obtained from the CBSC on a DOS formatted

diskette, or through a file transfer protocol (ftp) if the LMF computer has

ftp capability. Refer to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide, or the LMF

Help screen, for the procedure.

Site Equipage Verification

If you have not already done so, use an editor to view the CDF, and

review the site documentation. Verify the site engineering equipage data

in the CDF matches the actual site hardware using a CDF conversion

table.

CAUTION Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap while

handling any circuit card/module to prevent damage by ESD.

Extreme care should be taken during the removal and installation

of any card/module. After removal, the card/module should be

placed on a conductive surface or back into the anti-static bag in

which it was shipped.

Isolate Span Lines/Connect LMF68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-5

Isolate Span Lines/Connect LMF

Isolate BTS from T1/E1 Spans

NOTE At active sites, the OMC/CBSC must disable the BTS and place

it out of service (OOS). DO NOT remove the 50-pin TELCO

cable connected to the BTS frame site I/O board J1 connector

until the OMC/CBSC has disabled the BTS!

Each frame is equipped with one Site I/O and two Span I/O boards. The

Span I/O J1 connector provides connection of 25 pairs of wire. A GLI

card can support up to six spans. In the SC 4812T configuration, the odd

spans (1, 3, and 5) terminate on the Span “A” I/O; and the even spans (2,

4, and 6) terminate on the Span “B” I/O.

Before connecting the LMF to the frame LAN, the OMC/CBSC must

disable the BTS and place it OOS to allow the LMF to control the

CDMA BTS. This prevents the CBSC from inadvertently sending

control information to the CDMA BTS during LMF based tests. Refer to

Figure 3-1 and Figure 3-2 as required.

Table 3-1: T1/E1 Span Isolation

Step Action

1From the OMC/CBSC, disable the BTS and place it OOS. Refer to SC OMC-R/CBSC System

Operator Procedures.

- The T1/E1 span 50-pin TELCO cable connected to the BTS frame SPAN I/O board J1 connector

can be removed from both Span I/O boards, if equipped, to isolate the spans.

NOTE

If a third party is used for span connectivity, the third party must be informed before disconnecting the

span line.

Verify that you remove the SPAN cable, not the “MODEM/TELCO” connector.

Figure 3-1: Span I/O Board T1 Span Isolation

50-PIN TELCO

CONNECTORS

REMOVED

SPAN A CONNECTOR

(TELCO) INTERFACE

TO SPAN LINES

SPAN B CONNECTOR

(TELCO) INTERFACE

TO SPAN LINES

TOP of Frame

(Site I/O and Span I/O boards)

RS-232 9-PIN SUB D

CONNECTOR SERIAL

PORT FOR EXTERNAL

DIAL UP MODEM

CONNECTION (IF USED)

FW00299

Isolate Span Lines/Connect LMF 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-6

LMF to BTS Connection

The LMF is connected to the LAN A or B connector located on the left

side of the frame’s lower air intake grill, behind the LAN Cable Access

door (see Figure 3-2).

Table 3-2: LMF to BTS Connection

Step Action

1To gain access to the connectors on the BTS, open the LAN Cable Access door, then pull apart the

Velcro tape covering the BNC “T” connector (see Figure 3-2).

2Connect the LMF to the LAN A BNC connector via PCMCIA Ethernet Adapter with an unshielded

twisted-pair (UTP) Adapter and 10BaseT/10Base2 converter (powered by an external AC/DC

transformer).

- If there is no login response, connect the LMF to the LAN B connector.

- If there is still no login response, see Table 6-1, Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedures.

NOTE

- Xircom Model PE3-10B2 or equivalent can also be used to interface the LMF Ethernet

connection to the frame connected to the PC parallel port, powered by an external AC/DC

transformer. In this case, the BNC cable must not exceed 91 cm (3 ft) in length.

! CAUTION

- The LAN shield is isolated from chassis ground. The LAN shield (exposed portion of BNC

connector) must not touch the chassis during optimization.

Figure 3-2: LMF Connection Detail

NOTE:

Open LAN CABLE ACCESS

door. Pull apart Velcro tape and

gain access to the LAN A or LAN

B LMF BNC connector.

LMF BNC “T” CONNECTIONS

ON LEFT SIDE OF FRAME

(ETHERNET “A” SHOWN;

ETHERNET “B” COVERED

WITH VELCRO TAPE)

LMF COMPUTER

TERMINAL WITH

MOUSE PCMCIA ETHERNET

ADPATER & ETHERNET

UTP ADAPTER

10BASET/10BASE2

CONVERTER CONNECTS

DIRECTLY TO BNC T

115 VAC POWER

CONNECTION FW00140

UNIVERSAL TWISTED

PAIR (UTP) CABLE (RJ11

CONNECTORS)

Preparing the LMF68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-7

Preparing the LMF

Overview

Software and files for installation and updating of the LMF are provided

on CD ROM disks. The following installation items must be available:

SLMF Program on CD ROM

SCDF for each supported BTS (on diskette or available from the

CBSC)

SCBSC File for each supported BTS (on diskette or available from the

CBSC)

The following section provides information and instructions for

installing and updating the LMF software and files.

NOTE For the CDMA LMF graphics to display properly, the computer

platform must be configured to display more than 256 colors.

See the operating system software instructions for verifying and

configuring the display settings.

CDMA LMF Home Directory

The CDMA LMF installation program creates the default home

directory, c:\wlmf, and installs the application files and subdirectories

(folders) in it. Because this can be changed at installation, the CDMA

LMF home directory will be referred to with the generic convention of:

Where:

<x> = the LMF computer drive letter where the CDMA LMF home

directory is located

<lmf home directory> = the directory path or name where the CDMA

LMF is installed.”

Preparing the LMF 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-8

LMF Operating System Installation

Follow the procedure in Table 3-3 to install the LMF operating system.

Table 3-3: LMF Operating System Installation

nStep Action

1Insert the LMF Program CD ROM into the LMF CD ROM drive.

- If the Setup screen is displayed, go to step 5.

- If the Setup screen is not displayed, proceed to step 2.

2Click on the Start button.

3 Select Run.

4In the Open box, enter d:\autorun and click on the OK button.

NOTE

If applicable, replace the letter d with the correct CD ROM drive letter.

5Follow the instructions displayed on the Setup screen.

NOTE

First Time Installations:

- Install U/WIN (First)

- Install Java Runtime Environment (Second)

- Install LMF Software (Third)

- Install/Create BTS Folders (Fourth)

Any time you install U/WIN, you must install the LMF software because the installation of the

LMF modifies some of the files that are installed during the U/Win installation. Installing U/Win

over-writes these modifications.

NOTE

There are multiple binary image packages for installation on the CD-ROM. When prompted,

choose the load that corresponds to the switch release that you currently have installed. Perform

the Device Images install after the WinLMF installation.

If applicable, a separate CD ROM of BTS Binaries may be available for binary updates.

Copy CDF Files from CBSC

Before the LMF can execute the optimization/ATP procedures for the

BTS, the correct bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf files must be

obtained from the CBSC and put in a bts-# folder in the LMF

notebook. This requires copying the CBSC CDF files to a DOS

formatted diskette, and using the diskette to install the CDF file in the

LMF.

Follow the procedure in Table 3-4 to obtain the CDF files from the

CBSC and copy the files to a diskette. For any further information, refer

to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide or the LMF Help screen.

Preparing the LMF68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-9

NOTE If the LMF has ftp capability, the ftp method can be used to copy

the CDF files from the CBSC.

On Sun OS workstations, the unix2dos command can be used in

place of the cp command (e.g., unix2dos bts-248.cdf

bts-248.cdf). This should be done using a copy of the CBSC

CDF file so the original CBSC CDF file is not changed to DOS

format.

When copying CDF files, comply with the following to prevent

BTS login problems with the LMF:

- The numbers used in the bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf

filenames must correspond to the locally assigned numbers

for each BTS and its controlling CBSC.

- The generic cbsc-1.cdf file supplied with the LMF works

with locally numbered BTS CDF files. Using this file does

not provide a valid optimization unless the generic file is

edited to replace default parameters (e.g., channel numbers)

with the operational parameters used locally.

Table 3-4: Copying CBSC CDF Files to the LMF

nStep Action

AT THE CBSC:

1Login to the CBSC workstation.

2Insert a DOS formatted diskette in the workstation drive.

3 Type eject -q and press the <Enter> key.

4 Type mount and press the <Enter> key.

NOTE

SLook for the “floppy/no_name” message on the last line displayed.

SIf the eject command was previously entered, floppy/no_name will be appended with a

number. Use the explicit floppy/no_name reference displayed when performing step 7.

5Change to the directory containing the file by typing cd <directory name> (ex. cd

bts-248 ) and pressing <Enter>.

6 Type ls <Enter> to display the list of files in the directory.

. . . continued on next page

Preparing the LMF 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-10

Table 3-4: Copying CBSC CDF Files to the LMF

nActionStep

7 With Solaris versions of Unix, create DOS-formatted versions of the bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf

files on the diskette by entering the following command:

unix2dos <source filename> /floppy/no_name/<target filename>

(e.g., unix2dos bts-248.cdf /floppy/no_name/bts-248.cdf).

NOTE

SOther versions of Unix do not support the unix2dos and dos2unix commands. In these cases,

use the Unix cp (copy) command. The copied files will be difficult to read with a DOS or

Windows text editor because Unix files do not contain line feed characters. Editing copied CDF

files on the LMF computer is, therefore, not recommended.

SUsing cp, multiple files can be copied in one operation by separating each filename to be copied

with a space and ensuring the destination directory (floppy/no_name) is listed at the end of the

command string following a space (e.g., cp bts-248.cdf cbsc-6.cdf /floppy/na_name).

8Repeat steps 5 through 7 for each bts-# that must be supported by the LMF.

9When all required files have been copied to the diskette, type eject and press the <Enter> key.

10 Remove the diskette from the CBSC.

AT THE LMF:

11 Start the Windows operating system.

12 Insert the diskette into the LMF.

13 Using Windows Explorer (or equivalent program), create a corresponding bts-# folder in the

<lmf home directory>\cdma directory for each bts-#.cdf/cbsc-#.cdf file pair copied from the

CBSC.

14 Use Windows Explorer (or equivalent program) to transfer the cbsc-#.cdf and bts-#.cdf files from

the diskette to the corresponding <lmf home directory>\cdma\bts-# folders created in step 13.

Creating a Named HyperTerminal Connection for MMI Connection

Confirming or changing the configuration data of certain BTS Field

Replaceable Units (FRUs) requires establishing an MMI communication

session between the LMF and the FRU. Using features of the Windows

operating system, the connection properties for an MMI session can be

saved on the LMF computer as a named Windows HyperTerminal

connection. This eliminates the need for setting up connection

parameters each time an MMI session is required to support

optimization.

Once the named connection is saved, a shortcut for it can be created on

the Windows desktop. Double clicking the shortcut icon will start the

connection without the need to negotiate multiple menu levels.

Follow the procedure in Table 3-5 to establish a named HyperTerminal

connection and create a WIndows desktop shortcut for it.

Preparing the LMF68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-11

Table 3-5: Creating a Named Hyperlink Connection for MMI Connection

Step Action

1From the Windows Start menu, select:

Programs>Accessories

2 Select Communications, double click the Hyperterminal folder, and then double click on the

Hyperterm.exe icon in the window that opens.

NOTE

SIf a Location Information Window appears, enter the required information, then click Close.

(This is required the first time, even if a modem is not to be used.)

SIf a You need to install a modem..... message appears, click NO.

3When the Connection Description box opens:

- Type a name for the connection being defined (e.g., MMI Session) in the Name: window.

- Highlight any icon preferred for the named connection in the Icon: chooser window.

- Click OK.

NOTE

For LMF configurations where COM1 is used by another interface such as test equipment and a

physical port is available for COM2, select COM2 to prevent conflicts.

From the Connect using: pick list in the Connect To box displayed, select the RS-232 port to be used

for the connection (e.g., COM1 or COM2 (Win NT) - or Direct to Com 1 or Direct to Com 2 (Win

98), and click OK.

5In the Port Settings tab of the COM# Properties window displayed, configure the RS-232 port

settings as follows:

SBits per second: 9600

SData bits: 8

SParity: None

SStop bits: 1

SFlow control: None

6 Click OK.

7Save the defined connection by selecting:

File>Save

8Close the HyperTerminal window by selecting:

File>Exit

9 Click Yes to disconnect when prompted.

10 Perform one of the following:

SIf the Hyperterminal folder window is still open (Win 98) proceed to step 12

SFrom the Windows Start menu, select Programs > Accessories.

. . . continued on next page

Preparing the LMF 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-12

Table 3-5: Creating a Named Hyperlink Connection for MMI Connection

Step Action

11 Perform one of the following:

SFor Win NT, select Hyperterminal and release any pressed mouse buttons.

SFor Win 98, select Communications and double click the Hyperterminal folder.

12 Highlight the newly created connection icon by moving the cursor over it (Win NT) or clicking on it

(Win 98).

13 Right click and drag the highlighted connection icon to the Windows desktop and release the right

mouse button.

14 From the pop-up menu displayed, select Create Shortcut(s) Here.

15 If desired, reposition the shortcut icon for the new connection by dragging it to another location on the

Windows desktop.

Folder Structure Overview

The LMF uses an <lmf home directory> folder that contains all of the

essential data for installing and maintaining the BTS. The list that

follows outlines the folder structure for the LMF. Except for the bts-nnn

folders, these folders are created as part of the the LMF installation.

Refer to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide for a complete description of

the folder structure.

Figure 3-3: LMF Folder Structure

version folder (A separate folder is

required for each different version; for

example, a folder name 2.8.1.1.1.5.)

loads folder

(C:)

x:\<lmf home directory> folder

cdma folder

code folder

data folder

BTS-nnn folders (A separate folder is

required for each BTS where bts-nnn is the

unique BTS number; for example, bts-163.)

NOTE The “loads” folder and all the folders below it are not available

from the LMF for Software Release 2.16.1.x. These folders may

be present as as a legacy from previous software versions or

downloaded from the CBSC/OMC-R.

Preparing the LMF68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-13

Pinging the Processors

For proper operation, the integrity of the Ethernet LAN A and B links

must be be verified. Figure 3-4 represents a typical BTS Ethernet

configuration. The drawing depicts one (of two identical) links, A and B.

Ping is a program that routes request packets to the LAN network

modules to obtain a response from the specified “targeted” BTS.

Figure 3-4: BTS LAN Interconnect Diagram

CHASSIS

GROUND

SIGNAL

GROUND

50Ω

SIGNAL

GROUND

50Ω

LMF CONNECTOR

C-CCP

CAGE

OUT

BTS

(EXPANSION)

C-CCP

CAGE

OUT

BTS

(MASTER)

OUT

FW00141

Follow the procedure in Table 3-6 and refer to Figure 3-5 or Figure 3-6,

as required, to ping each processor (on both LAN A and LAN B) and

verify LAN redundancy is operating correctly.

CAUTION Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap while

handling any circuit card/module to prevent damage by ESD.

NOTE The Ethernet LAN A and B cables must be installed on each

frame/enclosure before performing this test. All other processor

board LAN connections are made via the backplanes.

Preparing the LMF 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-14

Table 3-6: Pinging the Processors

nStep Action

1If you have not already done so, connect the LMF to the BTS (see Table 3-2 on page 3-6).

2From the Windows desktop, click the Start button and select Run.

3In the Open box, type ping and the <MGLI IP address> (for example, ping 128.0.0.2).

NOTE

128.0.0.2 is the default IP address for MGLI-1 in field BTS units. 128.0.0.1 is the default IP

address for MGLI-2.

4Click on the OK button.

5If the connection is successful, text similar to the following is displayed:

Reply from 128 128.0.0.2: bytes=32 time=3ms TTL=255

If there is no response the following is displayed:

Request timed out

If the MGLI fails to respond, reset and perform the ping process again. If the MGLI still fails to

respond, typical problems are shorted BNC to inter-frame cabling, open cables, crossed A and B

link cables, missing 50-Ohm terminators, or the MGLI itself.

Preparing the LMF68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-15

Figure 3-5: +27 V SC 4812T Starter Frame I/O Plate

OUT

LAN

GPS

SPAN I/O A SITE I/O SPAN I/O B

LFR/

ALARM B 4

GND

TX OUT

FRONT

REAR

SPAN I/O ASPAN I/O B

CAUTION

LIVE TERMINALSLIVE TERMINALS +27 VDC

HSO

ALARM A

EXP I/O

RGD

ti-CDMA-WP-00114-v01-ildoc-ftw

ETHERNET CONNECTORS

WITH 50-OHM TERMINATORS

BPR-TO-GLI

INTERCONNECT PANEL

(OPTIONAL)

Preparing the LMF 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-16

Figure 3-6: -48 V SC 4812T Starter Frame I/O Plate

OUT

LAN

GPS

SPAN I/O A SITE I/O SPAN I/O B

LFR

ALARM B 4

GND

TX OUT

SPAN I/O ASPAN I/O B

CAUTION

LIVE TERMINALSLIVE TERMINALS WIRED FOR -48VDC

HSO/

ALARM A

EXP I/O

RGD

FRONT

REAR

SITE I/O

ti-CDMA-WP-00099-v01-ildoc-ftw

ETHERNET CONNECTORS

WITH 50-OHM TERMINATORS

BPR-TO-GLI

INTERCONNECT PANEL

(OPTIONAL)

Using CDMA LMF68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-17

Using CDMA LMF

Basic LMF Operation

The CDMA LMF allows the user to work in the two following operating

environments, which are accessed using the specified desktop icon:

SGraphical User Interface (GUI) using the WinLMF icon

SCommand Line Interface (CLI) using the WinLMF CLI icon

The GUI is the primary optimization and acceptance testing operating

environment. The CLI environment provides additional capability to the

user to perform manually controlled acceptance tests and audit the

results of optimization and calibration actions.

Basic operation of the LMF GUI includes the following:

SSelecting and deselecting BTS devices

SEnabling devices

SDisabling devices

SResetting devices

SObtaining device status

SSorting a status report window

For detailed information on performing these and other LMF operations,

refer to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide.

Graphical User Interface Overview

The LMF uses a GUI, which works in the following way:

SSelect the device or devices.

SSelect the action to apply to the selected device(s).

SWhile action is in progress, a status report window displays the action

taking place and other status information.

SThe status report window indicates when the the action is complete

and displays other pertinent information.

SClicking the OK button closes the status report window.

Using CDMA LMF 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-18

Command Line Interface Overview

The LMF also provides Command Line Interface (CLI) capability.

Activate the CLI by clicking on a shortcut icon on the desktop. The CLI

can not be launched from the GUI, only from the desktop icon.

Both the GUI and the CLI use a program known as the handler. Only one

handler can be running at one time Due to architectural limitations, the

GUI must be started before the CLI if you want the GUI and CLI to use

the same handler. When the CLI is launched after the GUI, the CLI

automatically finds and uses an in-progress login session with a BTS

initiated under the GUI. This allows the use of the GUI and the CLI in

the same BTS login session. If a CLI handler is already running when

the GUI is launched (this happens if the CLI window is already running

when the user starts the GUI, or if another copy of the GUI is already

running when the user starts the GUI), a dialog window displays the

following warning message:

The CLI handler is already running.

This may cause conflicts with the LMF.

Are you sure that you want to start the application?

This window also contains yes and no buttons. Selecting yes starts the

application. Selecting no terminates the application.

CLI Format Conventions

The CLI command can be broken down in the following way:

Sverb

Sdevice including device identifier parameters

Sswitch

Soption parameters consisting of:

- keywords

- equals signs (=) between the keywords and the parameter values

- parameter values

Spaces are required between the verb, device, switch, and option

parameters. A hyphen is required between the device and its identifiers.

Following is an example of a CLI command.

measure bbx-<bts_id>-<bbx_id> rssi channel=6 sector=5

Refer to LMF CLI Commands for a complete explanation of the CLI

commands and their usage.

Using CDMA LMF68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-19

Logging into a BTS

NOTE Be sure that the correct bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf file is used for

the BTS. These should be the CDF files that are provided for the

BTS by the CBSC. Failure to use the correct CDF files can

result in invalid optimization. Failure to use the correct CDF

files to log into a live (traffic carrying) site can shut down the

site.

Logging into a BTS establishes a communications link between the BTS

and the CDMA LMF. You may be logged into more than one BTS at a

time, but only one LMF may be logged into each BTS.

Before attempting to log into the BTS, confirm the CDMA LMF is

properly connected to the BTS (see Figure 3-2).

Prerequisites

Before attempting to login to a BTS, ensure the following have been

completed:

SThe LMF operating system is correctly installed and prepared.

SA bts-nnn folder with the correct CDF and CBSC file exists.

SThe LMF is correctly installed and prepared, and the LMF computer is

connected to the BTS before starting the Windows operating system

and LMF software. If necessary, restart the computer after connecting

it to the BTS (see Table 3-2 and Figure 3-2).

BTS Login from the GUI Environment

Follow the procedure in Table 3-7 to log into a BTS when using the GUI

environment.

Table 3-7: BTS GUI Login Procedure

Step Action

1Start the CDMA LMF GUI environment by double clicking on the WinLMF desktop icon (if the LMF

is not running).

NOTE

If a warning similar to the following is displayed, select No, shut down other LMF sessions which

may be running, and start the CDMA LMF GUI environment again:

The CLI handler is already running.

This may cause conflicts with the LMF

Are you sure you want to start the application?

Yes No

2Click on the Login tab (if not displayed).

3If no base stations are displayed in the Available Base Stations pick list, double click on the CDMA

icon.

. . . continued on next page

Using CDMA LMF 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-20

Table 3-7: BTS GUI Login Procedure

Step Action

4Click on the desired BTS number.

5Click on the Network Login tab (if not already in the forefront).

6Enter the correct IP address (normally 128.0.0.2 for a field BTS) if not correctly displayed in the IP

Address box.

NOTE

128.0.0.2 is the default IP address for MGLI-1 in field BTS units. 128.0.0.1 is the default IP address

for MGLI-2.

7Type in the correct IP Port number (normally 9216) if not correctly displayed in the IP Port box.

8Click on Ping.

- If the connection is successful, the Ping Display window shows text similar to the following:

Reply from 128 128.0.0.2: bytes=32 time=3ms TTL=255

- If there is no response the following is displayed:

128.0.0.2:9216:Timed out

If the MGLI fails to respond, reset and perform the ping process again. If the MGLI still fails to

respond, typical problems are shorted BNC to inter-frame cabling, open cables, crossed A and B link

cables, missing 50-Ohm terminators, or the MGLI itself.

9Change the Multi-Channel Preselector (from the Multi-Channel Preselector pick list), normally

MPC, corresponding to your BTS configuration, if required.

NOTE

When performing RX tests on expansion frames, do not choose EMPC if the test equipment is

connected to the starter frame.

10 Click on the Use a Tower Top Amplifier, if applicable.

11 Click on Login.

A BTS tab with the BTS is displayed.

NOTE

SIf you attempt to login to a BTS that is already logged on, all devices will be gray.

SThere may be instances where the BTS initiates a log out due to a system error (i.e., a device

failure).

SIf the MGLI is OOS_ROM (blue), it will have to be downloaded with code before other devices can

be seen.

SIf the MGLI is OOS-RAM (yellow), it must be enabled before other installed devices can be seen.

Using CDMA LMF68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-21

BTS Login from the CLI Environment

Follow the procedure in Table 3-8 to log into a BTS when using the CLI

environment.

NOTE The GUI and CLI environments use the same connection to a

BTS. If a GUI and the CLI session are running for the same BTS

at the same time, logging out of the BTS in either environment

will log out of it for both. When either a login or logout is

performed in the CLI window, there is no GUI indication that

logout has occurred.

Table 3-8: BTS CLI Login Procedure

Step Action

1Double click the WinLMF CLI desktop icon (if the LMF CLI environment is not already running).

NOTE

If a BTS was logged into under a GUI session when the CLI environment was started, the CLI session

will be logged into the same BTS, and step 2 is not required.

2At the /wlmf prompt, enter the following command:

where:

host = MGLI card IP address (defaults to address last logged into for this BTS or 128.0.0.2 if this is

first login to this BTS).

port = IP port of the BTS (defaults to port last logged into for this BTS or 9216 if this is first login to

this BTS).

A response similar to the following will be displayed:

LMF>

13:08:18.882 Command Received and Accepted

COMMAND=login bts-33

13:08:18.882 Command In Progress

13:08:21.275 Command Successfully Completed

REASON_CODE=”No Reason”

Using CDMA LMF 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-22

Logging Out

Logging out of a BTS is accomplished differently for the GUI and the

CLI operating environments.

NOTE The GUI and CLI environments use the same connection to a

BTS. If a GUI and the CLI session are running for the same BTS

at the same time, logging out of the BTS in either environment

will log out of it for both. When either a login or logout is

performed in the CLI window, there is no GUI indication that

logout has occurred.

Logging Out of a BTS from the GUI Environment

Follow the procedure in Table 3-9 to logout of a BTS when using the

GUI environment.

Table 3-9: BTS GUI Logout Procedure

Step Action

1Click on BTS on the BTS tab menu bar.

2Click the Logout item in the pull-down menu.

A Confirm Logout pop-up message appears.

3Click on Yes or press the <Enter> key to confirm logout.

You are returned to the Login tab.

NOTE

If a logout was previously performed on the BTS from a CLI window running at the same time as the

GUI, a Logout Error pop-up message appears stating the system should not log out of the BTS.

When this occurs, the GUI must be exited and restarted before it can be used for further operations.

4If a Logout Error pop-up message appears stating that the system could not log out of the Base

Station because the given BTS is not logged in, perform the following actions:

- Click OK.

- Select File>Exit in the window menu bar.

- Click Yes in the Confirm Logout pop-up.

- Click Yes in the Logout Error pop-up which appears again.

5If further work is to be done in the GUI, restart it.

NOTE

SThe Logout item on the BTS menu bar will only log you out of the displayed BTS.

SYou can also log out of all BTS sessions and exit LMF by clicking on the File selection in the menu

bar and selecting Exit from the File menu list. A Confirm Logout pop-up message will appear.

Using CDMA LMF68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-23

Logging Out of a BTS from the CLI Environment

Follow the procedure in Table 3-9 to logout of a BTS when using the

CLI environment.

Table 3-10: BTS CLI Logout Procedure

Step Action

NOTE

If the BTS is also logged into from a GUI running at the same time and further work must be done

with it in the GUI, proceed to step 2.

1Logout of a BTS by entering the following command:

logout bts-<bts#>

A response similar to the following is displayed:

LMF>

12:22:58.028 Command Received and Accepted

Command=logout bts-33

12:22:58.028 Command Received and Accepted

12:22:58.028 Command Successfully Completed

REASON_CODE=”No Reason”

2If desired, close the CLI interface by entering the following command:

exit

A response similar to the following is displayed before the window closes:

Killing background processes....

Using CDMA LMF 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-24

Establishing an MMI Communication Session

For those procedures that require MMI communications between the

LMF and BTS FRUs, follow the procedure in Table 3-11 to initiate the

communication session.

NOTE If the LMF GUI is running and the LMF is logged into a BTS,

the LMF cannot initiate a hyperterminal session on the COM

port normally used to communicate with the test equipment.

Also, if the LMF has only one COM port, you cannot operate

test equipment and have a hyperterminal session running at the

same time.

Table 3-11: Establishing MMI Communications

Step Action

1Connect the LMF computer to the equipment as detailed in the applicable procedure that requires the

MMI communication session.

2Start the named HyperTerminal connection for MMI sessions by double clicking on its desktop

shortcut.

NOTE

If a desktop shortcut was not created for the MMI connection, access the connection from the Start

menu by selecting:

Programs>Accessories>Hyperterminal>HyperTerminal><Named HyperTerminal Connection

(e.g., MMI Session).

3Once the connection window opens, establish MMI communication with the BTS FRU by pressing

the LMF computer <Enter> key until the prompt identified in the applicable procedure is obtained.

Figure 3-7: CDMA LMF Computer Common MMI Connections

NULL MODEM

BOARD

(TRN9666A)

8-PIN TO 10-PIN

RS-232 CABLE

(P/N 30-09786R01)

RS-232 CABLE

8-PIN

CDMA LMF

COMPUTER

To FRU MMI port

DB9-TO-DB25

ADAPTER

COM1

COM2

FW00687

Download the BTS68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-25

Download the BTS

Download the BTS - Overview

Before a BTS can operate, each equipped device must contain device

initialization (ROM) code. ROM code is loaded in all devices during

manufacture or factory repair. Device application (RAM) code and data

must be downloaded to each equipped device by the user before the BTS

can be made fully functional for the site where it is installed.

ROM Code

Downloading ROM code to BTS devices from the LMF is NOT routine

maintenance nor a normal part of the optimization process. It is only

done in unusual situations where the resident ROM code in the device

does not match the release level of the site operating software AND the

CBSC cannot communicate with the BTS to perform the download. If

you must download ROM code, refer to Appendix H.

Before ROM code can be downloaded from the LMF, the correct ROM

code file for each device to be loaded must exist on the LMF computer.

NOTE The ROM code file is not available for GLI3s. GLI3s are ROM

code loaded at the factory.

RAM Code

Before RAM code can be downloaded from the CDMA LMF, the correct

RAM code file for each device must exist on the LMF computer. RAM

code can be automatically or manually selected depending on the Device

menu item chosen and where the RAM code file for the device is stored

in the CDMA LMF file structure. The RAM code file is selected

automatically if the file is in the \lmf\cdma\loads\n.n.n.n\code folder

(where n.n.n.n is the version number of the download code). The RAM

code file in the code folder must have the correct hardware bin number.

RAM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After the

download is started, the device being downloaded changes to OOS-ROM

(blue). When the download is completed successfully, the device

changes to OOS-RAM (yellow). When code is downloaded to an MGLI,

the LMF automatically also downloads data, and then enables the MGLI.

When enabled, the MGLI changes to INS (green).

For non-MGLI devices, data must be downloaded after RAM code is

downloaded. To download data, the device state must be OOS-RAM

(yellow).

Download the BTS 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-26

Download Code to Devices

Code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After the

download starts, the device being downloaded changes to

OOS_ROM (blue). If the download is completed successfully, the device

changes to OOS_RAM with code loaded (yellow). Prior to downloading

a device, a code file must exist. The code file is selected automatically if

the code file is in the /lmf/cdma/n.n.n.n/code folder (where n.n.n.n is the

version number of the download code that matches the “NextLoad”

parameter in the CDF file). The code file in the code folder must have

the correct hardware bin number. Code can be automatically or manually

selected.

The following are the devices to be downloaded:

SSpan Configuration

- Master Group Line Interface (MGLI2 or MGLI3)

- Group Line Interface (GLI2 or GLI3)

SClock Synchronization Module (CSM)

SMulti Channel Card (MCC24E, MCC8E or MCC-1X)

SBroadband Transceiver (BBX2 or BBX-1X)

STest Subscriber Interface Card (TSIC) - if RFDS is installed

NOTE The MGLI must be successfully downloaded with code and data,

and put INS before downloading any other device. The

download code process for an MGLI automatically downloads

data and enables the MGLI before downloading other devices.

The other devices can be downloaded in any order.

Follow the procedure in Table 3-12 to download the firmware

application code for the MGLI. The download code action downloads

data and also enables the MGLI.

Prerequisite

Prior to performing this procedure, ensure a code file exists for each of

the devices to be downloaded.

Table 3-12: Download and Enable MGLI

nStep Action

1 Select Tools>Update Next Load>CDMA function to ensure the Next Load parameter is set to the

correct code version level.

2Download code to the primary MGLI by clicking on the MGLI.

- From the Device pull down menu, select Download>Code/Data.

A status report confirms change in the device(s) status.

- Click OK to close the status window. (The MGLI should automatically be downloaded with

data and enabled.)

3Download code and data to the redundant MGLI but do not enable at this time.

Download the BTS68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-27

Download Code and Data to Non-GLI Devices

Non-GLI devices can be downloaded individually or all equipped

devices can be downloaded with one action. Follow the procedure in

Table 3-13 to download code and data to the non-GLI devices.

NOTE - When downloading multiple devices, the download may

fail for some of the devices (a time out occurs). These

devices can be downloaded separately after completing the

multiple download.

- CSM devices are RAM code-loaded at the factory. RAM

code is downloaded to CSMs only if updating to a newer

software version.

Table 3-13: Download Code and Data to Non-GLI Devices

nStep Action

1Select all devices to be downloaded.

2From the Device pull down menu, select Download>Code/Data.

A status report displays the result of the download for each selected device.

Click OK to close the status window.

NOTE

After the download has started, the device being downloaded changes to blue. If the download is

completed successfully, the device changes to yellow (OOS-RAM with code loaded).

After a BBX, CSM or MCC is successfully downloaded with code and has changed to

OOS-RAM, the status LED should be rapidly flashing GREEN.

NOTE

The command in Step 2 loads both code and data. Data can be downloaded without doing a code

download anytime a device is OOS-RAM using the command in Step 3.

3To download the firmware application data to each device, select the target device and select:

Device>Download>Data

Download the BTS 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-28

Select CSM Clock Source

A CSM can have three different clock sources. The Clock Source

function can be used to select the clock source for each of the three

inputs. This function is only used if the clock source for a CSM needs to

be changed. The Clock Source function provides the following clock

source options:

SLocal GPS

SMate GPS

SRemote GPS

SHSO (only for sources 2 & 3)

SHSO Extender

SHSOX (only for sources 2 & 3)

SLFR (only for sources 2 & 3)

S10 MHz (only for sources 2 & 3)

SNONE (only for sources 2 & 3)

Prerequisites

MGLI=INS_ACT

CSM= OOS_RAM or INS_ACT

Follow the procedure in Table 3-14 to select a CSM Clock Source.

Table 3-14: Select CSM Clock Source

Step Action

1Select the applicable CSM(s).

2Click on the Device menu.

3Click on the CSM/MAWI menu item.

4Click on the Select Clock Source menu item.

A clock source selection window is displayed.

5Select the applicable clock source in the Clock Reference Source pick lists.

Uncheck the related check box if you do not want the displayed pick list item to be used.

6Click on the OK button.

A status report window displays the results of the selection action.

7Click on the OK button to close the status report window.

Enable CSMs

Each BTS CSM system features two CSM boards per site. In a typical

operation, the primary CSM locks its Digital Phase Locked Loop

(DPLL) circuits to GPS signals. These signals are generated by either an

on-board GPS module (RF-GPS) or a remote GPS receiver (R-GPS).

The CSM2 card is required when using the R-GPS. The GPS receiver

(mounted on CSM-1) is the primary timing reference and synchronizes

the entire cellular system. CSM-2 provides redundancy but does not

have a GPS receiver.

Download the BTS68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-29

The BTS may be equipped with a remote GPS, LORAN-C LFR, HSO

10 MHz Rubidium source, or HSOX for expansion frames, which the

CSM can use as a secondary timing reference. In all cases, the CSM

monitors and determines what reference to use at a given time.

NOTE - CSMs are code loaded at the factory. This data is retained

in EEPROM. The download code procedure is required in

the event it becomes necessary to code load CSMs with

updated software versions. Use the status function to

determine the current code load versions.

- For non-RGPS sites only, verify the CSM configured with

the GPS receiver “daughter board” is installed in the

CSM-1 slot before continuing.

- The CSM(s) to be enabled must have been downloaded

with code (Yellow, OOS-RAM) and data.

Follow the procedure in Table 3-15 to enable the CSMs.

Table 3-15: Enable CSMs

nStep Action

1Verify the CSM(s) have been downloaded with code (Yellow, OOS-RAM) and data.

2Click on the target CSM.

From the Device pull down, select Enable.

NOTE

If equipped with two CSMs, enable CSM-2 first and then CSM-1.

A status report confirms change in the device(s) status.

Click OK to close the status window.

NOTE

FAIL may be shown in the status table for enable action. If Waiting For Phase Lock is shown in

the Description field, the CSM changes to the enabled state after phase lock is achieved. CSM-1

houses the GPS receiver. The enable sequence can take up to one hour to complete.

NOTE

The GPS satellite system satellites are not in a geosynchronous orbit and are maintained and

operated by the United States Department of Defense (D.O.D.). The D.O.D. periodically alters

satellite orbits; therefore, satellite trajectories are subject to change. A GPS receiver that is INS

contains an “almanac” that is updated periodically to take these changes into account.

If an installed GPS receiver has not been updated for a number of weeks, it may take up to one

hour for the GPS receiver “almanac” to be updated.

Once updated, the GPS receiver must track at least four satellites and obtain (hold) a 3-D position

fix for a minimum of 45 seconds before the CSM will come in-service. (In some cases, the GPS

receiver needs to track only one satellite, depending on accuracy mode set during the data load.)

NOTE

If equipped with two CSMs, the LMF should display CSM-1 as bright GREEN (INS-ACT) and

CSM-2 as dark green (INS-STB). After the CSMs have been successfully enabled, the

PWR/ALM LEDs are steady green (alternating green/red indicates the card is in an alarm state).

3If more than an hour has passed, refer to Table 3-19 and Table 3-20 to determine the cause.

Download the BTS 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-30

Enable MCCs

This procedure configures the MCC and sets the “TX fine adjust”

parameter. The “TX fine adjust” parameter is not a transmit gain setting,

but a timing adjustment that compensates for the processing delay in the

BTS (approximately 3 ms).

Follow the procedure in Table 3-16 to enable the MCCs.

NOTE The MGLI and primary CSM must be downloaded and enabled

(IN-SERVICE ACTIVE) before downloading and enabling the

MCC.

Table 3-16: Enable MCCs

nStep Action

1Verify the MCC(s) have been downloaded with code (Yellow, OOS-RAM) and data.

2Select the MCCs to be enabled or from the Select pull-down menu choose MCCs.

3From the Device menu, select Enable

A status report confirms change in the device(s) status.

4Click on OK to close the status report window.

Enable Redundant GLIs

Follow the procedure in Table 3-17 to enable the redundant GLI(s).

Table 3-17: Enable Redundant GLIs

nStep Action

1Select the target redundant GLI(s).

2From the Device menu, select Enable.

A status report window confirms the change in the device(s) status and the enabled GLI(s) is

green.

3Click on OK to close the status report window.

CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-31

CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification

CSM & LFR Background

The primary function of the Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM)

boards (slots 1 and 2) is to maintain CDMA system time. The CSM in

slot 1 is the primary timing source while slot 2 provides redundancy. The

CSM2 card (CSM second generation) is required when using the remote

GPS receiver (R-GPS). R-GPS uses a GPS receiver in the antenna head

that has a digital output to the CSM2 card. CSM2 can have a daughter

card as a local GPS receiver to support an RF-GPS signal.

The CSM2 switches between the primary and redundant units (slots 1

and 2) upon failure or command. CDMA Clock Distribution

Cards (CCDs) buffer and distribute even-second reference and 19.6608

MHz clocks. CCD-1 is married to CSM-1 and CCD-2 is married to

CSM 2. A failure on CSM-1 or CCD-1 cause the system to switch to

redundant CSM-2 and CCD-2.

In a typical operation, the primary CSM locks its Digital Phase Locked

Loop (DPLL) circuits to GPS signals. These signals are generated by

either an on-board GPS module (RF-GPS) or a remote GPS receiver

(R-GPS). The CSM2 card is required when using the R-GPS. DPLL

circuits employed by the CSM provide switching between the primary

and redundant unit upon request. Synchronization between the primary

and redundant CSM cards, as well as the LFR or HSO back-up source,

provides excellent reliability and performance.

Each CSM board features an ovenized, crystal oscillator that provides

19.6608 MHz clock, even second tick reference, and 3 MHz sinewave

reference, referenced to the selected synchronization source (GPS,

LORAN-C Frequency Receiver (LFR), or High Stability Oscillator

(HSO), T1 Span, or external reference oscillator sources). The 3 MHz

signals are also routed to the RDM EXP 1A & 1B connectors on the top

interconnect panel for distribution to co-located frames at the site.

Fault management has the capability of switching between the GPS

synchronization source and the LFR/HSO backup source in the event of

a GPS receiver failure on CSM-1. During normal operation, the CSM-1

board selects GPS as the primary source (see Table 3-19). The source

selection can also be overridden via the LMF or by the system software.

All boards are mounted in the C-CCP shelf at the top of the BTS frame.

Figure 1-10 on page 1-28 illustrates the location of the boards in the

BTS frame.

CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-32

Low Frequency Receiver/

High Stability Oscillator

The CSM handles the overall configuration and status monitoring

functions of the LFR/HSO. In the event of GPS failure, the LFR/HSO is

capable of maintaining synchronization initially established by the GPS

reference signal.

The LFR requires an active external antenna to receive LORAN RF

signals. Timing pulses are derived from this signal, which is

synchronized to Universal Time Coordinates (UTC) and GPS time. The

LFR can maintain system time indefinitely after initial GPS lock.

The HSO is a high stability 10 MHz oscillator with the necessary

interface to the CSMs. The HSO is typically installed in those

geographical areas not covered by the LORAN-C system. Since the

HSO is a free-standing oscillator, system time can only be maintained

for 24 hours after 24 hours of GPS lock.

Upgrades and Expansions: LFR2/HSO2/HSOX

LFR2/HSO2 (second generation cards) both export a timing signal to the

expansion or logical BTS frames. The associated expansion or logical

frames require an HSO-expansion (HSOX) whether the starter frame has

an LFR2 or an HSO2. The HSOX accepts input from the starter frame

and interfaces with the CSM cards in the expansion frame. LFR and

LFR2 use the same source code in source selection (see Table 3-18).

HSO, HSO2, and HSOX use the same source code in source selection

(see Table 3-18).

NOTE Allow the base site and test equipment to warm up for 60

minutes after any interruption in oscillator power. CSM board

warm-up allows the oscillator oven temperature and oscillator

frequency to stabilize prior to test. Test equipment warm-up

allows the Rubidium standard timebase to stabilize in frequency

before any measurements are made.

Front Panel LEDs

The status of the LEDs on the CSM boards are as follows:

SSteady Green - Master CSM locked to GPS or LFR (INS).

SRapidly Flashing Green - Standby CSM locked to GPS or LFR

(STBY).

SFlashing Green/Rapidly Flashing Red - CSM OOS-RAM attempting

to lock on GPS signal.

SRapidly Flashing Green and Red - Alarm condition exists. Trouble

Notifications (TNs) are currently being reported to the GLI.

CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-33

CSM Frequency Verification

The objective of this procedure is the initial verification of the CSM

boards before performing the RF path verification tests. Parts of this

procedure will be repeated for final verification after the overall

optimization has been completed.

Null Modem Cable

A null modem cable is required. It is connected between the MMI port

of the primary CSM and the null modem board. Figure 3-8 shows the

wiring detail for the null modem cable.

Figure 3-8: Null Modem Cable Detail

GND

RTS

CTS

RSD/DCD

DTR

GND

RTS

CTS

RSD/DCD

DTR

ON BOTH CONNECTORS

SHORT PINS 7, 8;

SHORT PINS 1, 4, & 6

9-PIN D-FEMALE 9-PIN D-FEMALE

DSR DSR

FW00362

Prerequisites

Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:

SThe LMF is NOT logged into the BTS.

SThe COM1 port is connected to the MMI port of the primary CSM via

a null modem board.

Test Equipment Setup: GPS & LFR/HSO Verification

Follow the procedure in Table 3-18 to set up test equipment while

referring to Figure 3-9 as required.

Table 3-18: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification)

Step Action

1Perform one of the following operations:

SFor local GPS (RF-GPS), verify a CSM board with a GPS receiver is installed in primary CSM

slot 1 and that CSM-1 is INS.

This is verified by checking the board ejectors for kit number SGLN1145 on the board in slot 1.

SFor Remote GPS (RGPS), verify a CSM2 board is installed in primary slot 1 and that CSM-1 is

INS.

This is verified by checking the board ejectors for kit number SGLN4132ED (or later).

2Remove CSM-2 (if installed) and connect a serial cable from the LMF COM 1 port (via null modem

board) to the MMI port on CSM-1.

3Reinstall CSM-2.

. . . continued on next page

CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-34

Table 3-18: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification)

Step Action

4Start an MMI communication session with CSM-1 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (see

Table 3-5)

NOTE

The LMF program must not be running when a Hyperterminal session is started if COM1 is being

used for the MMI session.

5When the terminal screen appears, press the <Enter> key until the CSM> prompt appears.

Figure 3-9: CSM MMI terminal connection

NULL MODEM

BOARD

(TRN9666A)

RS-232 SERIAL

MODEM CABLE

DB9-TO-DB25

ADAPTER

COM1

LMF

NOTEBOOK

FW00372

CSM board shown

removed from frame

19.6 MHZ TEST

POINT REFERENCE

(NOTE 1)

EVEN SECOND

TICK TEST POINT

REFERENCE

GPS RECEIVER

ANTENNA INPUT

GPS RECEIVER

MMI SERIAL

PORT

ANTENNA COAX

CABLE

REFERENCE

OSCILLATOR

9-PIN TO 9-PIN

RS-232 CABLE

NOTES:

1. One LED on each CSM:

Green = IN-SERVICE ACTIVE

Fast Flashing Green = OOS-RAM

Red = Fault Condition

Flashing Green & Red = Fault

CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-35

GPS Initialization/Verification

Follow the procedure in Table 3-19 to initialize and verify proper GPS

receiver operation.

Prerequisites

Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:

SThe LMF is not logged into the BTS.

SThe COM1 port is connected to the MMI port of the primary CSM via

a null modem board (see Figure 3-9).

SThe primary CSM and HSO (if equipped) have been warmed up for at

least 15 minutes.

CAUTION Connect the GPS antenna to the GPS RF connector ONLY.

Damage to the GPS antenna and/or receiver can result if the

GPS antenna is inadvertently connected to any other RF

connector.

CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-36

Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/Verification

Step Action

1To verify that Clock alarms (0000), Dpll is locked and has a reference source, and

GPS self test passed messages are displayed within the report, issue the following MMI

command

bstatus

- Observe the following typical response:

Clock Alarms (0000):

DPLL is locked and has a reference source.

GPS receiver self test result: passed

Time since reset 0:33:11, time since power on: 0:33:11

2Enter the following command at the CSM> prompt to display the current status of the Loran and the

GPS receivers.

sources

- Observe the following typical response for systems equipped with LFR:

N Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid

-------------------------------------------------------------------------

0LocalGPS Primary 4 YES Good 00Yes

1 LFR CHA Secondary 4 YES Good -2013177 -2013177 Yes

2 Not Used

Current reference source number: 0

- Observe the following typical response for systems equipped with HSO:

Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid

----------------------------------------------------------------------------

0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good 3 0 Yes

1HSO Backup 4 No N/A timed-out* Timed-out* No

*NOTE “Timed-out” should only be displayed while the HSO is warming up. “Not-Present” or

“Faulty” should not be displayed. If the HSO does not appear as one of the sources, then configure the

HSO as a back-up source by entering the following command at the CSM> prompt:

ss 1 12

After a maximum of 15 minutes, the Rubidium oscillator should reach operational temperature and the

LED on the HSO should now have changed from red to green. After the HSO front panel LED has

changed to green, enter sources <cr> at the CSM> prompt. Verify that the HSO is now a valid

source by confirming that the bold text below matches the response of the “sources” command.

The HSO should be valid within one (1) minute, assuming the DPLL is locked and the HSO rubidium

oscillator is fully warmed.

Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid

----------------------------------------------------------------------------

0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good 3 0 Yes

1HSO Backup 4 Yes N/A xxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxx Yes

3HSO information (underlined text above, verified from left to right) is usually the #1 reference source.

If this is not the case, have the OMCR determine the correct BTS timing source has been identified in

the database by entering the display bts csmgen command and correct as required using the edit

csm csmgen refsrc command.

. . . continued on next page

CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-37

Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/Verification

Step Action

4If any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify:

- If LED is RED, verify that HSO had been powered up for at least 5 minutes. After oscillator

temperature is stable, LED should go GREEN Wait for this to occur before continuing !

- If “timed out” is displayed in the Last Phase column, suspect the HSO output buffer or oscillator

is defective

- Verify the HSO is FULLY SEATED and LOCKED to prevent any possible board warpage

5Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above):

- GPS information is usually the 0 reference source.

- At least one Primary source must indicate “Status = good” and “Valid = yes” to bring site up.

6Enter the following command at the CSM> prompt to verify that the GPS receiver is in tracking mode.

gstatus

- Observe the following typical response:

24:06:08 GPS Receiver Control Task State: tracking satellites.

24:06:08 Time since last valid fix: 0 seconds.

24:06:08

24:06:08 Recent Change Data:

24:06:08 Antenna cable delay 0 ns.

24:06:08 Initial position: lat 117650000 msec, lon -350258000 msec, height 0 cm (GPS)

24:06:08 Initial position accuracy (0): estimated.

24:06:08

24:06:08 GPS Receiver Status:

24:06:08 Position hold: lat 118245548 msec, lon -350249750 msec, height 20270 cm

24:06:08 Current position: lat 118245548 msec, lon -350249750 msec, height 20270 cm

(GPS)

24:06:08 8 satellites tracked, receiving 8 satellites, 8 satellites visible.

24:06:08 Current Dilution of Precision (PDOP or HDOP): 0.

24:06:08 Date & Time: 1998:01:13:21:36:11

24:06:08 GPS Receiver Status Byte: 0x08

24:06:08 Chan:0, SVID: 16, Mode: 8, RSSI: 148, Status: 0xa8

24:06:08 Chan:1, SVID: 29, Mode: 8, RSSI: 132, Status: 0xa8

24:06:08 Chan:2, SVID: 18, Mode: 8, RSSI: 121, Status: 0xa8

24:06:08 Chan:3, SVID: 14, Mode: 8, RSSI: 110, Status: 0xa8

24:06:08 Chan:4, SVID: 25, Mode: 8, RSSI: 83, Status: 0xa8

24:06:08 Chan:5, SVID: 3, Mode: 8, RSSI: 49, Status: 0xa8

24:06:08 Chan:6, SVID: 19, Mode: 8, RSSI: 115, Status: 0xa8

24:06:08 Chan:7, SVID: 22, Mode: 8, RSSI: 122, Status: 0xa8

24:06:08

24:06:08 GPS Receiver Identification:

24:06:08 SFTW P/N # 98-P36830P

24:06:08 SOFTWARE VER # 8

24:06:08 SOFTWARE REV # 8

24:06:08 SOFTWARE DATE 6 AUG 1996

24:06:08 MODEL # B3121P1115

24:06:08 HDWR P/N # _

24:06:08 SERIAL # SSG0217769

24:06:08 MANUFACTUR DATE 6B07

24:06:08 OPTIONS LIST IB

24:06:08 The receiver has 8 channels and is equipped with TRAIM.

. . . continued on next page

CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-38

Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/Verification

Step Action

7Verify the following GPS information (shown above in underlined text):

- At least 4 satellites are tracked, and 4 satellites are visible.

- GPS Receiver Control Task State is “tracking satellites”. Do not continue until this occurs!

- Dilution of Precision indication is not more that 30.

Record the current position base site latitude, longitude, height and height reference (height reference

to Mean Sea Level (MSL) or GPS height (GPS). (GPS = 0 MSL = 1).

8If steps 1 through 7 pass, the GPS is good.

NOTE

If any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify that:

- If Initial position accuracy is “estimated” (typical), at least 4 satellites must be tracked and

visible (1 satellite must be tracked and visible if actual lat, log, and height data for this site has

been entered into CDF file).

- If Initial position accuracy is “surveyed”, position data currently in the CDF file is assumed to be

accurate. GPS will not automatically survey and update its position.

- The GPS antenna is not obstructed or misaligned.

- GPS antenna connector center conductor measures approximately +5 Vdc with respect to the

shield.

- There is no more than 4.5 dB of loss between the GPS antenna OSX connector and the BTS frame

GPS input.

- Any lightning protection installed between GPS antenna and BTS frame is installed correctly.

9Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to verify that the CSM is warmed up and that GPS

acquisition has taken place.

debug dpllp

Observe the following typical response if the CSM is not warmed up (15 minutes from application of

power) (If warmed-up proceed to step 10)

CSM>DPLL Task Wait. 884 seconds left.

DPLL Task Wait. 882 seconds left.

DPLL Task Wait. 880 seconds left. ...........etc.

NOTE

The warm command can be issued at the MMI port used to force the CSM into warm-up, but the

reference oscillator will be unstable.

. . . continued on next page

CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-39

Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/Verification

Step Action

10 Observe the following typical response if the CSM is warmed up.

c:17486 off: -11, 3, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 3 S1:-2013175,-2013175

c:17470 off: -11, 1, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 1 S1:-2013175,-2013175

c:17486 off: -11, 3, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 3 S1:-2013175,-2013175

c:17470 off: -11, 1, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 1 S1:-2013175,-2013175

11 Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above, from left to right):

- Lower limit offset from tracked source variable is not less than -60 (equates to 3µs limit).

- Upper limit offset from tracked source variable is not more than +60 (equates to 3µs limit).

- TK SRC: 0 is selected, where SRC 0 = GPS.

12 Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to exit the debug mode display.

debug dpllp

LFR Initialization/Verification

The LORAN-C LFR is a full size card that resides in the C-CCP Shelf.

The LFR is a completely self-contained unit that interfaces with the

CSM via a serial communications link. The CSM handles the overall

configuration and status monitoring functions of the LFR.

The LFR receives a 100 kHz, 35 kHz BW signal from up to 40 stations

(8 chains) simultaneously and provides the following major functions:

SAutomatic antenna pre-amplifier calibration (using a second

differential pair between LFR and LFR antenna)

SA 1 second ±200 ηs strobe to the CSM

If the BTS is equipped with an LFR, follow the procedure in Table 3-20

to initialize the LFR and verify proper operation as a backup source for

the GPS.

NOTE If CSMRefSrc2 = 2 in the CDF file, the BTS is equipped with

an LFR. If CSMRefSrc2 = 18, the BTS is equipped with an

HSO.

CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-40

Table 3-20: LFR Initialization/Verification

Step Action Note

1At the CSM> prompt, enter lstatus <cr> to verify that the LFR is in tracking

mode. A typical response is:

CSM> lstatus <cr>

LFR St ti St t

LFR Station Status:

Clock coherence: 512 >

5930M 51/60 dB 0 S/N Flag:

5930X 52/64 dn -1 S/N Flag:

5990 47/55 dB -6 S/N Flag:

7980M 62/66 dB 10 S/N Fl

This must be greater

than 100 before LFR

becomes a valid source.

7980M 62/66 dB 10 S/N Flag:

7980W 65/69 dB 14 S/N Flag: . PLL Station . >

7980X 48/54 dB -4 S/N Flag:

7980Y 46/58 dB -8 S/N Flag:E

7980Z 60/67 dB 8 S/N Flag:

8290M 50/65 dB 0 S/N Flag

This shows the LFR is

locked to the selected

PLL station.

8290M 50/65 dB 0 S/N Flag:

8290W 73/79 dB 20 S/N Flag:

8290W 58/61 dB 6 S/N Flag:

8970M 89/95 dB 29 S/N Flag:

8970W 62/66 dB 10 S/N Flag:

8970X 73/79 dB 22 S/N Flag:

8970X 73/79 dB 22 S/N Fl

ag:

8970Y 73/79 dB 19 S/N Flag:

8970Z 62/65 dB 10 S/N Flag:

9610M 62/65 dB 10 S/N Fl

9610M 62/65 dB 10 S/N Flag:

9610V 58/61 dB 8 S/N Flag:

9610W 47

49 dB -4 S

N Fla

9610W 47/49 dB -4 S/N Flag:E

9610X 46/57 dB -5 S/N Flag:E

9610Y 48/54 dB -5 S/N Flag:E

9610Z 65/69 dB 12 S/N Flag

9610Z 65/69 dB 12 S/N Flag:

9940M 50/53 dB -1 S/N Flag:S

9940W 49/56 dB -4 S/N Flag:E

9940W 49/56 dB 4 S/N Flag:E

9940Y 46/50 dB-10 S/N Flag:E

9960M 73/79 dB 22 S/N Flag:

9960W 51/60 dB 0 S/N Flag:

9960W 51/60 dB 0 S/N Fl

ag:

9960X 51/63 dB -1 S/N Flag:

9960Y 59/67 dB 8 S/N Flag:

9960Z 89/96 dB 29 S/N Fl

9960Z 89/96 dB 29 S/N Flag:

LFR Task State: lfr locked to station 7980W

LFR Recent Change Data:

Search List: 5930 5990 7980 8290 8970 9940 9610 9960 >

PLL GRI: 7980W

LFR Master, reset not needed, not the reference source.

CSM>

This search list and PLL

data must match the

configuration for the

geographical location

of the cell site.

2Verify the following LFR information (highlighted above in boldface type):

- Locate the “dot” that indicates the current phase locked station assignment (assigned by MM).

- Verify that the station call letters are as specified in site documentation as well as M X Y Z

assignment.

- Verify the signal to noise (S/N) ratio of the phase locked station is greater than 8.

3At the CSM> prompt, enter sources <cr> to display the current status of the the LORAN receiver.

- Observe the following typical response.

Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid

----------------------------------------------------------------------------

0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good -3 0 Yes

1 LFR ch A Secondary 4 Yes Good -2013177 -2013177 Yes

2 Not used

Current reference source number: 1

. . . continued on next page

CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-41

Table 3-20: LFR Initialization/Verification

Step NoteAction

4LORAN-C LFR information (highlighted above in boldface type) is usually the #1 reference source

(verified from left to right).

NOTE

If any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify:

- The LFR antenna is not obstructed or misaligned.

- The antenna pre-amplifier power and calibration twisted pair connections are intact and < 91.4 m

(300 ft) in length.

- A dependable connection to suitable Earth Ground is in place.

- The search list and PLL station for cellsite location are correctly configured .

NOTE

LFR functionality should be verified using the “source” command (as shown in Step 3). Use the

underlined responses on the LFR row to validate correct LFR operation.

5Close the Hyperterminal window.

HSO Initialization/Verification

The HSO module is a full-size card that resides in the C-CCP Shelf.

This completely self contained high stability 10 MHz oscillator

interfaces with the CSM via a serial communications link. The CSM

handles the overall configuration and status monitoring functions of the

HSO. In the event of GPS failure, the HSO is capable of maintaining

synchronization initially established by the GPS reference signal for a

limited time.

The HSO is typically installed in those geographical areas not covered

by the LORAN-C system and provides the following major functions:

SReference oscillator temperature and phase lock monitor circuitry

SGenerates a highly stable 10 MHz sine wave.

SReference divider circuitry converts 10 MHz sine wave to 10 MHz

TTL signal, which is divided to provide a 1 PPS strobe to the CSM.

CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-42

Prerequisites

SThe LMF is not logged into the BTS.

SThe COM1 port is connected to the MMI port of the primary CSM via

a null modem board.

SThe primary CSM and the HSO (if equipped) have warmed up for 15

minutes.

If the BTS is equipped with an HSO, follow the procedure in Table 3-21

to configure the HSO.

Table 3-21: HSO Initialization/Verification

Step Action

1At the BTS, slide the HSO card into the cage.

NOTE

The LED on the HSO should light red for no longer than 15-minutes, then switch to green. The CSM

must be locked to GPS.

2On the LMF at the CSM> prompt, enter sources <cr>.

- Observe the following typical response for systems equipped with HSO:

Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid

----------------------------------------------------------------------------

0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good 0 0 Yes

1 HSO Backup 4 Yes N/A xxxxxxx -69532 Yes

2 Not used

Current reference source number: 0

When the CSM is locked to GPS, verify that the HSO “Good” field is Yes and the “Valid” field is Yes.

3If source “1” is not configured as HSO, enter at the CSM> prompt: ss 1 12 <cr>

Check for Good in the Status field.

4At the CSM> prompt, enter sources <cr>.

Verify the HSO valid field is Yes. If not, repeat this step until the “Valid” status of Yes is returned. The

HSO should be valid within one (1) minute, assuming the DPLL is locked and the HSO Rubidium

oscillator is fully warmed.

Test Equipment Set-up68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-43

Test Equipment Set-up

Connecting Test Equipment to the BTS

All test equipment is controlled by the LMF via an IEEE-488/GPIB bus.

If there is a communications problem between the LMF and any piece of

test equipment, verify that the GPIB addresses have been set correctly

(normally 1 for a signal generator, 13 for a power meter, and 18 for a

CDMA analyzer). See Appendix J for procedures to verify and change

the GPIB addresses.

The following equipment is required to perform optimization:

SLMF

STest set

SDirectional coupler and attenuator

SRF cables and connectors

SNull modem cable (see Figure 3-8)

SGPIB interface box

Refer to Table 3-22 and Table 3-23 for an overview of connections for

test equipment currently supported by the LMF. In addition, see the

following figures:

SFigure 3-12 and Figure 3-13 show the test set connections for TX

calibration.

SFigure 3-14 and Figure 3-15 show test set connections for IS-95 A/B

optimization/ATP tests.

SFigure 3-16 shows test set connections for IS-95 A/B and

CDMA 2000 optimization/ATP tests.

SFigure 3-17 and Figure 3-18 show typical TX and RX ATP setup with

a directional coupler (shown with and without RFDS).

Supported Test Sets

CAUTION To prevent damage to the test equipment, all TX test connections

must be through the directional coupler and in-line attenuator as

shown in the test setup illustrations.

IS-95 A/B Testing

Optimization and ATP testing for IS-95A/B may be performed using

one of the following test sets:

SCyberTest

SAdvantest R3465 and HP 437B or Gigatronics Power Meter

SHewlett-Packard HP 8935

SHewlett-Packard HP 8921 (W/CDMA and PCS Interface for

1.7/1.9 GHz) and HP 437B or Gigatronics Power Meter

The equipment listed above cannot be used for CDMA 2000 testing.

Test Equipment Set-up 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-44

CDMA 2000 Testing

NOTE IS-95 C is the same as CDMA 2000.

Optimization and ATP testing may be performed using one of the

following test sets:

SAdvantest R3267 Analyzer with Advantest R3562 Signal Generator

SAgilent E4406A with E4432B Signal Generator

SHewlett-Packard HP 8935 with option 200 or R2K for 1X TX and

with Agilent E4432B Signal Generator for 1X FER

The E4406A/E4432B pair, or the R3267/R3562 pair, should be

connected together using a GPIB cable. In addition, the R3562 and

R3267 should be connected with a serial cable from the Serial I/O to the

Serial I/O. This test equipment is capable of performing tests in both

IS-95 A/B mode and CDMA 2000 mode if the required options are

installed.

Optional test equipment

SSpectrum Analyzer (HP8594E) - can be used to perform cable

calibration.

Test Equipment Set-up68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-45

Test Equipment Reference Chart

Table 3-22 and Table 3-23 depicts the current test equipment available

meeting Motorola standards.

To identify the connection ports, locate the test equipment presently

being used in the TEST SETS columns, and read down the column.

Where a ball appears in the column, connect one end of the test cable to

that port. Follow the horizontal line to locate the end connection(s),

reading up the column to identify the appropriate equipment/BTS port.

Table 3-22: IS-95 A/B Test Equipment Setup

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ANALYZER ADDITIONAL TEST EQUIPMENT

SIGNAL Cyber-

Test

Advant-

est

R3465 HP

8935 HP

8921A HP 8921

W/PCS Power

Meter

GPIB

Inter-

face LMF

30 dB Direction-

al Coupler & 20

dB Pad* BTS

EVEN SECOND

SYNCHRONIZATION EVEN

SEC REF EVEN SEC

SYNC IN

EVEN

SECOND

SYNC IN

EVEN

SECOND

SYNC IN

EVEN

SECOND

SYNC IN

19.6608 MHZ

CLOCK TIME

BASE IN

CDMA

TIME BASE

IN EXT

REF IN

CDMA

TIME

BASE IN

CDMA

TIME

BASE IN

CONTROL

IEEE 488 BUS IEEE

488 GPIB HP-IB HP-IB GPIB SERIAL

PORT

HP-IB HP-IB

TX TEST

CABLES RF

IN/OUT INPUT

50-OHM RF

IN/OUT TX1-6

IN/OUT RF

IN/OUT 30 DB COUPLER

AND 20 DB PAD

RX TEST

CABLES RF GEN

OUT RF OUT

50-OHM RX1-6

DUPLEX

OUT RF OUT

ONLY

SYNC

MONITOR

FREQ

MONITOR

IN/OUT

Test Equipment Set-up 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-46

Table 3-23: IS-95 A/B/C Test Equipment Setup

TEST SETS ADDITIONAL TEST EQUIPMENT

SIGNAL

Advantest

R3562

Signal

Generator

Advantest

R3267

Analyzer

Agilent

E4406A

Analyzer

Agilent

E4432B

Signal

Generator HP

8935 Power

Meter

GPIB

Inter-

face LMF

30 dB

Directional

Coupler &

20 dB Pad* BTS

EVEN SECOND

SYNCHRONIZATION EXT

TRIG IN EXT TRIG TRIGGER

19.6608 MHZ

CLOCK

MOD TIME

BASE IN EXT

REF IN

CONTROL

IEEE 488 BUS IEEE

488 GPIB HP-IB GPIB SERIAL

PORT

HP-IB

TX TEST

CABLES RF OUT RF IN TX1-6

RF INPUT

50 OHM 30 DB COUPLER

AND 20 DB PAD

RX TEST

CABLES RF GEN

OUT RF OUT

50-OHM RX1-6

RF OUT

ONLY

SYNC

MONITOR

FREQ

MONITOR

PATTERN

TRIG IN

GPIB

RF OUTPUT

50 OHM

RF OUTPUT

50-OHM

10 MHZ IN 10 MHZ OUT 10 MHZ IN10 MHZ OUT

10 MHZ

SERIAL I/O SERIAL I/O

SIGNAL SOURCE

CONTROLLED

SERIAL I/O

EVEN

SECOND

SYNC IN

EXT

REF IN

HP-IB

IN/OUT

DUPLEX

Test Equipment Set-up68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-47

Equipment Warm-up

NOTE Warm-up BTS equipment for a minimum of 60 minutes prior to

performing the BTS optimization procedure. This assures BTS

site stability and contributes to optimization accuracy. (Time

spent running initial power-up, hardware/firmware audit, and

BTS download counts as warm-up time.)

Calibrating Cables

Figure 3-10 and Figure 3-11 show the cable calibration setup for various

supported test sets. The left side of the diagram depicts the location of

the input and output ports of each test set, and the right side details the

set up for each test.

WARNING Before installing any test equipment directly to any BTS TX

OUT connector, verify there are NO CDMA BBX channels

keyed. At active sites, have the OMC-R/CBSC place the antenna

(sector) assigned to the LPA under test OOS. Failure to do so can

result in serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.

Test Equipment Set-up 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-48

Figure 3-10: Cable Calibration Test Setup

Motorola CyberTest

Hewlett-Packard Model HP 8935

Advantest Model R3465

DUPLEX

OUT

RF OUTPUT

50-OHM

RF INPUT

50-OHM

RF GEN OUTANT IN

ANT

SUPPORTED TEST SETS

100-W ATT (MIN)

NON-RADIATING

RF LOAD

TEST

SET

A. SHORT CABLE CAL

SHORT

CABLE

B. RX TEST SETUP

TEST

SET

C. TX TEST SETUP

20 DB PAD

FOR 1.9 GHZ

CALIBRATION SET UP

N-N FEMALE

ADAPTER

CABLE

SHORT

CABLE

Note: The Directional Coupler is not used with the

Cybertest Test Set. The TX cable is connected

directly to the Cybertest Test Set.

A 10dB attenuator must be used with the short test

cable for cable calibration with the CyberTest Test

Set. The 10dB attenuator is used only for the cable

calibration procedure, not with the test cables for

TX calibration and ATP tests.

TEST

SET

CABLE

SHORT

CABLE

FW00089

Note: For 800 MHZ only. The HP8921A cannot

be used to calibrate cables for PCS frequencies.

Hewlett-Packard Model HP 8921A

DIRECTIONAL COUPLER

(30 DB)

N-N FEMALE

ADAPTER

DUPLEX

OUT

RF IN/OUT

Test Equipment Set-up68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-49

Figure 3-11: Cable Calibration Test Setup (Advantest R3267, Agilent E4406A)

100-W ATT (MIN)

NON-RADIATING

RF LOAD

TEST

SET

A. SHORT CABLE CAL

SHORT

CABLE

B. RX TEST SETUP

TEST

SET

C. TX TEST SETUP

20 DB PAD

FOR 1.9 GHZ

CALIBRATION SET UP

N-N FEMALE

ADAPTER

CABLE

SHORT

CABLE

TEST

SET

CABLE

SHORT

CABLE

REF FW00089

DIRECTIONAL COUPLER

(30 DB)

N-N FEMALE

ADAPTER

RF IN

RF OUT

Advantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)

EXT TRIG IN

MOD TIME BASE IN

(EXT REF IN)

INPUT 50

OHM

OUTPUT

50 OHM

Agilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)

SUPPORTED TEST SETS

Hewlett-Packard Model HP 8935

DUPLEX

OUT

ANT

Setup for TX Calibration

Figure 3-12 and Figure 3-13 show the test set connections for TX

calibration.

Test Equipment Set-up 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-50

Figure 3-12: TX Calibration Test Setup (CyberTest, HP 8935, and Advantest)

Motorola CyberTest

Hewlett-Packard Model HP 8935

TEST SETS TRANSMIT (TX) SET UP

FRONT PANEL RF

IN/OUT

RF IN/OUT

HP-IB

TO GPIB

BOX

RS232-GPIB

INTERFACE BOX

INTERNAL PCMCIA

ETHERNET CARD

GPIB

CABLE

COMMUNICATIONS

TEST SET

CONTROL

IEEE 488

GPIB BUS

UNIVERSAL TWISTED

PAIR (UTP) CABLE

(RJ45 CONNECTORS)

RS232

NULL

MODEM

CABLE

OUT

S MODE

DATA FORMAT

BAUD RATE

GPIB ADRS

G MODE

TEST SET

INPUT/

OUTPUT

PORTS

BTS

100-W ATT (MIN)

NON-RADIATING

RF LOAD

TEST

CABLE

CDMA

LMF

DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

2O DB PAD

(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)

10BASET/

10BASE2

CONVERTER

LAN

TX TEST

CABLE

TX ANTENNA

PORT OR TX

RFDS

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLERS

ANTENNA PORT

POWER

METER

(OPTIONAL)*

NOTE: THE DIRECTIONAL COUPLER IS NOT USED WITH THE

CYBERTEST TEST SET. THE TX CABLE IS CONNECTED DIRECTLY

TO THE CYBERTEST TEST SET.

Advantest Model R3465

INPUT

50-OHM

GPIB

CONNECTS TO

BACK OF UNIT

* A POWER METER CAN BE USED IN PLACE

OF THE COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET FOR TX

CALIBRATION/AUDIT

POWER

SENSOR

REF FW00094

30 DB

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

Test Equipment Set-up68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-51

Figure 3-13: TX Calibration Test Setup (Advantest R3267, Agilent E4406A, and HP8935)

TEST SETS TRANSMIT (TX) SET UP

RS232-GPIB

INTERFACE BOX

INTERNAL PCMCIA

ETHERNET CARD

GPIB

CABLE

COMMUNICATIONS

TEST SET

CONTROL

IEEE 488

GPIB BUS

UNIVERSAL TWISTED

PAIR (UTP) CABLE

(RJ45 CONNECTORS)

RS232

NULL

MODEM

CABLE

OUT

S MODE

DATA FORMAT

BAUD RATE

GPIB ADRS

G MODE

TEST SET

INPUT/

OUTPUT

PORTS

BTS

100-W ATT (MIN)

NON-RADIATING

RF LOAD

TEST

CABLE

CDMA

LMF

DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

2O DB PAD

(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)

10BASET/

10BASE2

CONVERTER

LAN

TX TEST

CABLE

TX ANTENNA

PORT OR TX

RFDS

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLERS

ANTENNA PORT

POWER

METER

(OPTIONAL)*

* A POWER METER CAN BE USED IN PLACE

OF THE COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET FOR TX

CALIBRATION/AUDIT

POWER

SENSOR

REF FW00094

30 DB

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

Agilent E4406A

Advantest Model R3267

RF IN

RF INPUT

50 Ω

Hewlett-Packard Model HP 8935

RF IN/OUT

HP-IB

TO GPIB

BOX

Test Equipment Set-up 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-52

Setup for Optimization/ATPFigure 3-14 and Figure 3-15 show test set connections for IS-95 A/B

optimization/ATP tests. Figure 3-16 shows test set connections for

IS-95 A/B/C optimization/ATP tests.

Figure 3-14: Opt/ATP Test Setup Calibration (HP 8935)

Hewlett-Packard Model HP 8935

TEST SET Optimization/ATP SET UP

RF IN/OUT

HP-IB

TO GPIB

BOX

SYNC MONITOR

EVEN SEC TICK

PULSE REFERENCE

FROM CSM BOARD

FREQ MONITOR

19.6608 MHZ CLOCK

REFERENCE FROM

CSM BOARD

RX ANTENNA

PORT OR RFDS

RX DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

ANTENNA PORT

TX ANTENNA

PORT OR RFDS

TX DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

ANTENNA PORT

RS232 NULL

MODEM

CABLE

BTS

TEST

CABLE

10BASET/

10BASE2

CONVERTER

LAN

TEST

CABLE

COMMUNICATIONS

TEST SET

IEEE 488

GPIB BUS

IN/OUT

TEST SET

INPUT/

OUTPUT

PORTS

NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE

DUPLEXED (4800E): BOTH THE TX AND RX

TEST CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED

ANTENNA GROUP.

100-W ATT (MIN)

NON-RADIATING

RF LOAD

2O DB PAD FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ

(10 DB PAD FOR 800 MHZ)

EVEN

SECOND/SYNC

CDMA

TIMEBASE

FREQ

MONITOR

SYNC

MONITOR

CSM

30 DB

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

RS232-GPIB

INTERFACE BOX

S MODE

DATA FORMAT

BAUD RATE

GPIB ADRS G MODE

DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

INTERNAL PCMCIA

ETHERNET CARD

UNIVERSAL TWISTED

PAIR (UTP) CABLE

(RJ45 CONNECTORS)

CDMA

LMF

REF FW00096

Test Equipment Set-up68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-53

Figure 3-15: Opt/ATP Test Setup (HP 8921A)

RF OUT

ONLY

Hewlett-Packard Model HP 8921A W/PCS Interface

(for 1700 and 1900 MHz)

GPIB

CONNECTS

TO BACK OF

UNITS

SYNC MONITOR

EVEN SEC TICK

PULSE REFERENCE

FROM CSM BOARD

FREQ MONITOR

19.6608 MHZ CLOCK

REFERENCE FROM

CSM BOARD

TEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UP

RX ANTENNA

PORT OR RFDS

RX DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

ANTENNA PORT

TX ANTENNA

PORT OR RFDS

TX DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

ANTENNA PORT

RS232-GPIB

INTERFACE BOX

INTERNAL PCMCIA

ETHERNET CARD

GPIB

CABLE

UNIVERSAL TWISTED

PAIR (UTP) CABLE

(RJ45 CONNECTORS)

RS232 NULL

MODEM

CABLE

S MODE

DATA FORMAT

BAUD RATE

GPIB ADRS G MODE

BTS

TEST

CABLE

CDMA

LMF

DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

10BASET/

10BASE2

CONVERTER

LAN

TEST

CABLE

COMMUNICATIONS

TEST SET

IEEE 488

GPIB BUS

TEST SET

INPUT/

OUTPUT

PORTS

OUT

NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE

DUPLEXED (4800E): BOTH THE TX AND RX

TEST CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED

ANTENNA GROUP.

100-W ATT (MIN)

NON-RADIATING

RF LOAD

2O DB PAD FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ

(10 DB PAD FOR 800 MHZ)

EVEN

SECOND/SYNC

CDMA

TIMEBASE

FREQ

MONITOR

SYNC

MONITOR

CSM

IN/OUT

REF FW00097

GPIB

CONNECTS

TO BACK OF

UNIT

SYNC MONITOR

EVEN SEC TICK

PULSE REFERENCE

FROM CSM BOARD

FREQ MONITOR

19.6608 MHZ CLOCK

REFERENCE FROM

CSM BOARD

Hewlett-Packard Model HP 8921A

(for 800 MHz)

30 DB

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

IN/OUT

RF OUT

ONLY

HP PCS INTERFACE

(FOR 1700 AND 1900 MHZ ONLY)

Test Equipment Set-up 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-54

Figure 3-16: Opt/ATP Test Setup (Advantest R3267 and Agilent E4406A)

TEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UP

RS232-GPIB

INTERFACE BOX

INTERNAL PCMCIA

ETHERNET CARD

GPIB

CABLE

UNIVERSAL TWISTED

PAIR (UTP) CABLE

(RJ45 CONNECTORS)

RS232 NULL

MODEM

CABLE

S MODE

DATA FORMAT

BAUD RATE

GPIB ADRS G MODE

BTS

CDMA

LMF

DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

10BASET/

10BASE2

CONVERTER

LAN

COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET

IEEE 488

GPIB BUS

OUT

NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE

DUPLEXED: BOTH THE TX AND RX TEST

CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED

ANTENNA GROUP.

EVEN

SECOND/

SYNC IN

EXT

REF

FREQ

MONITOR

SYNC

MONITOR

CSM

REF FW00758

INPUT

50 Ω

OUTPUT

50 Ω

Agilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)

FREQ MONITOR

19.6608 MHZ CLOCK

REFERENCE FROM

CSM BOARD

SYNC MONITOR

EVEN SEC TICK

PULSE REFERENCE

FROM CSM BOARD

BNC

“T”

TO TRIGGER IN

ON REAR OF

TRANSMITTER

TESTER

TO PATTERN TRIG IN

ON REAR OF SIGNAL

GENERATOR

EXT REF IN

ON REAR OF

TRANSMITTER

TESTER

RF IN

RF OUT

Advantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)

FREQ MONITOR

19.6608 MHZ CLOCK

REFERENCE FROM

CSM BOARD

SYNC MONITOR

EVEN SEC TICK

PULSE REFERENCE

FROM CSM BOARD

BNC

“T”

SYNTHE

REF IN

TO EXT TRIG

ON REAR OF

SPECTRUM

ANALYZER

SIGNAL GENERATOR

RX ANTENNA

PORT OR RFDS

RX DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

ANTENNA PORT

TX ANTENNA

PORT OR RFDS

TX DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

ANTENNA PORT

TEST

CABLE

100-W ATT (MIN)

NON-RADIATING

RF LOAD

2O DB PAD FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ

(10 DB PAD FOR 800 MHZ)

30 DB

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

TEST

CABLE

BNC

“T”

19.6608

MHZ

CLOCK

EXT TRIG IN

MOD TIME BASE IN

(EXT REF IN)

10 MHZ

REF OUT

NOTE:

SYNTHE REF IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS

CONNECTED TO 10 MHZ REF OUT ON REAR OF

SPECTRUM ANALYZER.

MHZ

OUT

NOTE:

FOR MANUAL TESTING, GPIB MUST BE CONNECTED

BETWEEN THE ANALYZER AND THE SIGNAL

GENERATOR

Test Equipment Set-up68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-55

TX ATP Setup

Figure 3-17 shows a typical TX ATP setup.

Figure 3-17: Typical TX ATP Setup with Directional Coupler

30 DB

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

40W NON-RADIATING

RF LOAD

OUTPUT

PORT

RVS (REFLECTED)

PORT 50-OHM

TERMINATION

FWD

(INCIDENT)

PORT

BTS INPUT

PORT TX TEST

CABLE

Connect TX test cable between

the directional coupler input port

and the appropriate TX antenna

directional coupler connector.

TX ANTENNA DIRECTIONAL COUPLERS

RFDS RX (RFM TX) COUPLER

OUTPUTS TO RFDS FWD(BTS)

ASU2 (SHADED) CONNECTORS

(RFM TX)

(RFM RX)

COBRA RFDS Detail

RF FEED LINE TO

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

REMOVED

COMMUNICATIONS

TEST SET

Appropriate test sets and the port

names for all model test sets are

described in Table 3-22.

TEST

CABLE

TX RF FROM BTS FRAME

TEST

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

NOTE:

THIS SETUP APPLIES TO BOTH

STARTER AND COMPANION FRAMES. FW00116

REF

Test Equipment Set-up 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-56

Figure 3-18: Typical RX ATP Setup with Directional Coupler

RX RF FROM BTS

FRAME

Connect RX test cable between

the test set and the appropriate

RX antenna directional coupler.

RX ANTENNA DIRECTIONAL COUPLERS

RF FEED LINE TO

TX ANTENNA

REMOVED

COMMUNICATIONS

TEST SET

RFDS TX (RFM RX) COUPLER

OUTPUTS TO RFDS FWD(BTS)

ASU1 (SHADED) CONNECTORS

(RFM TX)

(RFM RX)

COBRA RFDS Detail

OUT

Appropriate test sets and the port

names for all model test sets are

described in Table 3-22.

RX Test

Cable

NOTE:

THIS SETUP APPLIES TO BOTH

STARTER AND EXPANSION FRAMES.

FW00115

Test Set Calibration68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-57

Test Set Calibration

Test Set Calibration Background

Proper test equipment calibration ensures that the test equipment and

associated test cables do not introduce measurement errors, and that

measurements are correct.

NOTE If the test set being used to interface with the BTS has been

calibrated and maintained as a set, this procedure does not need

to be performed. (Test Set includes LMF terminal,

communications test set, additional test equipment, associated

test cables, and adapters.)

This procedure must be performed prior to beginning the optimization.

Verify all test equipment (including all associated test cables and

adapters actually used to interface all test equipment and the BTS) has

been calibrated and maintained as a set.

CAUTION If any piece of test equipment, test cable, or RF adapter, that

makes up the calibrated test equipment set, has been replaced,

re-calibration must be performed. Failure to do so can introduce

measurement errors, resulting in incorrect measurements and

degradation to system performance.

NOTE Calibration of the communications test set (or equivalent test

equipment) must be performed at the site before calibrating the

overall test set. Calibrate the test equipment after it has been

allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.

Purpose of Test Set Calibration

These procedures access the LMF automated calibration routine used to

determine the path losses of the supported communications analyzer,

power meter, associated test cables, and (if used) antenna switch that

make up the overall calibrated test set. After calibration, the gain/loss

offset values are stored in a test measurement offset file on the LMF.

Selecting Test Equipment

Use LMF Options from the Options menu list to select test equipment

automatically (using the autodetect feature) or manually.

A Serial Connection and a Network Connection tab are provided for

test equipment selection. The Serial Connection tab is used when the

test equipment items are connected directly to the LMF computer via a

GPIB box (normal setup). The Network Connection tab is used when

the test equipment is to be connected remotely via a network connection.

Prerequisites

Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:

STest equipment is correctly connected and turned on.

SCDMA LMF computer serial port and test equipment are connected to

the GPIB box.

Test Set Calibration 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-58

Manually Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab

Test equipment can be manually specified before, or after, the test

equipment is connected. The LMF does not check to see if the test

equipment is actually detected for manual specification. Follow the

procedure in Table 3-24 to select test equipment manually.

Table 3-24: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in a Serial Connection Tab

nStep Action

1From the Tools menu, select Options.

The LMF Options window appears.

2Click on the Serial Connection tab (if not in the forefront).

3Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port pick list (normally COM1).

4Click on the Manual Specification button (if not enabled).

5Click on the check box corresponding to the test item(s) to be used.

NOTE

GPIB addresses can range from 1 through 30. The LMF will accept any address in that range, but

the numbers in the GPIB address boxes must match the addresses of the test equipment.

Motorola recommends that you use 1 for a CDMA signal generator, 13 for a power meter, and 18

for a CDMA analyzer. To verify and, if necessary, change the GPIB addresses of the test

equipment, refer to Appendix J.

6Type the GPIB address in the corresponding GPIB address box.

Recommended Addresses

1 = CDMA Signal generator

13 = Power Meter

18 = CDMA Analyzer

7Click on Apply. (The button darkens until the selection has been committed.)

NOTE

With manual selection, the LMF does not detect the test equipment to see if it is connected and

communicating with the LMF.

To verify and, if necessary, change the GPIB address of the test equipment, refer to Appendix J.

8Click on Dismiss to close the test equipment window.

Test Set Calibration68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-59

Automatically Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab

When using the auto-detection feature to select test equipment, the LMF

examines which test equipment items are actually communicating with

the LMF. Follow the procedure in Table 3-25 to use the auto-detect

feature.

Table 3-25: Selecting Test Equipment Using Auto-Detect

nStep Action

1From the Tools menu, select Options.

The LMF Options window appears.

2Click on the Serial Connection tab (if not in the forefront).

3Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port pick list (normally COM1).

4Click on Auto-Detection (if not enabled).

NOTE

GPIB addresses can range from 1 through 30. The LMF will accept any address in that range, but

the numbers in the GPIB address to search box must match the addresses of the test equipment.

Motorola recommends that you use 1 for a CDMA signal generator, 13 for a power meter, and 18

for a CDMA analyzer. To verify and, if necessary, change the GPIB addresses of the test

equipment, refer to Appendix J.

5Type the GPIB addresses in the box labeled GPIB address to search (if not already displayed).

NOTE

When both a power meter and an analyzer are selected, the LMF uses the first item that is capable

of performing the test and is listed in the GPIB addresses to search box for RF power

measurements (i.e., TX calibration). The address for a CDMA signal generator is normally 1, the

address for a power meter is normally 13, and the address for a CDMA analyzer is normally 18. If

1,13,18 is included in the GPIB addresses to search box, the power meter (13) is used for RF

power measurements. When the test equipment items are manually selected, the CDMA analyzer

is used only if a power meter is not selected.

6Click on Apply.

NOTE

The button darkens until the selection has been committed. A check mark appears in the Manual

Configuration section for detected test equipment items.

7 Click Dismiss to close the LMF Options window.

Test Set Calibration 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-60

Calibrating Test Equipment

The calibrate test equipment function zeros the power measurement level

of the test equipment item that is to be used for TX calibration and audit.

If both a power meter and an analyzer are connected, only the power

meter is zeroed.

Use the Calibrate Test Equipment menu item from the Util menu to

calibrate test equipment. The test equipment must be selected before

calibration can begin. Follow the procedure in Table 3-26 to calibrate the

test equipment.

Prerequisites

Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:

STest equipment to be calibrated has been connected correctly for tests

that are to be run.

STest equipment has been selected.

Table 3-26: Test Equipment Calibration

nStep Action

1From the Util menu, select Calibrate Test Equipment.

A Directions window is displayed.

2Follow the directions provided.

3Click on Continue to close the Directions window.

A status report window is displayed.

4Click on OK to close the status report window.

Test Set Calibration68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-61

Agilent E4406A Transmitter Tester Self-alignment (Calibration)

The Agilent E4406A requires pre-calibration actions or calibration

verification that are not supported by the LMF. Follow the procedure in

Table 3-27 and refer to Figure 3-19 to perform the Agilent E4406A

self-alignment (calibration).

Table 3-27: Agilent E4406A Self-alignment (Calibration)

Step Action

1In the SYSTEM section of the instrument front panel, press the System key.

- The softkey labels displayed on the right side of the instrument screen will change.

2Press the Alignments softkey button to the right of the instrument screen.

- The softkey labels will change.

3Press the Align All Now softkey button.

- All other instrument functions will be suspended during the alignment.

- The display will change to show progress and results of the alignments performed.

- The alignment will take less than one minute.

Figure 3-19: Agilent E4406A Self-alignment

System

Key

Softkey

Buttons

Softkey Label

Display Area

ti-CDMA-WP-00080-v01-ildoc-ftw

Test Set Calibration 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-62

Calibrating Cables

The cable calibration function measures the loss (in dB) for the TX and

RX cables that are to be used for testing. A CDMA analyzer is used to

measure the loss of each cable configuration (TX cable configuration and

RX cable configuration). The cable calibration consists of the following:

SMeasuring the loss of a short cable - This is required to compensate

for any measurement error of the analyzer. The short cable (used only

for the calibration process) is used in series with both the TX and RX

cable configuration when measuring. The measured loss of the short

cable is deducted from the measured loss of the TX and RX cable

configuration to determine the actual loss of the TX and RX cable

configurations. The result is then adjusted out of both the TX and RX

measurements to compensate for the measured loss.

SMeasuring the short cable plus the RX cable configuration loss -

The RX cable configuration normally consists only of a coax cable

with type-N connectors that is long enough to reach from the BTS RX

port of the test equipment.

SMeasuring the short cable plus the TX cable configuration loss -

The TX cable configuration normally consists of two coax cables with

type-N connectors and a directional coupler, a load, and an additional

attenuator (if required by the specified BTS). The total loss of the path

loss of the TX cable configuration must be as required for the BTS

(normally 30 or 50 dB).

Calibrating Cables with a CDMA Analyzer

Cable Calibration is used to calibrate both TX and RX test cables.

Follow the procedure in Table 3-28 to calibrate the cables. Figure 3-10

illustrates the cable calibration test equipment setup. Appendix F covers

the procedures for manual cable calibration.

NOTE LMF cable calibration for PCS systems (1.7/1.9 GHz) cannot be

accomplished using an HP8921 analyzer with PCS interface or

an Advantest analyzer. A different analyzer type or the signal

generator and spectrum analyzer method must be used (refer to

Table 3-29 and Figure 3-20). Cable calibration values are then

manually entered.

Prerequisites

Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:

STest equipment to be calibrated has been connected correctly for cable

calibration.

STest equipment has been selected and calibrated.

Test Set Calibration68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-63

Table 3-28: Cable Calibration

nStep Action

1From the Util menu, select Cable Calibration.

A Cable Calibration window is displayed.

2Enter a channel number(s) in the Channels box.

NOTE

Multiple channels numbers must be separated with a comma, no space (i.e., 200,800). When two

or more channels numbers are entered, the cables are calibrated for each channel. Interpolation is

accomplished for other channels as required for TX calibration.

3 Select TX and RX Cable Cal, TX Cable Cal, or RX Cable Cal in the Cable Calibration pick

list.

4 Click OK. Follow the direction displayed for each step.

A status report window displays the results of the cable calibration.

Calibrating TX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer

Follow the procedure in Table 3-29 to calibrate the TX cables using a

signal generator and spectrum analyzer. Refer to Figure 3-20 for a

diagram of the signal generator and spectrum analyzer.

Table 3-29: Calibrating TX Cables Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer

nStep Action

1Connect a short test cable between the spectrum analyzer and the signal generator.

2Set signal generator to 0 dBm at the customer frequency of:

- 869-894 MHz for 800 MHz CDMA

- 1930-1990 MHz for North American PCS.

- 1840-1870 MHz for Korean PCS

3Use a spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output (see Figure 3-20, A) and record the

value.

4Connect the spectrum analyzer’s short cable to point B, (as shown in the lower right portion of the

diagram) to measure cable output at customer frequency of:

- 869-894 MHz for 800 MHz CDMA

- 1930-1990 MHz for North American PCS.

- 1840-1870 MHz for Korean PCS

Record the value at point B.

5Calibration factor = A - B

Example: Cal = -1 dBm - (-53.5 dBm) = 52.5 dB

NOTE

The short cable is used for calibration only. It is not part of the final test setup. After calibration is

completed, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the equipment setup, as is, to ensure test procedures

use the correct calibration factor.

Test Set Calibration 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-64

Figure 3-20: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for TX BLO and TX ATP Tests

50 OHM

TERMINATION

30 DB

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

Spectrum

Analyzer

Signal

Generator

Spectrum

Analyzer

40W NON-RADIATING

RF LOAD

SHORT TEST CABLE

Signal

Generator

THIS WILL BE THE CONNECTION TO THE HP8481A POWER

SENSOR DURING TX BAY LEVEL OFFSET TEST AND TO THE

PCS INTERFACE BOX INPUT PORT DURING TX ATP TESTS.

SHORT

TEST

CABLE

THIS WILL BE THE CONNECTION TO

THE TX PORTS DURING TX BAY LEVEL

OFFSET TEST AND TX ATP TESTS.

CABLE FROM 20 DB @ 20W ATTENUATOR TO THE

PCS INTERFACE OR THE HP8481A POWER SENSOR.

ONE 20DB 20 W IN

LINE ATTENUATOR

FW00293

Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer

Follow the procedure in Table 3-30 to calibrate the RX cables using the

signal generator and spectrum analyzer. Refer to Figure 3-21, if required.

Table 3-30: Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer

nStep Action

1Connect a short test cable to the spectrum analyzer and connect the other end to the Signal

Generator.

2Set signal generator to -10 dBm at the customer’s RX frequency of:

- 824-849 for 800 MHz CDMA

- 1850-1910 MHz band for North American PCS

- 1750-1780 MHz for Korean PCS

3Use spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output (see Figure 3-21, A) and record the

value for A.

4Connect the test setup, as shown in the lower portion of the diagram to measure the output at the

customer’s RX frequency of:

- 824-849 for 800 MHz CDMA

- 1850-1910 MHz band for North American PCS

- 1750-1780 MHz for Korean PCS

Record the value at point B.

. . . continued on next page

Test Set Calibration68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-65

Table 3-30: Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer

nActionStep

5Calibration factor = A - B

Example: Cal = -12 dBm - (-14 dBm) = 2 dBm

NOTE

The short test cable is used for test equipment setup calibration only. It is not be part of the final

test setup. After calibration is completed, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the equipment setup,

as is, to ensure test procedures use the correct calibration factor.

Figure 3-21: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for RX ATP Test

Spectrum

Analyzer

Signal

Generator

Spectrum

Analyzer

SHORT

TEST

CABLE

SHORT TEST

CABLE

CONNECTION TO THE HP PCS

INTERFACE OUTPUT PORT

DURING RX MEASUREMENTS.

Signal

Generator

BULLET

CONNECTOR

LONG

CABLE 2

CONNECTION TO THE RX PORTS

DURING RX MEASUREMENTS. FW00294

Test Set Calibration 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-66

Setting Cable Loss Values Cable loss values for the TX and RX test cable configurations are

normally set by accomplishing cable calibration using the applicable test

equipment. The resulting values are stored in the cable loss files. The

cable loss values can also be set/changed manually. Follow the procedure

in Table 3-31 to set cable loss values.

Prerequisites

SLogged into the BTS

Table 3-31: Setting Cable Loss Values

Step Action

1Click on the Util menu.

2 Select Edit>Cable Loss>TX or RX.

A data entry pop-up window appears.

3To add a new channel number, click on the Add Row button, then click in the Channel # and Loss

(dBm) columns and enter the desired values.

4To edit existing values, click in the data box to be changed and change the value.

5To delete a row, click on the row and then click on the Delete Row button.

6To save displayed values, click on the Save button.

7To exit the window, click on the Dismiss button.

Values entered/changed after the Save button was used are not saved.

NOTE

SIf cable loss values exist for two different channels, the LMF will interpolate for all other channels.

SEntered values are used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and login.

Test Set Calibration68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-67

Setting Coupler Loss Values

If an in-service coupler is installed, the coupler loss (e.g., 30 dB) must

be manually entered so it will be included in the LMF TX calibration

and audit calculations and RX FER Test. Follow the procedure in

Table 3-32 to set coupler loss values.

Prerequisites

SLogged into the BTS.

Table 3-32: Setting Coupler Loss Value

Step Action

1Click on the Util menu.

2 Select Edit>Coupler Loss>TX or RX. A data entry pop-up window appears.

3Click in the Loss (dBm) column for each carrier that has a coupler and enter the appropriate value.

4To edit existing values click in the data box to be changed and change the value.

5Click on the Save button to save displayed values.

6Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window.

Values entered/changed after the Save button was used are not saved.

NOTE

SThe In-Service Calibration check box in the Tools>Options>BTS Options tab must be checked

before entered coupler loss values are used by the TX calibration and audit functions or RX FER

test.

SEntered values are used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and login.

Bay Level Offset Calibration 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-68

Bay Level Offset Calibration

Introduction to Bay Level Offset Calibration

Calibration compensates for normal equipment variations within the

BTS and assures maximum measurement accuracy.

RF Path Bay Level Offset Calibration

Calibration identifies the accumulated gain in every transmit path (BBX

slot) at the BTS site and stores that value in a BLO database calibration

table in the LMF. The BLOs are subsequently downloaded to each BBX.

For starter frames, each receive path starts at a BTS RX antenna port and

terminates at a backplane BBX slot. Each transmit path starts at a BBX

backplane slot, travels through the LPA, and terminates at a BTS TX

antenna port.

For expansion frames each receive path starts at the BTS RX port of the

cell site starter frame, travels through the frame-to-frame expansion

cable, and terminates at a backplane BBX slot of the expansion frame.

The transmit path starts at a BBX backplane slot of the expansion frame,

travels though the LPA, and terminates at a BTS TX antenna port of the

same expansion frame.

Calibration identifies the accumulated gain in every transmit path (BBX

slot) at the BTS site and stores that value in a BLO database. Each

transmit path starts at a C-CCP shelf backplane BBX slot, travels

through the LPA, and ends at a BTS TX antenna port. When the TX path

calibration is performed, the RX path BLO is automatically set to the

default value.

At omni sites, BBX slots 1 and 13 (redundant) are tested. At sector sites,

BBX slots 1 through 12, and 13 (redundant) are tested. Only those slots

(sectors) actually equipped in the current CDF are tested, regardless of

physical BBX board installation in the slot.

When to Calibrate BLOs Calibration of BLOs is required:

SAfter initial BTS installation

SOnce each year

SAfter replacing any of the following components or associated

interconnecting RF cabling:

- BBX board

- C-CCP shelf

- CIO card

- CIO to LPA backplane RF cable

- LPA backplane

-LPA

- TX filter / TX filter combiner

- TX thru-port cable to the top of frame

Bay Level Offset Calibration68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-69

TX Path Calibration

The TX Path Calibration assures correct site installation, cabling, and the

first order functionality of all installed equipment. The proper function

of each RF path is verified during calibration. The external test

equipment is used to validate/calibrate the TX paths of the BTS.

WARNING Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUT

connector you must first verify that there are no CDMA

channels keyed. Have the OMC-R place the sector assigned to

the LPA under test OOS. Failure to do so can result in serious

personal injury and/or equipment damage.

CAUTION Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap while

handling any circuit card/module. If this is not done, there is a

high probability that the card/module could be damaged by ESD.

NOTE At new site installations, to facilitate the complete test of each

CCP shelf (if the shelf is not already fully populated with BBX

boards), move BBX boards from shelves currently not under test

and install them into the empty BBX slots of the shelf currently

being tested to insure that all BBX TX paths are tested.

- This procedure can be bypassed on operational sites that are

due for periodic optimization.

- Prior to testing, view the CDF file to verify the correct

BBX slots are equipped. Edit the file as required to include

BBX slots not currently equipped (per Systems

Engineering documentation).

BLO Calibration Data File

During the calibration process, the LMF creates a bts-n.cal calibration

(BLO) offset data file in the bts-n folder. After calibration has been

completed, this offset data must be downloaded to the BBXs using the

Download BLO function. An explanation of the file is shown below.

NOTE Due to the size of the file, Motorola recommends that you print

out a hard copy of a bts.cal file and refer to it for the following

descriptions.

The CAL file is subdivided into sections organized on a per slot basis (a

slot Block).

Slot 1 contains the calibration data for the 12 BBX slots. Slot 20

contains the calibration data for the redundant BBX. Each BBX slot

header block contains:

SA creation Date and Time - broken down into separate parameters of

createMonth, createDay, createYear, createHour, and createMin.

SThe number of calibration entries - fixed at 720 entries corresponding

to 360 calibration points of the CAL file including the slot header and

actual calibration data.

Bay Level Offset Calibration 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-70

SThe calibration data for a BBX is organized as a large flat array. The

array is organized by branch, sector, and calibration point.

- The first breakdown of the array indicates which branch the

contained calibration points are for. The array covers transmit, main

receive and diversity receive offsets as follows:

Table 3-33: BLO BTS.cal File Array Assignments

Range Assignment

C[1]-C[240] Transmit

C[241]-C[480] Main Receive

C[481]-C[720] Diversity Receive

NOTE Slot 385 is the BLO for the RFDS.

- The second breakdown of the array is per sector. Configurations

supported are Omni, 3-sector or 6-sector.

Table 3-34: BTS.cal File Array (Per Sector)

BBX Sectorization TX RX RX Diversity

Slot[1] (Primary BBXs 1 through 12)

1 (Omni) 3-Sector, C[1]-C[20] C[241]-C[260] C[481]-C[500]

23-Sector,

1st C[21]-C[40] C[261]-C[280] C[501]-C[520]

36 Sector, Carrier C[41]-C[60] C[281]-C[300] C[521]-C[540]

41st

Carrier 3-Sector, C[61]-C[80] C[301]-C[320] C[541]-C[560]

5Carrier 3-Sector,

3rd C[81]-C[100] C[321]-C[340] C[561]-C[580]

6Carrier C[101]-C[120] C[341]-C[360] C[581]-C[600]

73-Sector, C[121]-C[140] C[361]-C[380] C[601]-C[620]

83-Sector,

2nd C[141]-C[160] C[381]-C[400] C[621]-C[640]

96 Sector, Carrier C[161]-C[180] C[401]-C[420] C[641]-C[660]

10 2nd

Carrier 3-Sector, C[181]-C[200] C[421]-C[440] C[661]-C[680]

11 Carrier 3-Sector,

4th C[201]-C[220] C[441]-C[460] C[681]-C[700]

12 Carrier C[221]-C[240] C[461]-C[480] C[701]-C[720]

Slot[20]] (Redundant BBX-13)

1 (Omni) 3-Sector, C[1]-C[20] C[241]-C[260] C[481]-C[500]

23-Sector,

1st C[21]-C[40] C[261]-C[280] C[501]-C[520]

36 Sector, Carrier C[41]-C[60] C[281]-C[300] C[521]-C[540]

41st

Carrier 3-Sector, C[61]-C[80] C[301]-C[320] C[541]-C[560]

5Carrier 3-Sector,

3rd C[81]-C[100] C[321]-C[340] C[561]-C[580]

6Carrier C[101]-C[120] C[341]-C[360] C[581]-C[600]

. . . continued on next page

Bay Level Offset Calibration68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-71

Table 3-34: BTS.cal File Array (Per Sector)

BBX RX DiversityRXTXSectorization

73-Sector, C[121]-C[140] C[361]-C[380] C[601]-C[620]

83-Sector,

2nd C[141]-C[160] C[381]-C[400] C[621]-C[640]

96 Sector, Carrier C[161]-C[180] C[401]-C[420] C[641]-C[660]

10 2nd

Carrier 3-Sector, C[181]-C[200] C[421]-C[440] C[661]-C[680]

11 Carrier 3-Sector,

4th C[201]-C[220] C[441]-C[460] C[681]-C[700]

12 Carrier C[221]-C[240] C[461]-C[480] C[701]-C[720]

STen calibration points per sector are supported for each branch. Two

entries are required for each calibration point.

SThe first value (all odd entries) refer to the CDMA channel

(frequency) where the BLO is measured. The second value (all even

entries) is the power set level. The valid range for PwrLvlAdj is from

2500 to 27500 (2500 corresponds to -125 dBm and 27500

corresponds to +125 dBm).

SThe 20 calibration entries for each sector/branch combination must be

stored in order of increasing frequency. If less than 10 points

(frequencies) are calibrated, the largest frequency that is calibrated is

repeated to fill out the 10 points.

Example:

C[1]=384, odd cal entry = 1 ‘‘calibration point”

C[2]=19102, even cal entry

C[3]=777,

C[4]=19086,

C[19]=777,

C[20]=19086, (since only two cal points were calibrated this

would be repeated for the next 8 points)

SWhen the BBX is loaded with image = data, the cal file data for the

BBX is downloaded to the device in the order it is stored in the cal

file. TxCal data is sent first, C[1] - C[240]. Sector 1’s ten calibration

points are sent (C[1] - C[20]) followed by sector 2’s ten calibration

points (C[21] - C[40]), etc. The RxCal data is sent next (C[241] -

C[480]), followed by the RxDCal data (C[481] - C[720]).

STemperature compensation data is also stored in the cal file for each

set.

Bay Level Offset Calibration 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-72

Test Equipment Setup: RF Path Calibration

Follow the procedure in Table 3-35 to set up test equipment.

Table 3-35: Test Equipment Setup (RF Path Calibration)

Step Action

NOTE

Verify the GPIB controller is properly connected and turned on.

! CAUTION

To prevent damage to the test equipment, all transmit (TX) test connections must be via the 30 dB

directional coupler for 800 MHz with an additional 20 dB in-line attenuator for 1.7/1.9 GHz.

1Connect the LMF computer terminal to the BTS LAN A connector on the BTS (if you have not

already done so). Refer to the procedure in Table 3-2 on page 3-6.

SIf required, calibrate the test equipment per the procedure in Table 3-26 on page 3-60.

SConnect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-12 on page 3-50.

TX Path Calibration

The assigned channel frequency and power level (as measured at the top

of the frame) for transmit calibration are derived from the site CDF files.

For each BBX, the channel frequency is specified in the ChannelList

CDF file parameter and the power is specified in the SIFPilotPwr

CDF file parameter for the sector associated with the BBX (located

under the ParentSECTOR field of the ParentCARRIER CDF file

parameter).

NOTE If both the BTS-x.cdf and CBSC-x.cdf files are current, all

information will be correct on the LMF. If not, the carrier and

channel will have to be set for each test.

The calibration procedure attempts to adjust the power to within +0.5 dB

of the desired power. The calibration will pass if the error is less than

+1.5 dB.

The TX Bay Level Offset at sites WITHOUT the directional coupler

option, is approximately 42.0 dB ±3.0 dB.

SAt sites WITHOUT RFDS option, BLO is approximately

42.0 dB ±4.0 dB. A typical example would be TX output power

measured at BTS (36.0 dBm) minus the BBX TX output level

(approximately -6.0 dBm) would equate to 42 dB BLO.

The TX Bay Level Offset at sites WITH the directional coupler option,

is approximately 41.4 dB ±3.0 dB. TX BLO = Frame Power Output

minus BBX output level.

SExample: TX output power measured at RFDS TX coupler

(39.4 dBm) minus the BBX TX output level (approximately

-2.0 dBm) and RFDS directional coupler/cable (approximately

-0.6 dBm) would equate to 41.4 dB BLO.

The LMF Tests menu list items, TX Calibration and All Cal/Audit,

perform the TX BLO Calibration test for a XCVR(s). The All Cal/Audit

menu item performs TX calibration, downloads BLO, and performs TX

audit if the TX calibration passes. All measurements are made through

the appropriate TX output connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.

Bay Level Offset Calibration68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-73

Rate Set Drop-down Pick List

The Rate Set Drop-down Box is enabled if at least one MCC card is

selected for the test. The available options for TX tests are 1 = 9600, and

3 = 9600 1X. Option 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the

test. The available transfer rate options for RX tests are 1 = 9600 and

2 = 14400. Option 2 is only available if no 1X cards are selected.

Verify BLO

In both the TX Calibration and All Cal/Audit dialog boxes, a Verify

BLO checkbox is provided and checked by default. After the actual TX

calibration is completed during either the TX Calibration or All

Cal/Audit process, the BLO derived from the calibration is compared to

a standard, acceptable BLO tolerance for the BTS. In some installations,

additional items may be installed in the transmit path. The additional

change in gain from these items could cause BLO verification failure

and, therefore, failure of the entire calibration. In these cases, either the

Verify BLO checkbox should be unchecked or the additional path losses

should be added into each applicable sector using the

Util>Edit>TX Coupler Loss... function.

Single-sided BLO

Another option that appears in the pull-down menu is Single-sided

BLO. Normally valid BLO values are some value plus-or-minus some

offset. The ranges that we currently use for calibration are wider than

necessary to accommodate the redundant BBX. The lower half of that

range is where non-redundant BBXs should be. When Single-sided

BLO is selected, the result is only considered a success if it is in the

lower half of the range. If it was normally a success from 37-47 (which

is 42 "5), Single-sided BLO would make it a success only if the result

was from 37-42. To get the more stringent conditions, the operator

checks Single-sided BLO when calibrating non-redundant transceivers.

Single-sided BLO carries the likelihood of more failures. This option

should only be used by experienced CFEs.

Test Pattern

The TESTS_TX CAL menu has a Test Pattern pull-down menu. This

menu has the following choices:

SPilot (default) - performs tests using a pilot signal only. This pattern

should be used when running in-service tests. It only requires a BBX

to do the test.

SStandard - performs the tests using pilot, synch, paging and six

traffic channels. This pattern should be used on all non-in-service

tests. Standard requires a BBX and an MCC. Standard uses gain

values specified by the IS97 standard.

SCDFPilot -performs the tests using the pilot signal, however, the gain

is specified in the CDF file. Advanced users may use CDFPilot to

generate a Pilot pattern using the value specified by the PilotGain

parameter in the CDF file instead of a pre-determined value.

Bay Level Offset Calibration 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-74

SCDF - performs the tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic

channels, however, the gain for the channel elements is specified in

the CDF file. Advanced users may use CDF to generate a standard

pattern. Instead of using the values specified by IS97, the settings for

the following CDF parameters are used:

- PilotGain

- PchGain

- SchGain

- NomGain1Way

Prerequisites

Before running this test, ensure that the following have been done:

SCSM-1, GLIs, MCCs, and BBXs have correct code load and data

load.

SPrimary CSM and MGLI are INS.

SAll BBXs are OOS_RAM.

STest equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX

BLO calibration.

SLMF is logged into the BTS.

Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-12 and follow the

procedure in Table 3-36 to perform the TX calibration test.

WARNING Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUT

connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX channels

keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury

and/or equipment damage.

NOTE Verify all BBX boards removed and repositioned have been

returned to their assigned shelves/slots. Any BBX boards moved

since they were downloaded will have to be downloaded again.

Follow the procedure in Table 3-36 to perform the TX calibration test.

Table 3-36: BTS TX Path Calibration

nStep Action

1Select the BBX(s) to be calibrated.

NOTE

If STANDARD or CDF is selected for TEST PATTERN, then at least one MCC must be also

selected.

2From the Tests menu, select TX>TX Calibration or All Cal/Audit.

3Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list. (Press and hold the

<Shift> or <Ctrl> key to select multiple items.)

4Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.

5 Select Verify BLO (default) or Single-sided BLO.

NOTE

Single-sided BLO is only used when checking non-redundant transceivers.

. . . continued on next page

Bay Level Offset Calibration68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-75

Table 3-36: BTS TX Path Calibration

nActionStep

6From the Test Pattern pick list, select a test pattern.

NOTE

SSelecting Pilot (default) performs tests using a pilot signal only.

SSelecting Standard performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels. This

requires an MCC to be selected.

SSelecting CDFPilot performs tests using a pilot signal, however, the gain for the channel

elements is specified in the CDF file.

SSelecting CDF performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels, however, the

gain for the channel elements is specified in the CDF file.

7Click on OK.

8Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.

A status report window displays the test results.

9Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window.

Exception Handling

In the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAIL

message in the status report window and provides information in the

Description field.

Recheck the test setup and connection and re-run the test. If the tests fail

again, note specifics about the failure, and refer to Chapter 6,

Troubleshooting.

Bay Level Offset Calibration 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-76

Download BLO Procedure

After a successful TX path calibration, download the bay level offset

(BLO) calibration file data to the BBXs. BLO data is extracted from the

CAL file for the Base Transceiver Subsystem (BTS) and downloaded to

the selected BBX devices.

NOTE If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, this procedure

does not need to be performed, as BLO is downloaded as part of

the All Cal/Audit.

Prerequisites

Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:

SBBXs being downloaded are OOS-RAM (yellow).

STX calibration is successfully completed.

Follow the procedure in Table 3-37 to download the BLO data to the

BBXs.

Table 3-37: Download BLO

nStep Action

1Select the BBX(s) to be downloaded.

2From the Device menu, select Download>BLO.

A status report window displays the result of the download.

NOTE

Selected device(s) do not change color when BLO is downloaded.

3Click on OK to close the status report window.

Calibration Audit Introduction

The BLO calibration audit procedure confirms the successful generation

and storage of the BLO calibration offsets. The calibration audit

procedure measures the path gain or loss of every BBX transmit path at

the site. In this test, actual system tolerances are used to determine the

success or failure of a test. The same external test equipment set up is

used.

NOTE RF path verification, BLO calibration, and BLO data download

to BBXs must have been successfully completed prior to

performing the calibration audit.

Bay Level Offset Calibration68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-77

TX Path Audit

Perform the calibration audit of the TX paths of all equipped BBX slots

per the procedure in Table 3-38

WARNING Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUT

connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX channels

keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury

and/or equipment damage.

NOTE If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, this procedure

does not need to be performed, as BLO is downloaded as part of

the All Cal/Audit.

TX Audit Test

The Tests menu item, TX Audit, performs the TX BLO Audit test for a

BBX(s). All measurements are made through the appropriate TX output

connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.

Prerequisites

Before running this test, ensure that the following have been done:

SCSM-1, GLIs, and BBXs have correct code load and data load.

SPrimary CSM and MGLI are INS.

SAll BBXs are OOS_RAM.

STest equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX

BLO calibration.

SLMF is logged into the BTS.

Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-12 or Figure 3-13.

Follow the procedure in Table 3-38 to perform the BTS TX Path Audit

test.

Table 3-38: BTS TX Path Audit

nStep Action

1Select the BBX(s) to be audited.

NOTE

If STANDARD or CDF is selected for Test Pattern, then at least one MCC must be also selected.

2From the Tests menu, select TX>TX Audit.

3Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list.

Press and hold the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key to select multiple items.

4Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.

5If at least one MCC was selected in Step 1, select the appropriate transfer rate (1 = 9600, 3 = 9600

1X) from the drop-down list in the Rate Set box.

NOTE

The rate selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test.

6 Select Verify BLO (default) or Single-sided BLO.

. . . continued on next page

Bay Level Offset Calibration 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-78

Table 3-38: BTS TX Path Audit

nActionStep

NOTE

Single-sided BLO is only used when checking non-redundant transceivers.

7From the Test Pattern pick list, select a test pattern.

NOTE

SSelecting Pilot (default) performs tests using a pilot signal only.

SSelecting Standard performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels. This

requires an MCC to be selected.

SSelecting CDFPilot performs tests using a pilot signal, however, the gain for the channel

elements is specified in the CDF file.

SSelecting CDF performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels, however, the

gain for the channel elements is specified in the CDF file.

8Click on OK.

9Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.

A status report window displays the test results.

10 Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window.

Exception Handling

In the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAIL

message in the Status Report window and provides information in the

Description field. Recheck the test setup and connection and re-run the

test. If the tests fail again, note specifics about the failure, and refer to

Chapter 6, Troubleshooting.

Bay Level Offset Calibration68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-79

All Cal/Audit Test

The Tests menu item, All Cal/Audit, performs the TX BLO Calibration

and Audit test for a XCVR(s). All measurements are made through the

appropriate TX output connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.

NOTE If the TX calibration portion of the test passes, the BLO data is

automatically downloaded to the BBX(s) before the audit portion

of the test is run.

Prerequisites

Before running this test, ensure that the following have been done:

SCSM-1, GLIs, BBXs have correct code and data loads.

SPrimary CSM and MGLI are INS.

SAll BBXs are OOS_RAM.

STest equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX

BLO calibration.

SLMF is logged into the BTS.

Follow the procedure in Table 3-39 to perform the All Cal/Audit test.

WARNING Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUT

connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX channels

keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury

and/or equipment damage.

Table 3-39: All Cal/Audit Test

nStep Action

1Select the BBX(s) to be tested.

NOTE

If STANDARD, CDFPilot, or CDF is selected for the TEST PATTERN, then at least one MCC

must be also selected.

2From the Tests menu, select All Cal/Audit.

3Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list.

Press and hold the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key to select multiple items.

4Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.

5If at least one MCC was selected in Step1 select the appropriate transfer rate (1 = 9600, 3 = 9600

1X) from the drop-down list in the Rate Set box.

NOTE

The rate selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test.

6 Select Verify BLO or Single-sided BLO.

NOTE

Single-sided BLO is only used when checking non-redundant transceivers.

Bay Level Offset Calibration 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-80

Table 3-39: All Cal/Audit Test

nActionStep

7From the Test Pattern pick list, select a test pattern.

NOTE

SSelecting Pilot (default) performs tests using a pilot signal only.

SSelecting Standard performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and 6 traffic channels. This

requires an MCC to be selected.

SSelecting CDFPilot performs tests using a pilot signal, however, the gain for the channel

elements is specified in the CDF file.

SSelecting CDF performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and 6 traffic channels, however, the

gain for the channel elements is specified in the CDF file.

8Click on OK.

9Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.

A status report window displays the test results.

10 Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window.

Bay Level Offset Calibration68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-81

Create CAL File

The Create Cal File function gets the BLO data from BBXs and

creates/updates the CAL file for the BTS. If a CAL file does not exist, a

new one is created. If a CAL file already exists, it is updated. After a

BTS has been fully optimized, a copy of the CAL file must exist so it

can be transferred to the CBSC. If TX calibration has been successfully

performed for all BBXs and BLO data has been downloaded, a CAL file

exists. Note the following:

SThe Create Cal File function only applies to selected (highlighted)

BBXs.

WARNING The user is not encouraged to edit the CAL file as this action can

cause interface problems between the BTS and the LMF. To

manually edit the CAL file, you must first logout of the BTS. If

you manually edit the CAL file and then use the Create Cal File

function, the edited information is lost.

Prerequisites

Before running this test, the following should be done:

SLMF is logged into the BTS.

SBBXs are OOS_RAM with BLO downloaded.

Table 3-40: Create CAL File

nStep Action

1Select the applicable BBXs.

NOTE

The CAL file is only updated for the selected BBXs.

2Click on the Device menu.

3Click on the Create Cal File menu item.

A status report window displays the results of the action.

4 Click OK to close the status report window.

RFDS Set-up and Calibration 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-82

RFDS Set-up and Calibration

RFDS Description

NOTE The RFDS is not available for the -48 V BTS at the time of this

publication.

The optional RFDS performs RF tests of the site from the CBSC or from

an LMF. The RFDS consists of the following elements:

SAntenna Select Unit (ASU)

SFixed Wireless Terminal Interface Card (FWTIC)

SSubscriber Unit Assembly (SUA)

For complete information regarding the RFDS, refer to the CDMA RFDS

Hardware Installation manual and CDMA RFDS User’s Guide.

The LMF provides the following functions for RFDS equipment:

STX and RX Calibration

SDekey Test Subscriber Unit (TSU)

SDownload Test Subscriber Interface Card (TSIC)

SForward Test

SKey TSU

SMeasure TSU Receive Signal Strength Indication (RSSI)

SPing TSU

SProgram TSU Number Assignment Module (NAM)

SReverse Test

SRGLI actions (for GLI based RFDS units)

SSet ASU

SStatus TSU

RFDS Set-up and Calibration68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-83

RFDS Parameter Settings

The bts-#.cdf file includes RFDS parameter settings that must

match the installed RFDS equipment. The paragraphs below describe the

editable parameters and their defaults. Table 3-41 explains how to edit

the parameter settings.

SRfdsEquip - valid inputs are 0 through 2.

0 = (default) RFDS is not equipped

1 = Non-Cobra/Patzer box RFDS

2 = Cobra RFDS

STsuEquip - valid inputs are 0 or 1

0 = (default) TSU not equipped

1 = TSU is equipped in the system

SMC1....4 - valid inputs are 0 or 1

0 = (default) Not equipped

1 = Multicouplers equipped in RFDS system

(9600 system RFDS only)

SAsu1/2Equip - valid inputs are 0 or 1

0 = (default) Not equipped

1 = Equipped

STestOrigDN - valid inputs are ’’’ (default) or a numerical string up to

15 characters. (This is the phone number the RFDS dials when

originating a call. A dummy number needs to be set up by the switch,

and is to be used in this field.)

NOTE Any text editor supporting the LMF may be used to open any

text files to verify, view, or modify data.

RFDS Set-up and Calibration 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-84

Table 3-41: RFDS Parameter Settings

Step Action

NOTE

Log out of the BTS prior to performing this procedure.

1Using a text editor, verify the following fields are set correctly in the bts-#.cdf file

(1 = GLI based RFDS; 2 = Cobra RFDS).

EXAMPLE:

Asu1Equip = 1

Asu2Equip = 0 (1 if system is non-duplexed)

Mc1Equip = 0

Mc2Equip = 0

Mc3Equip = 0

Mc4Equip = 0

RfdsEquip = 2

TestOrigDN = ’123456789’

TsuEquip = 1

NOTE

The above is an example of the bts-#.cdf file that should have been generated by the OMC and

copied to the LMF. These fields will have been set by the OMC if the RFDSPARM database is

modified for the RFDS.

2Save and/or quit the editor. If any changes were made to these fields, data will need to be downloaded

to the GLI (see Step 3, otherwise proceed to Step 4).

3To download to the GLI, click on the Device menu and select the Download>Code/Data menu item

(selected devices do not change color when data is downloaded).

A status report window displays the status of the download.

Click OK to close the status report window.

! CAUTION

After downloading data to the GLI, the RFDS LED slowly begins flashing red and green for

approximately 2-3 minutes. DO NOT attempt to perform any functions with the RFDS until the LED

remains green.

4Status the RFDS TSU.

A status report window displays the software version number for the TSIC and SUA.

NOTE

If the LMF yields an error message, check the following:

SEnsure the AMR cable is correctly connected from the BTS to the RFDS.

SVerify the RFDS has power.

SVerify the RFDS status LED is green.

SVerify fields in the bts-#.cdf file are correct (see Step 1).

SStatus the MGLI and ensure the device is communicating (via Ethernet) with the LMF, and the

device is in the proper state (INS).

RFDS Set-up and Calibration68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-85

RFDS TSU NAM Programming

The RFDS TSU NAM must be programmed with the appropriate system

parameters and phone number during hardware installation. The TSU

phone and TSU MSI must be recorded for each BTS used for OMC-R

RFDS software configuration. The TSU NAM should be configured the

same way that any local mobile subscriber would use.

NOTE The user will only need to program the NAM for the initial

install of the RFDS.

The NAM must be programmed into the SUA before it can receive and

process test calls, or be used for any type of RFDS test.

Explanation of Parameters used when Programming the TSU NAM

Table 3-42 defines the parameters used when editing the tsu.nam file.

Table 3-42: Definition of Parameters

Access_Overload_Code

Slot_Index

System ID

Network ID

These parameters are obtained from the switch.

Primary_Channel_A

Primary_Channel_B

Secondary_Channel_A

Secondary_Channel B

These parameters are the channels used in operation of the system.

Lock_Code

Security_Code

Service_Level

Station_Class_Mark

Do not change.

IMSI_11_12

IMSI_MCC These fields can be obtained at the OMC using the following

command:

OMC000>disp bts-# imsi

If the fields are blank, replace the IMSI fields in the NAM file to 0,

otherwise use the values displayed by the OMC.

MIN_1 Phone Number This field is the phone number assigned to the mobile. The ESN and

MIN should be entered into the switch as well.

NOTE: This field is different from the TestOrigDN field in the

bts.cdf file. The MIN is the phone number of the RFDS subscriber,

and the TestOrigDN is the number the subscriber calls.

RFDS Set-up and Calibration 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-86

Valid NAM Ranges

Table 3-43 provides the valid NAM field ranges. If any of the fields are

missing or out of range, the RFDS errors out.

Table 3-43: Valid NAM Field Ranges

Valid Range

NAM Field Name Minimum Maximum

Access_Overload_Code 0 15

Slot_Index 0 7

System ID 0 32767

Network ID 0 32767

Primary_Channel_A 25 1175

Primary_Channel_B 25 1175

Secondary_Channel_A 25 1175

Secondary_Channel_B 25 1175

Lock_Code 0 999

Security_Code 0 999999

Service_Level 0 7

Station_Class_Mark 0 255

IMSI_11_12 0 99

IMSI_MCC 0 999

MIN Phone Number N/A N/A

Set Antenna Map Data

The antenna map data is only used for RFDS tests and is required if an

RFDS is installed. Antenna map data does not have to be entered if an

RFDS is not installed. The antenna map data must be entered manually.

Perform the procedure in Table 3-44 to set the Antenna Map Data.

Prerequisite

SLogged into the BTS

Table 3-44: Set Antenna Map Data

Step Action

1Click on the Util menu.

2 Select Edit>Antenna Map.

A data entry pop-up window appears with a tab for TX and a tab for RX.

3Enter/edit values as required for each carrier.

NOTE

Refer to the Util >Edit-antenna map LMF help screen for antenna map examples.

4Click on the Save button to save displayed values.

. . . continued on next page

RFDS Set-up and Calibration68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-87

Table 3-44: Set Antenna Map Data

Step Action

NOTE

Entered values are used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and login.

5Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window.

NOTE

Values entered/changed after using the Save button are not saved.

Set RFDS Configuration Data

If an RFDS is installed, the RFDS configuration data must be manually

entered. Perform the procedure in Table 3-45 to set the RFDS

Configuration Data.

Prerequisite

SLogged into the BTS.

NOTE The entered antenna# index numbers must correspond to the

antenna# index numbers used in the antenna maps.

Table 3-45: Set RFDS Configuration Data

Step Action

1Click on the Util menu.

2 Select Edit>RFDS Configuration.

A data entry pop-up window appears with a tab for TX and a tab for RX.

3To add a new antenna number, click on the Add Row button, then click in the other columns and enter

the desired data.

4To edit existing values, click in the data box to be changed and change the value.

NOTE

Refer to the Util >Edit-RFDS Configuration LMF help screen for RFDS configuration data

examples.

5To delete a row, click on the row and click on the Delete Row button.

6To save displayed values, click on the Save button.

NOTE

SEntered values are used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and login.

7To exit the window, click on the Dismiss button .

NOTE

Values entered/changed after using the Save button are not saved.

RFDS Set-up and Calibration 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-88

RFDS Calibration

The RFDS TX and RX antenna paths must be calibrated to ensure peak

performance. The RFDS calibration option calibrates the RFDS TX and

RX paths.

For a TX antenna path calibration, the BTS XCVR is keyed at a

pre-determined power level and the BTS power output level is measured

by the RFDS. The power level is then measured at the TX antenna

directional coupler by the power measuring test equipment item being

used (power meter or analyzer). The difference (offset) between the

power level at the RFDS and the power level at the TX antenna

directional coupler is used as the TX RFDS calibration offset value.

For an RX antenna path calibration, the RFDS is keyed at a

pre-determined power level and the power input level is measured by the

BTS XCVR. A CDMA signal at the same power level measured by the

BTS XCVR is then injected at the RX antenna directional coupler by the

RFDS keyed power level and the power level measured at the BTS

XCVR is the RFDS RX calibration offset value.

The TX and RX RFDS calibration offset values are written to the CAL

file.

Prerequisites

Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:

SBBXs are OOS_RAM.

SCable calibration has been performed

STX calibration has been performed and BLO has been downloaded for

the BTS.

STest equipment has been connected correctly for a TX calibration.

STest equipment has been selected and calibrated.

Follow the procedure in Table 3-46 to calibrate the TX and RX antenna

paths.

Table 3-46: RFDS Calibration Procedure

nStep Action

1Select the BTS tab.

2Select the B (for BTS) radio button.

3Select the BBX to use during the test.

4Select the RFDS menu.

5Select the RFDS Calibration menu item.

6Select the appropriate direction (TX or RX) in the Direction pick list.

7Type the appropriate channel number(s) in the Channel box.

NOTE

Separate channel numbers with a comma or dash (no spaces) if using more than one channel

number (e.g., 247,585,742 or 385-395 for numbers through and including).

. . . continued on next page

RFDS Set-up and Calibration68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-89

Table 3-46: RFDS Calibration Procedure

nActionStep

8Select the appropriate carrier(s) in the Carriers pick list.

NOTE

Use the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key to select multiple carriers.

9Select the appropriate Rx branch (Main, Diversity or Both) in the RX Branch pick list.

10 Click OK.

A status report window is displayed, followed by a Directions pop-up window.

11 Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.

A status report window displays the results of the actions.

12 Click on the OK button to close the status report window.

13 Click on the MGLI.

14 Download updated RFDS offset data to the selected GLI device by clicking on

Device>Download>Data from the tab menu bar and pull-down menu.

Program TSU NAM

Follow the procedure in Table 3-47 to program the TSU NAM. The

NAM must be programmed before it can receive and process test calls,

or be used for any type of RFDS test.

Prerequisites

Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:

SMGLI is INS.

STSU is powered up and has a code load.

Table 3-47: Program the TSU NAM

Step Action

1Select the RFDS tab.

2Select the SUA (Cobra RFDS) or TSU (GLI based RFDS).

3Click on the TSU menu.

4Click on the Program TSU NAM menu item.

5Enter the appropriate information in the boxes (see Table 3-42 and Table 3-43).

6Click on the OK button to display the status report.

7Click on the OK button to close the status report window.

BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-90

BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing

Objective

This section tests the redundancy options that could be included in the

cell site. These tests verify, under a fault condition, that all modules

equipped with redundancy switch operations to their redundant partner

and resume operation. An example would be to pull the currently active

CSM and verify the standby CSM takes over distribution of the CDMA

reference signal.

Redundancy covers many BTS modules. Confirm the redundant options

included in the BTS, and proceed as required. If the BTS has only basic

power supply redundancy, the tests and procedures detailed in the

following tables should be bypassed.

STable 3-50. Miscellaneous Alarm Tests (BTS Frame)

STable 3-51. BBX Redundancy Tests (BTS Frame)

STable 3-52. CSM, GPS, & LFR/HSO Redundancy Alarm Tests

STable 3-53. LPA Redundancy Test

STable 3-54. MGLI/GLI Redundancy Test

During redundancy verification of the test, alarms reported by the master

GLI (displayed via the alarm monitor) will also be verified/noted.

Test Equipment

The following pieces of test equipment are required to perform this test:

SLMF

SCommunications Test Set

Redundancy/Alarm Test

Perform each of the following tests to verify BTS redundancy and to

confirm all alarms are received and reported by the BTS equipment. The

procedures should be performed on the following modules/boards:

SPower supply/converter modules in all frames

SDistribution shelf modules in the BTS frame

SC-CCP shelf modules in the BTS frame (except MCCs)

SLPA modules in the BTS frame

SAMR Customer defined input/output tests

BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-91

Test Equipment Setup

Follow the procedure in Table 3-48 to set up test equipment:

NOTE All alarm tests are performed using TX antenna 1

Table 3-48: Test Equipment Setup for Redundancy/Alarm Tests

Step Action

1Interface the LMF computer to the BTS LAN A connector on the BTS frame (refer to Table 3-2,

page 3-6).

2Login to the BTS.

3Set up test equipment for TX Calibration at TXOUT1 (see Figure 3-12).

NOTE

If site is not equipped for redundancy, remove all GLI and BBX boards installed in any redundant

slot positions at this time.

4Display the alarm monitor by selecting Util>Alarm Monitor.

5Unequip all customer defined AMR alarms reported via the AMR Alarm connector (A & B) by

clicking on MGLI, then selecting Device>Set Alarm Relays>Unequipped.

NOTE

During configuration of MGLI alarm reporting, spurious alarms may report. Allow the BTS to

stabilize for 10 seconds. If any alarms are actively being reported after the BTS has stabilized,

determine the cause before proceeding further.

Power Supply Redundancy

Follow the steps in Table 3-49 to verify redundancy of the power supply

modules. Alarms reported by the master GLI (displayed via the alarm

monitor) are also verified.

Table 3-49: Power Supply/Converter Redundancy (BTS Frame)

Step Action

1Select the MGLI (highlight) and from the pulldown menu select:

Device>BBX/MAWI>Set Redundant Sector>Carrier-#-1-1

Device>BBX/MAWI>Set Pilot Only>Carrier-#-1-1

Device>BBX/MAWI>Set Pilot Gain>Carrier-#-1-1 and Pilot Gain = 262

2Select (highlight) BBX-1 and from the pulldown menu select Device>BBX/MAWI>Key.

3Set XCVR gain to 40 and enter the correct XCVR channel number.

4Remove PS-1 from the power distribution shelf (see Figure 3-22).

- Observe that an alarm message is reported via the MGLI as displayed on the alarm monitor.

- Verify no other modules went OOS.

5Re-install PS-1.

Observe the alarm clears on the alarm monitor.

6Repeat steps 4 and 5 for PS-2 and PS-3.

. . . continued on next page

BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-92

Table 3-49: Power Supply/Converter Redundancy (BTS Frame)

ActionStep

NOTE

For +27 V systems, skip to step 7 through step 10.

7On -48 V systems, remove PS-4 (see Figure 3-23).

- Observe that an alarm message is reported via the MGLI as displayed on the alarm monitor.

- Verify no other modules went OOS.

8Re-install PS-4.

Observe the alarm clears on the alarm monitor.

9Repeat steps 7 and 8 for PS-5 through PS-9.

10 Verify that all PWR/ALM LEDs are GREEN.

11 Select BBX-1 and Device>BBX/MAWI>Dekey

Figure 3-22: SC 4812T C-CCP Shelf

19 mm Filler Panel

PS-3

AMR-1

CSM-1

CSM-2

38 mm Filler Panel

AMR-2

GLI2-1GLI2-2

MCC-6

BBX2-1

BBX-2

BBX-3

BBX-4

BBX-5

BBX-6

BBX-RSwitch

MPC/EMPC-1MPC/EMPC-2

CIO

BBX-7

BBX-8

BBX-9

BBX-10

BBX-1 1

BBX-12

MCC-5

MCC-4

MCC-3

MCC-2

MCC-1

MCC-12

MCC-11

MCC-10

MCC-9

MCC-8

MCC-7

PS-2

PS-1

CCD-2 CCD-1

NOTE: MCCs may be

MCC8Es, MCC24s, or

MCC-1Xs. BBXs may

be BBX2s or BBX-1Xs.

GLIs may be GLI2s or

GLI3s.

HSO/LFR

FW00295

BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-93

Figure 3-23: -48 V BTS Power Conversion Shelf

FW00501

PS-6

AMR

PS-5

PS-4

PS-9

PS-8

PS-7

FAN

MODULE

PWR/ALM

REAR

FRONT

FAN

MODULE

PWR/ALM

REAR

FRONT

Miscellaneous Alarm/Redundancy Tests

Follow the steps in Table 3-50 to verify alarms reported by the master

GLI are displayed via the alarm monitor if a BTS frame module failure

occurs.

Table 3-50: Miscellaneous Alarm Tests

Step Action

1 Select Util>Alarm Monitor to display the alarm monitor window.

2Perform the following to verify fan module alarms:

•Unseat a fan module (see Figure 3-24 or Figure 3-25).

•Observe an alarm message was reported via the MGLI (as displayed on the alarm monitor).

•Replace fan module and verify the alarm monitor reports that the alarm clears.

•Repeat for all other fan modules in the BTS frame.

NOTE

Follow Step 3 for Starter Frames and Step 4 for Expansion Frames.

3Starter Frames Only:

Perform the following to verify MPC module alarms.

•Unseat MPC modules (see Figure 3-22) one at a time.

•Observe that an alarm message was reported via the MGLI as displayed on the alarm monitor.

•Replace the MPC modules and verify the alarm monitor reports the alarm clears.

4Expansion Frames Only:

Perform the following to verify EMPC module alarms.

•Unseat EMPC modules (see Figure 3-22) one at a time

•Observe that an alarm message was reported via the MGLI as displayed on the alarm monitor.

•Replace the EMPC modules and verify the alarm monitor reports that the alarm clears.

. . . continued on next page

BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-94

Table 3-50: Miscellaneous Alarm Tests

Step Action

5If equipped with AMR redundancy, perform the following to verify AMR module redundancy/alarms.

•Unseat AMR 2 (see Figure 3-22).

•Observe that an alarm message is reported via the MGLI (as displayed on the alarm monitor).

•Repeat Steps 1 through 3 and/or 4.

•Replace the AMR module and verify the alarm monitor reports that the alarm clears.

•Unseat AMR 1 and observe an alarm message was reported via the MGLI (as displayed on the alarm

monitor).

•Replace the AMR module and verify the LMF reports the alarm has cleared.

NOTE

All PWR/ALM LEDs should be GREEN at the completion of this test.

Figure 3-24: +27 V BTS C-CCP Fan Modules

FAN

MODULE

PWR/ALM

REAR

FRONT

FAN

MODULE

PWR/ALM

REAR

FRONT

FAN

MODULE

PWR/ALM

REAR

FRONT

FAN MODULES

LATCHES

FW00130

BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-95

Figure 3-25: -48 V BTS C-CCP and Power Conversion Shelf Fan Modules

FAN

MODULE

PWR/ALM

REAR

FRONT

FAN

MODULE

PWR/ALM

REAR

FRONT

FAN

MODULE

PWR/ALM

REAR

FRONT

FAN MODULES

LATCHES

FW00489

FAN MODULES

LATCHES

FAN

MODULE

PWR/ALM

REAR

FRONT

FAN

MODULE

PWR/ALM

REAR

FRONT

BBX Redundancy

Follow the steps in Table 3-51 to verify redundancy of the BBXs in the

C-CCP shelf. Alarms reported by the master GLI (displayed via the

alarm monitor) are also verified. This test can be repeated for additional

sectors at the customer’s discretion.

Table 3-51: BBX Redundancy Alarms

Step Action

n WARNING

Any BBXs enabled will immediately key-up. Before enabling any BBX, always verify that the TX

output assigned to the BBX is terminated into a 50 W non-radiating RF load! Failure to do so could

result in serious personal injury and/or damage to the equipment.

1Enable the primary, then the redundant BBX assigned to ANT 1 by selecting the BBX and

Device>BBX/MAWI>Key.

2Observe that primary BBXs key up, and a carrier is present at each respective frequency.

3Remove the primary BBX.

4Observe a carrier is still present.

The Redundant BBX is now the active BBX for Antenna 1.

5Replace the primary BBX and reload the BBX with code and data.

6Re-enable the primary BBX assigned to ANT 1 and observe that a carrier is present at each respective

frequency.

7Remove the redundant BBX and observe a carrier is still present.

. . . continued on next page

BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-96

Table 3-51: BBX Redundancy Alarms

Step Action

8 The Primary BBX is now the active BBX for ANT 1.

9Replace the redundant BBX and reload the BBX with code and data.

10 Re-enable the redundant BBX assigned to ANT 1 and observe that a carrier is present at each

respective frequency:

11 De-key the Xcvr by selecting Device>BBX/MAWI>Dekey.

12 Repeat Steps 1 through 11 for additional BBXs/antennas, if equipped.

CSM, GPS, & LFR/HSO Redundancy/Alarm Tests

Follow the procedure in Table 3-52 to verify the manual redundancy of

the CSM, GPS, and LFR/HSO boards. Verification of alarms reported is

also covered.

NOTE DO NOT perform the procedure in Table 3-52, unless the site is

configured with a LORAN-C or HSO timebase as a backup for

the GPS.

Table 3-52: CSM, GPS, & LFR/HSO, Redundancy/Alarm Tests

Step Action

n WARNING

Any BBXs enabled will immediately key-up. Before enabling any BBX, always verify that the TX

output assigned to the BBX is terminated into a 50 W non-radiating RF load! Failure to do so could

result in serious personal injury and/or damage to the equipment.

1Enable the primary, then the redundant BBXs assigned to ANT 1 by selecting the BBX and

Device>BBX/MAWI>Key.

2Disconnect the GPS antenna cable, located on top of the BTS frame (see Figure 3-26).

This forces the LORAN-C LFR or HSO board timebase to become the CDMA timing source.

3Observe a CDMA timing reference alarm and source change is reported by the alarm monitor.

4Allow the LFR/HSO to become the active timing source.

SVerify the BBXs remain keyed and INS.

SVerify no other modules went OOS due to the transfer to LFR/HSO reference.

SObserve the PWR/ALM LEDs on the CSM 1 front panel are steady GREEN.

5Reconnect the GPS antenna cable.

6Allow the GPS to become the active timing source.

SVerify the BBXs remain keyed and INS.

SVerify no other modules went OOS due to the transfer back to the GPS reference.

SObserve the PWR/ALM LEDs on CSM 1 are steady GREEN.

. . . continued on next page

BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-97

Table 3-52: CSM, GPS, & LFR/HSO, Redundancy/Alarm Tests

Step Action

7 Disable CSM 1 and enable CSM 2.

SVarious CSM source and clock alarms are now reported and the site comes down.

SAlarms clear when the site comes back up.

8Allow the CSM 2 board to go INS_ACT.

SVerify the BBXs are dekeyed and OOS, and the MCCs are OOS_RAM.

SVerify no other modules went OOS due to the transfer to CSM 2 reference.

SObserve the PWR/ALM LEDs on CSM 2 front panels are steady GREEN.

NOTE

It can take up to 20 minutes for the CSM to re-establish the GPS link and go INS. MCCs go

OOS_RAM.

9Key BBXs 1 and R and observe a carrier is present.

10 Repeat Steps 2 through 6 to verify CSM source redundancy with CSM 2.

* IMPORTANT

DO NOT ENABLE the redundant CSM.

11 Disable CSM 2 and enable CSM 1.

SVarious CSM Source and Clock alarms are reported and the site comes down.

SAlarms clear when the site comes back up.

12 De-key the Xcvr by selecting Device>BBX/MAWI>Dekey.

13 Allow the CSM 1 board to go INS_ACT.

SVerify the BBXs are de-keyed and OOS.

SVerify no other modules went OOS due to the transfer to CSM 1 reference.

SObserve PWR/ALM LEDs on the CSM 1 front panels are steady GREEN.

14 Disable the primary and redundant BBXs.

BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-98

Figure 3-26: +27 V SC 4812T Starter Frame I/O Plate

OUT

LAN

GPS

SPAN I/O A SITE I/O SPAN I/O B

LFR/

ALARM B 4

GND

TX OUT

SPAN I/O ASPAN I/O B

CAUTION

LIVE TERMINALSLIVE TERMINALS +27 VDC

HSO

ALARM A

EXP I/O

RGD

FRONT

REAR

FW00215

GPS IN

RGPS

REF

BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-99

LPA Redundancy Test

Follow the procedure in Table 3-53 to verify redundancy of the LPAs.

WARNING First verify there are no BBX channels keyed BEFORE

moving the antenna connection. Failure to do so can result in

serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.

Table 3-53: LPA Redundancy Test

Step Action

1From the pulldown menu select:

Device>BBX/MAWI>Set Redundant Sector>Carrier-#-1-1

Device>BBX/MAWI>Set Pilot Only>Carrier-#-1-1

Device>BBX/MAWI>Set Pilot Gain> Carrier-#-1-1 and Pilot Gain = 262

2Key-up the BBX assigned to the LPAs associated with the sector under test (gain = 40).

3Adjust the communications test set spectrum analyzer, as required, to observe the overall carrier

amplitude and IM Shelf and note for reference. These figures will be required later.

NOTE

See Figure 3-14 for test equipment setup, if required.

4Push-in and release the breaker supplying the 1st LPA of the pair.

NOTE

After power is removed, IM suppression takes a few seconds to settle out while compensating for the

removal of the 1st LPA. The overall gain decreases by approximately 6 dB. The process must be

complete before proceeding.

5 Verify:

•The other LPA module did not go OOS due to the loss of the LPA.

•The overall carrier amplitude is reduced by approximately 6 dB and IM suppression on the analyzer

display remains basically unchanged.

•LPA fault message is reported via the MGLI and displayed on the alarm monitor.

6Re-apply power to the LPA module and observe the alarm has cleared on the alarm monitor.

NOTE

All PWR/ALM LEDs should be GREEN at completion of test.

7Repeat Steps 4 through 6 to verify the 2nd LPA of the pair.

8De-key the BBX.

n WARNING

First verify there are no BBX channels keyed when moving the antenna connection. Failure to do so

can result in serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.

9Repeat Steps 1 through 8 to verify LPAs assigned to sectors 2 and 3 (if equipped). Move the test cable

on top of the BTS to TX OUT 2 and TX OUT 3 antenna connectors as required.

BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-100

MGLI/GLI Redundancy Test

CAUTION This test can only be performed when the MM path is established

by the MM (not just with LAPD link connected). Attempting to

force the GLIs to “hot swap” under alarm monitor control, when

isolated from the MM, causes MGLIs to hang up.

Table 3-54: MGLI/GLI Redundancy Test (with MM Connection Established)

Step Action

NOTE

SThis test assumes the alarm monitor is NOT connected to the BTS and the T1/E1 span is connected

and communication is established with the MM.

SBOTH GLIs must be INS before continuing.

1Verify the BBXs are enabled and a CDMA carrier is present.

2Identify the primary and redundant MGLI pairs.

3Pull the MGLI that is currently INS-ACT and has cage control.

4Observe the BBX remains GREEN, and the redundant MGLI is now active.

5Verify no other modules go OOS due to the transfer of control to the redundant module.

6Verify that the BBXs are enabled and a CDMA carrier is present.

7Reinstall the MGLI and have the OMCR/CBSC place it back in-service.

8Repeat Steps 1 through 7 to verify the other MGLI/GLI board.

BTS Alarms Testing68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-101

BTS Alarms Testing

Alarm Test Overview

ALARM connectors provide Customer Defined Alarm Inputs and

Outputs. The customer can connect BTS site alarm input sensors and

output devices to the BTS, thus providing alarm reporting of active

sensors as well controlling output devices.

The SC 4812T is capable of concurrently monitoring 36 input signals

coming into the BTS. These inputs are divided between 2 Alarm

connectors marked ‘ALARM A’ and ‘ALARM B’ located at the top of

the frame (see Figure 3-27). The ALARM A connector is always

functional; ALARM B is functional when an AMR module is equipped

in the AMR 2 slot in the distribution shelf. ALARM A port monitors

input numbers 1 through 18, while ALARM B port monitors input

numbers 19 through 36 (see Figure 3-28). State transitions on these input

lines are reported to the LMF and OMCR as MGLI Input Relay alarms.

ALARM A and ALARM B connectors each provide 18 inputs and 8

outputs. If both A and B are functional, 36 inputs and 16 outputs are

available. They may be configured as redundant. The configuration is set

by the CBSC.

Alarm Reporting Display

The Alarm Monitor window can be displayed to list alarms that occur

after the window is displayed. To access the Alarm Monitor window,

select Util>Alarm Monitor.

The following buttons are included:

SThe Options button allows for a severity level (Warning, Minor, and

Major) selection. The default is all levels. To change the level of

alarms reported click on the Options button and highlight the desired

alarm level(s). To select multiple levels press the <Ctrl> key (for

individual selections) or <Shift> key (for a range of selections) while

clicking on the desired levels.

SThe Pause button pauses/stops the display of alarms. When the Pause

button is clicked the name of the button changes to Continue. When

the Continue button is clicked, the display of alarms continues.

Alarms that occur between the time the Pause button is clicked and

the Continue button is clicked are not displayed.

SThe Clear button clears the Alarm Monitor display. New alarms that

occur after the Clear button is clicked are displayed.

SThe Dismiss button dismisses/closes the Alarm Monitor display.

BTS Alarms Testing 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-102

Figure 3-27: Alarm Connector Location and Connector Pin Numbering

FW00301

Purpose The following procedures verify the customer defined alarms and relay

contacts are functioning properly. These tests are performed on all AMR

alarms/relays in a sequential manner until all have been verified. Perform

these procedures periodically to ensure the external alarms are reported

properly. Following these procedures ensures continued peak system

performance.

Study the site engineering documents and perform the following tests

only after first verifying that the AMR cabling configuration required to

interconnect the BTS frame with external alarm sensors and/or relays

meet requirements called out in the SC 4812T Series BTS Installation

Manual.

NOTE Motorola highly recommends that you read and understand this

procedure in its entirety before starting this procedure.

Test Equipment

The following test equipment is required to perform these tests:

SLMF

SAlarms Test Box (CGDSCMIS00014) -optional

Abbreviations used in the following figures and tables are

defined as:

SNC = normally closed

SNO = normally open

SCOM or C = common

SCDO = Customer Defined (Relay) Output

SCDI = Customer Defined (Alarm) Input

NOTE

BTS Alarms Testing68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-103

Figure 3-28: AMR Connector Pin Numbering

59 1

60 2

ALARM A

(AMR 1) ALARM B

(AMR 2)

Returns

A CDI 18 . . . A CDI 1

59 1

60 2

Returns

B CDI 36 . . . B CDI 19

FW00302

NOTE The preferred method to verify alarms is to follow the Alarms

Test Box Procedure, Table 3-55. If not using an Alarm Test Box,

follow the procedure listed in Table 3-56.

CDI Alarm Input Verification with Alarms Test Box

Table 3-55 describes how to test the CDI alarm input verification using

the Alarm Test Box. Follow the steps as instructed and compare results

with the LMF display.

NOTE It may take a few seconds for alarms to be reported. The default

delay is 5 seconds. Leave the alarms test box switches in the new

position until the alarms have been reported.

Table 3-55: CDI Alarm Input Verification Using the Alarms Test Box

Step Action

1Connect the LMF to the BTS and log into the BTS.

2Select the MGLI.

3Click on the Device menu.

4Click on the Set Alarm Relays menu item.

5Click on Normally Open.

A status report window displays the results of the action.

6Click on the OK button to close the status report window.

7Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Open position.

8Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM A connector (see Figure 3-27).

9Set all of the switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position. An alarm should be reported for

each switch setting.

10 Set all of the switches on the alarms test box to the Open position. A clear alarm should be reported

for each switch setting.

11 Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM A connector.

12 Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM B connector.

13 Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position. An alarm should be reported for each

switch setting

. . . continued on next page

BTS Alarms Testing 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-104

Table 3-55: CDI Alarm Input Verification Using the Alarms Test Box

Step Action

14 Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Open position. A clear alarm should be reported for each

switch setting.

15 Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM B connector.

16 Select the MGLI.

17 Click on the Device menu.

18 Click on the Set Alarm Relays menu item.

19 Click on Normally Closed. A status report window displays the results of the action.

20 Click OK to close the status report window.

Alarms should be reported for alarm inputs 1 through 36.

21 Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position.

22 Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM A connector.

Alarms should be reported for alarm inputs 1 through 18.

23 Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Open position.

An alarm should be reported for each switch setting.

24 Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position.

A clear alarm should be reported for each switch setting.

25 Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM A connector.

26 Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM B connector.

A clear alarm should be reported for alarm inputs 19 through 36.

27 Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Open position.

An alarm should be reported for each switch setting.

28 Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position.

A clear alarm should be reported for each switch setting.

29 Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM B connector.

30 Select the MGLI.

31 Click on the Device menu.

32 Click on the Set Alarm Relays menu item.

33 Click on Unequipped.

A status report window displays the results of the action.

34 Click on the OK button to close the status report window.

35 Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM A connector.

36 Set all switches on the alarms test box to both the Open and the Closed position.

No alarm should be reported for any switch settings.

. . . continued on next page

BTS Alarms Testing68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-105

Table 3-55: CDI Alarm Input Verification Using the Alarms Test Box

Step Action

37 Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM A connector.

38 Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM B connector.

39 Set all switches on the alarms test box to both the Open and the Closed position.

No alarm should be reported for any switch settings.

40 Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM B connector.

41 Load data to the MGLI to reset the alarm relay conditions according to the CDF file.

CDI Alarm Input Verification without Alarms Test Box

Table 3-56 describes how to test the CDI alarm input verification

without the use of the Alarms Test Box. Follow the steps as instructed

and compare results with the LMF display.

NOTE It may take a few seconds for alarms to be reported. The default

delay is 5 seconds. When shorting alarm pins wait for the alarm

report before removing the short.

Table 3-56: CDI Alarm Input Verification Without the Alarms Test Box

Step Action

1Connect the LMF to the BTS and log into the BTS.

2Select the MGLI.

3Click on the Device menu.

4Click on the Set Alarm Relays menu item.

5Click on Normally Open.

A status report window displays the results of the action.

6Click on OK to close the status report window.

7Refer to Figure 3-28 and sequentially short the ALARM A connector CDI 1 through CDI 18 pins

(25-26 through 59-60) together.

An alarm should be reported for each pair of pins that are shorted.

A clear alarm should be reported for each pair of pins when the short is removed.

8Refer to Figure 3-28 and sequentially short the ALARM B connector CDI 19 through CDI 36 pins

(25-26 through 59-60) together.

An alarm should be reported for each pair of pins that are shorted.

A clear alarm should be reported for each pair of pins when the short is removed.

9Select the MGLI.

10 Click on the Device menu.

11 Click on the Set Alarm Relays menu item.

. . . continued on next page

BTS Alarms Testing 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-106

Table 3-56: CDI Alarm Input Verification Without the Alarms Test Box

Step Action

12 Click on Normally Closed.

A status report window displays the results of the action.

13 Click on OK to close the status report window.

Alarms should be reported for alarm inputs 1 through 36.

14 Refer to Figure 3-28 and sequentially short the ALARM A connector CDI 1 through CDI 18 pins

(25-26 through 59-60) together.

A clear alarm should be reported for each pair of pins that are shorted.

An alarm should be reported for each pair of pins when the short is removed.

15 Refer to Figure 3-28 and sequentially short the ALARM B connector CDI 19 through CDI 36 pins

(25-26 through 59-60) together.

A clear alarm should be reported for each pair of pins that are shorted.

An alarm should be reported for each pair of pins when the short is removed.

16 Select the MGLI.

17 Click on the Device menu.

18 Click on the Set Alarm Relays menu item.

19 Click on Unequipped.

A status report window displays the results of the action.

20 Click on OK to close the status report window.

21 Refer to Figure 3-28 and sequentially short the ALARM A connector CDI 1 through CDI 18 pins

(25-26 through 59-60) together.

No alarms should be displayed.

22 Refer to Figure 3-28 and sequentially short the ALARM B connector CDI 19 through CDI 36 pins

(25-26 through 59-60) together.

No alarms should be displayed.

23 Load data to the MGLI to reset the alarm relay conditions according to the CDF file.

Pin and Signal Information for Alarm Connectors

Table 3-57 lists the pins and signal names for Alarms A and B.

Table 3-57: Pin and Signal Information for Alarm Connectors

ALARM A ALARM B

Pin Signal Name Pin Signal Name Pin Signal Name Pin Signal Name

1A CDO1 NC 31 Cust Retn 4 1B CDO9 NC 31 B CDI 22

2A CDO1 Com 32 A CDI 4 2B CDO9 Com 32 Cust Retn 22

3A CDO1 NO 33 Cust Retn 5 3B CDO9 NO 33 B CDI 23

4A CDO2 NC 34 A CDI 5 4B CDO10 NC 34 Cust Retn 23

. . . continued on next page

BTS Alarms Testing68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-107

Table 3-57: Pin and Signal Information for Alarm Connectors

ALARM A ALARM B

Pin Signal NamePinSignal NamePinSignal NamePinSignal Name

5A CDO2 Com 35 Cust Retn 6 5B CDO10 Com 35 B CDI 24

6A CDO2 NO 36 A CDI 6 6B CDO10 NO 36 Cust Retn 24

7A CDO3 NC 37 Cust Retn 7 7B CDO11 NC 37 B CDI 25

8A CDO3 Com 38 A CDI 7 8B CDO11 Com 38 Cust Retn 25

9A CDO3 NO 39 Cust Retn 8 9B CDO11 NO 39 B CDI 26

10 A CDO4 NC 40 A CDI 8 10 B CDO12 NC 40 Cust Retn 26

11 A CDO4 Com 41 Cust Retn 9 11 B CDO12 Com 41 B CDI 27

12 A CDO4 NO 42 A CDI 9 12 B CDO12 NO 42 Cust Retn 27

13 A CDO5 NC 43 Cust Retn 10 13 B CDO13 NC 43 B CDI 28

14 A CDO5 Com 44 A CDI 10 14 B CDO13 Com 44 Cust Retn 28

15 A CDO5 NO 45 Cust Retn 11 15 B CDO13 NO 45 B CDI 29

16 A CDO6 NC 46 A CDI 11 16 B CDO14 NC 46 Cust Retn 29

17 A CDO6 Com 47 Cust Retn 12 17 B CDO14 Com 47 B CDI 30

18 A CDO6 NO 48 A CDI 12 18 B CDO14 NO 48 Cust Retn 30

19 A CDO7 NC 49 Cust Retn 13 19 B CDO15 NC 49 B CDI 31

20 A CDO7 Com 50 A CDI 13 20 B CDO15 Com 50 Cust Retn 31

21 A CDO7 NO 51 Cust Retn 14 21 B CDO15 NO 51 B CDI 32

22 A CDO8 NC 52 A CDI 14 22 B CDO16 NC 52 Cust Retn 32

23 A CDO8 Com 53 Cust Retn 15 23 B CDO16 Com 53 B CDI 33

24 A CDO8 NO 54 A CDI 15 24 B CDO16 NO 54 Cust Retn 33

25 Cust Retn 1 55 Cust Retn 16 25 B CDI 19 55 B CDI 34

26 A CDI 1 56 A CDI 16 26 Cust Retn 19 56 Cust Retn 34

27 Cust Retn 2 57 Cust Retn 17 27 B CDI 20 57 B CDI 35

28 A CDI 2 58 A CDI 17 28 Cust Retn 20 58 Cust Retn 35

29 Cust Retn 3 59 Cust Retn 18 29 B CDI 21 (+27 V)

Converter Alarm (-48 V)

59 B CDI 36

30 A CDI 3 60 A CDI 18 30 Cust Retn 21 (+27 V)

Converter Retn (-48V)

60 Cust Retn 36

NOTE

CDO = Customer Defined Output

CDI = Customer Defined Input

BTS Alarms Testing 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

3-108

Notes

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

4-1

Chapter 4

Automated Acceptance Test

Procedure

Automated Acceptance Test Procedures - All-inclusive TX & RX 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

4-2

Automated Acceptance Test Procedures - All-inclusive TX & RX

Introduction

The Automated Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP) allows Cellular Field

Engineers (CFEs) to run automated acceptance tests on all equipped BTS

subsystem devices using the Local Maintenance Facility (LMF) and

supported test equipment per the current Cell Site Data File (CDF)

assignment.

The results of these tests (at the option of the operator) are written to a

file that can be printed. All tests are controlled from the LMF platform

using the GPIB interface, therefore, only recommended test equipment

supported by the LMF can be used.

This chapter describes the tests run from the GUI environment, which is

the recommended method. The GUI provides the advantages of

simplifying the LMF user interface, reducing the potential for miskeying

commmands and associated parameters, and speeding up the execution

of complex operations involving multiple command strings. If you feel

the command line interface (CLI) will provide additional insight into the

progress of ATPs and problems that could possibly be encountered, refer

to LMF CLI Commands.

CAUTION Before performing any tests, use an editor to view the

“CAVEATS” section of the “readme.txt” file in the c:\wlmf

folder for any applicable information.

The ATP test is to be performed on out-of-service (OOS) sectors

only.

DO NOT substitute test equipment not supported by the LMF.

NOTE Refer to Chapter 3 for detailed information on test set

connections for calibrating equipment, cables and other test set

components, if required.

Automated Acceptance Test Procedures - All-inclusive TX & RX68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

4-3

Reduced ATP

NOTE Equipment has been factory-tested for FCC compliance. If

license-governing bodies require documentation supporting

SITE compliance with regulations, a full ATP may be necessary.

Perform the Reduced ATP only if reports for the specific BTS

site are NOT required.

After downloading the proper operational software to the BTS, the CFE

must perform these procedures (minimal recommendation):

1. Verify the TX/RX paths by performing TX Calibration, TX Audit

and FER tests.

2. Retrieve Calibration Data required for normal site operation.

Should failures occur while performing the specified tests, refer to the

Basic Troubleshooting section of this manual for help in determining the

failure point. Once the point of failure has been identified and corrected,

refer to the BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix section

(Appendix C) to determine the applicable test that must be performed.

In the unlikely event that the BTS passes these tests but has a forward

link problem during normal operation, the CFE should then perform the

additional TX tests for troubleshooting: TX spectral mask, TX rho, and

TX code domain.

Required Test Equipment

The following test equipment is required:

SLMF

SPower meter (used with HP8921A/600 and Advantest R3465)

SCommunications system analyzer

SSignal generator for FER testing (required for all communications

system analyzers for 1X FER)

WARNING -Before installing any test equipment directly to any BTS

TX OUT connector, verify that there are no CDMA

channels keyed.

- At active sites, have the OMCR/CBSC place the carrier

assigned to the LPAs under test OOS. Failure to do so can

result in serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.

NOTE The test equipment must be re-calibrated before using it to

perform the TX Acceptance Tests.

Automated Acceptance Test Procedures - All-inclusive TX & RX 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

4-4

ATP Test Prerequisites

Before attempting to run any ATP tests, ensure the following have been

completed:

SBTS has been optimized and calibrated (see Chapter 3).

SLMF is logged into the BTS.

SCSMs, GLIs, BBXs, MCCs, and TSU (if the RFDS is installed) have

correct code load and data load.

SPrimary CSM, GLI, and MCCs are INS_ACT (bright green).

SBBXs are calibrated and BLOs are downloaded.

SNo BBXs are keyed (transmitting).

SBBXs are OOS_RAM (yellow).

STest cables are calibrated.

STest equipment is connected for ATP tests (see Figure 3-14 through

Figure 3-18 starting on page 3-52).

STest equipment has been warmed up 60 minutes and calibrated.

SGPIB is on.

SBTS transmit connectors are properly terminated for the test(s) to be

performed.

WARNING Before performing the FER, be sure that all LPAs are turned

OFF (circuit breakers pulled) or that all transmitter ports are

properly terminated.

All transmit ports must be properly terminated for all ATP tests.

Failure to observe these warnings may result in bodily injury or

equipment damage.

TX OUT Connection

NOTE Many of the acceptance test procedures require taking

measurements at the TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector. At sites

without RFDS installed, all measurements will be via the BTS

TX OUT connector. At sites with RFDS installed, all

measurements will be via the RFDS directional coupler TX

OUT connector.

ATP Tests

The tests can be run individually or as one of the following groups:

SAll TX/RX: Executes all the TX and RX tests.

SAll TX: TX tests verify the performance of the BTS transmit line up.

These include the GLI, MCC, BBX, and CIO cards, the LPAs and

passive components including splitters, combiners, bandpass filters,

and RF cables.

Automated Acceptance Test Procedures - All-inclusive TX & RX68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

4-5

SAll RX: RX tests verify the performance of the BTS receiver line up.

These include the MPC (for starter frames), EMPC (for expansion

frames), CIO, BBX, MCC, and GLI cards and the passive components

including RX filters (starter frame only), and RF cables.

SFull Optimization: Executes the TX calibration, downloads the BLO,

and executes the TX audit before running all of the TX and RX tests.

NOTE The Full Optimization test can be run if you want the TX path

calibrated before all the TX and RX tests are run.

If manual testing has been performed with the HP analyzer,

remove the manual control/system memory card from the card

slot and set the I/O Config to the Talk & Lstn mode before

starting the automated testing.

Follow the procedure in Table 4-1 to perform any ATP test.

NOTE The STOP button can be used to stop the testing process.

Table 4-1: ATP Test Procedure

nStep Action

1Ensure that all pre-requisites have been met.

NOTE

If the LMF has been logged into the BTS with a different Multi-Channel Preselector setting than

the one to be used for this test, the LMF must be logged out of the BTS and logged in again with

the new Multi-Channel Preselector setting. Using the wrong MPC setting can cause a false test

failure.

2AUTHOR NOTE:

Is this step necessary for the T and ET? As it stands now,

the additional test equipment set−up table is not in the T

and ET books.

If a companion frame is being tested and either BOTH or DIV is to be selected in step 8, perform

the additional test equipment set-up in Table ??? for the diversity RX portion of the ATP.

3Select the device(s) to be tested.

4From the Tests menu, select the test you want to run.

5Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier

pick list.

NOTE

To select multiple items, hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key while making the selections.

6Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.

The default channel number displayed is determined by the CdmaChans[n] number in the

cbsc-n.cdf file for the BTS.

NOTE

Single-sided BLO is only used when checking non-redundant transceivers.

7If applicable, select Verify BLO (default) or Single-sided BLO.

. . . continued on next page

Automated Acceptance Test Procedures - All-inclusive TX & RX 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

4-6

Table 4-1: ATP Test Procedure

nActionStep

NOTE

If a companion frame with the inter-frame diversity RX cabling disconnected is being tested do

not select BOTH in step 8. The RX main and diversity paths must be tested separately for this

configuration because each requires a different Multi-Coupler Preselector type to provide the

proper test signal gain.

8Select the appropriate RX branch (BOTH, MAIN, or DIVersity) in the drop-down list.

NOTE

The Rate Set selection of 1 is only available if non-1X cards are selected for the test.

The Rate Set selection of 2 is only available if non-1X cards are selected for the test.

The Rate Set selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test.

9In the Rate Set box, select the appropriate data rate (1=9600, 2=14400, 3=9600 1X) from the

drop-down list.

10 Enter the channel elements to be tested for the RX ATP in the Channel Element(s) box. By

default, all channel elements are specified.

Use one of thefollowing methods to enter more than one channel element:

- Enter non-sequential channel elements separated by a comma and no spaces (for example;

0,5,15).

- Enter a range of sequential channel elements by typing the first and last channel elements

separated by two periods (for example; 0..15).

NOTE

The channel element numbers are 0 based; that is the first channel element is 0.

11 If applicable, select a test pattern from the Test Pattern pick list.

NOTE

SSelecting Pilot (default) performs tests using only a pilot signal.

SSelecting Standard performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and 6 traffic channels. This

requires an MCC to be selected.

SSelecting CDFPilot performs tests using only a pilot signal, however, the gain for the channel

elements is specified in the CDF file.

SSelecting CDF performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and 6 traffic channels, however, the

gain for the channel elements is specified in the CDF file.

12 Click on the OK button.

The status report window and a Directions pop-up are displayed.

13 Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed, and click the Continue button to

begin testing.

The test results are displayed in the status report window.

14 Click on Save Results or Dismiss.

NOTE

If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file.

TX Output Acceptance Tests: Introduction68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

4-7

TX Output Acceptance Tests: Introduction

Individual Acceptance Tests

The following individual tests can be used to verify the results of

specific tests.

Spectral Purity TX Mask (Primary & Redundant BBX)

This test verifies that the transmitted CDMA carrier waveform generated

on each sector meets the transmit spectral mask specification with

respect to the assigned CDF file values.

Waveform Quality (rho)

This test verifies that the transmitted Pilot channel element digital

waveform quality (rho) exceeds the minimum specified value in

ANSI-J_STD-019. “Rho” represents the correlation between actual and

perfect CDMA modulation spectrum. A rho value of 1.0000 represents

100% (or perfect correlation).

Pilot Time Offset

The Pilot Time Offset is the difference between the CDMA analyzer

measurement interval (based on the BTS system time reference) and the

incoming block of transmitted data from the BTS (Pilot only, Pilot

Gain = 262, PN Offset = 0).

Code Domain Power (Primary & Redundant BBX)

This test verifies the code domain power levels, which have been set for

all ODD numbered Walsh channels, using the OCNS command. This is

done by verifying that the ratio of PILOT divided by OCNS is equal to

10.2 + 2 dB, and, that the noise floor of all EVEN numbered “OFF”

Walsh channels measures < -27 dB (with respect to total CDMA channel

power).

Frame Error Rate

The Frame Error Rate (FER) test verifies RX operation of the entire

CDMA Reverse Link using all equipped MCCs assigned to all

respective sectors/antennas. This test verifies the BTS sensitivity on all

traffic channel elements currently configured on all equipped MCCs at

an RF input level of -119 dBm (or -116 dBm if using TMPC).

TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

4-8

TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test

Tx Mask Test

This test verifies the spectral purity of each BBX carrier keyed up at a

specific frequency, per the current CDF file assignment. All tests are

performed using the external calibrated test set, controlled by the same

command. All measurements are via the appropriate TX OUT

(BTS/RFDS) connector.

The Pilot Gain is set to 541 for each antenna, and all channel elements

from the MCCs are forward-link disabled. The BBX is keyed up, using

both bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilot

channel element only). BBX power output is set to obtain +40 dBm as

measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or RFDS

directional coupler).

NOTE TX output power is set to +40 dBm by setting BTS power level

to +33.5 dBm to compensate for 6.5 dB increase from pilot gain

set to 541.

The calibrated communications test set measures and returns the

attenuation level of all spurious and IM products in a 30 kHz resolution

bandwidth. With respect to the mean power of the CDMA channel

measured in a 1.23 MHz bandwidth in dB, verify that results meet

system tolerances at the following test points:

S1.7/1.9 GHz:

- at least -45 dB @ + 900 kHz from center frequency

- at least -45 dB @ - 900 kHz from center frequency

S800 MHz:

- at least -45 dB @ + 750 kHz from center frequency

- at least -45 dB @ - 750 kHz from center frequency

- at least -60 dB @ - 1980 kHz from center frequency

The BBX then de-keys, and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured to

assign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TX antenna path

under test. The test is then repeated.

See Table 4-1 to perform this test.

TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

4-9

Figure 4-1: TX Mask Verification Spectrum Analyzer Display

- 900 kHz + 900 kHz

Center Frequency

Reference

Attenuation level of all

spurious and IM products

with respect to the mean

power of the CDMA channel

.5 MHz Span/Div

Ampl 10 dB/Div

Mean CDMA Bandwidth

Power Reference

+750 kHz

+ 1980 kHz

- 750 kHz

- 1980 kHz

FW00282

TX Waveform Quality (rho) Acceptance Test 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

4-10

TX Waveform Quality (rho) Acceptance Test

Rho Test

This test verifies the transmitted Pilot channel element digital waveform

quality of each BBX carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per the

current CDF file assignment. All tests are performed using the external

calibrated test set controlled by the same command. All measurements

are via the appropriate TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector.

The Pilot Gain is set to 262 for each antenna, and all channel elements

from the MCCs are forward link disabled. The BBX is keyed up, using

both bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilot

channel element only, Walsh code 0). BBX power output is set to

40 dBm as measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or

RFDS directional coupler).

The calibrated communications test set measures and returns the Pilot

channel element digital waveform quality (rho) in dB, verifying that the

result meets system tolerances:

SWaveform quality (rho) should be w0.912 (-0.4dB).

The BBX then de-keys and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured to

assign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TX antenna path

under test. The test is then repeated.

See Table 4-1 to perform this test.

TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

4-11

TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test

Pilot Offset Acceptance Test

This test verifies the transmitted Pilot channel element Pilot Time Offset

of each BBX carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per the current

CDF file assignment. All tests are performed using the external

calibrated test set controlled by the same command. All measurements

are via the appropriate TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector.

The Pilot Gain is set to 262 for each antenna, and all TCH elements from

the MCCs are forward link disabled. The BBX is keyed up, using both

bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilot

channel element only, Walsh code 0). BBX power output is set to

40 dBm as measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or

RFDS directional coupler).

The calibrated communications test set measures and returns the Pilot

Time Offset in µs, verifying results meet system tolerances:

SPilot Time Offset should be within v3 ms of the target PT

Offset (0ms).

The BBX then de-keys, and if selected, the MCC is re-configured to

assign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TX antenna path

under test. The test is then repeated.

See Table 4-1 to perform this test.

TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

4-12

TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test

Code Domain Power Test

This test verifies the Code Domain Power/Noise of each BBX carrier

keyed up at a specific frequency per the current CDF file assignment.

All tests are performed using the external calibrated test set controlled by

the same command. All measurements are via the appropriate TX OUT

(BTS/RFDS) connector.

For each sector/antenna under test, the Pilot Gain is set to 262. All MCC

channel elements under test are configured to generate Orthogonal

Channel Noise Source (OCNS) on different odd Walsh codes and to be

assigned a full-rate gain of 81. The maximum number of MCC/CEs to

be tested an any one time is 32 (32 odd Walsh codes). If more than 32

CEs exist, then multiple sets of measurements are made; so all channel

elements are verified on all sectors.

BBX power output is set to 40 dBm as measured at the TX OUT

connector (on either the BTS or RFDS directional coupler).

Verify the code domain power levels, which have been set for all ODD

numbered Walsh channels, using the OCNS command. This is done by

verifying that Pilot Power (dBm) minus OCNS Power (dBm) is equal to

10.2 $ 2 dB and that the noise floor of all “OFF” Walsh channels

measures v -27 dB (with respect to total CDMA channel power).

NOTE When performing this test using the LMF and the MCC is an MCC8E

or MCC24E, the redundant BBX may fail or show marginal

performance. This is due to a timing mismatch that the LMF does not

address. Performing this test from the CBSC will not have this timing

problem.

The BBX then de-keys and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured to

assign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TX antenna path

under test. The test is then repeated. Upon completion of the test, the

OCNS is disabled on the specified MCC/CE.

See Table 4-1 to perform this test.

TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

4-13

Figure 4-2: Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Levels

Pilot Channel

Active channels

PILOT LEVEL

MAX OCNS SPEC.

MIN OCNS SPEC.

MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR:

< -27 dB SPEC.

Inactive channels

Walsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ... 64

MAX OCNS

CHANNEL

MIN OCNS

CHANNEL

8.2 dB 12.2 dB

MAX NOISE

FLOOR

Pilot Channel

Active channels

PILOT LEVEL

MAX OCNS SPEC.

MIN OCNS SPEC.

MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR:

< -27 dB

Inactive channels

Walsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ... 64

FAILURE - DOES NOT

MEET MIN OCNS SPEC.

FAILURE - EXCEEDS

MAX OCNS SPEC. 8.2 dB 12.2 dB

FAILURE - EXCEEDS MAX

NOISE FLOOR SPEC.

Showing all OCNS Passing

Indicating Failures FW00283

RX Frame Error Rate (FER) Acceptance Test 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

4-14

RX Frame Error Rate (FER) Acceptance Test

FER Test

This test verifies the BTS FER on all traffic channel elements currently

configured on all equipped MCCs (full rate at 1% FER) at an RF input

level of -119 dBm [or -116 dBm if using Tower Top

Amplifier (TMPC)]. All tests are performed using the external calibrated

test set as the signal source controlled by the same command. All

measurements are via the LMF.

The Pilot Gain is set to 262 for each TX antenna, and all channel

elements from the MCCs are forward-link disabled. The BBX is keyed

up, using only bbxlvl level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with

pilot channel element only). BBX power output is set to -20 dBm as

measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or RFDS

directional coupler). The BBX must be keyed to enable the RX receive

circuitry.

The LMF prompts the MCC/CE under test to measure all zero longcode

and provide the FER report on the selected active MCC on the reverse

link for both the main and diversity RX antenna paths, verifying that

results meet the following specification:

SFER returned less than 1% and total frames measured is 1500

All MCC/CEs selected are tested on the specified RX antenna path. The

BBX then de-keys and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured to assign

the applicable redundant BBX to the current RX antenna paths under

test. The test is then repeated.

See Table 4-1 to perform this test.

Generate an ATP Report68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

4-15

Generate an ATP Report

Background

Each time an ATP test is run, an ATP report is updated to include the

results of the most recent ATP tests if the Save Results button is used to

close the status report window. The ATP report is not updated if the

status reports window is closed using the Dismiss button.

ATP Report

Each time an ATP test is run, a separate report is created for each BTS

and includes the following for each test:

STest name

SBBX number

SChannel number

SCarrier number

SSector number

SUpper test limit

SLower test limit

STest result

SPASS or FAIL

SDescription information (if applicable)

STime stamp

SDetails/Warning information (if applicable)

The report can be printed if the LMF computer is connected to a printer.

Follow the procedure in the Table 4-2 to view and/or print the ATP

report for a BTS.

Table 4-2: Generating an ATP Report

nStep Action

1Click on the Login tab (if not in the forefront).

2Select the desired BTS from the available Base Station pick list.

3Click on the Report button.

4Click on a column heading to sort the report.

5- If not desiring a printable file copy, click on the Dismiss button.

- If requiring a printable file copy, select the desired file type in the picklist and click on the

Save button.

Generate an ATP Report 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

4-16

Notes

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

5-1

Chapter 5

Prepare to Leave the Site

Prepare to Leave the Site 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

5-2

Prepare to Leave the Site

External Test Equipment Removal

Perform the procedure in Table 5-1 to disconnect the test equipment and

configure the BTS for active service.

Table 5-1: External Test Equipment Removal

Step Action

1Disconnect all external test equipment from all TX and RX connectors on the top of the frame.

2Reconnect and visually inspect all TX and RX antenna feed lines at the top of the frame.

CAUTION Verify that all sector antenna feed lines are connected to the

correct ports on the frame. Crossed antenna cables will cause

system degradation of call processing.

NOTE Each module or device can be in any state prior to downloading.

Each module or device will be in an OOS_RAM state after

downloading has completed.

- For all LMF commands, information in italics represents

valid ranges for that command field.

- Only those fields requiring an input will be specified.

Default values for other fields will be assumed.

- For more complete command examples (including system

response details), refer to the CDMA LMF User Guide.

Prepare to Leave the Site68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

5-3

Reset All Devices

Reset all devices by cycling power before leaving the site. The

configuration data and code loads could be different from data and code

on the LMF. By resetting all devices, the CBSC can load the proper data

and code when the span is active again.

Follow the procedure in Table 5-2 as required to bring all processor

modules from the OOS to INS mode.

NOTE Have the CBSC/MM bring up the site and enable all devices at

the BTS.

Table 5-2: Enabling Devices

nStep Action

1On the LMF, select the device(s) you wish to enable.

NOTE

The MGLI and CSM must be INS before an MCC can be put INS.

2Click on Device from the menu bar.

3Click on Enable from the Device menu.

A status report window is displayed.

NOTE

If a BBX is selected, a Transceiver Parameters window is displayed to collect keying

information.

Do not enable the BBX.

4 Click OK to close the Transceiver Parameters window.

A status report window displays the status of the device.

5 Click OK to close the status report window.

The selected devices that successfully change to INS change color to green.

Prepare to Leave the Site 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

5-4

Re-connect BTS T1 Spans and Integrated Frame Modem

Before leaving the site, connect any T1 span TELCO connectors that

were removed to allow the LMF to control the BTS. Refer to Table 5-3

and Figure 5-1 as required.

Table 5-3: T1/E1 Span/IFM Connections

Step Action

1Connect the 50-pin TELCO cables to the BTS span I/O board 50-pin TELCO connectors.

2If used, connect the dial-up modem RS-232 serial cable to the Site I/O board RS-232 9-pin

sub D connector.

NOTE

Verify that you connect both SPAN cables (if removed previously), and the Integrated Frame

Modem (IFM) “TELCO” connector.

Figure 5-1: Site and Span I/O Boards T1 Span Connections

50-PIN TELCO

CONNECTORS

REMOVED

SPAN A CONNECTOR

(TELCO) INTERFACE

TO SPAN LINES

SPAN B CONNECTOR

(TELCO) INTERFACE

TO SPAN LINES

TOP of Frame

(Site I/O and Span I/O boards)

RS-232 9-PIN SUB D

CONNECTOR SERIAL

PORT FOR EXTERNAL

DIAL UP MODEM

CONNECTION (IF USED)

FW00299

Prepare to Leave the Site68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

5-5

BTS Site Span Configuration Verification

Perform the procedure in Table 5-4 to verify the current Span Framing

Format and Line Build Out (LBO) parameters. ALL MGLI2/GLI2

boards in all C-CCP shelves that terminate a T1/E1 span should be

verified.

Table 5-4: BTS Span Parameter Configuration

Step Action

1Connect a serial cable from the LMF COM1 port (via null modem board) to the front panel of the

MGLI2 MMI port (see Figure 5-2).

2Start an MMI communication session with MGLI2 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (see

Table 3-5 on page 3-11).

NOTE

The LMF program must not be running when a Hyperterminal session is started if COM1 is being

used for the MMI session.

3Enter the following MMI command to display the current MGLI2/GLI2 framing format and line code

configuration (in bold type):

span view <cr>

Observe a display similar to the options shown below:

COMMAND ACCEPTED: span view

The parameter in NVM is set to T1_2.

The frame format in flash is set to use T1_2.

Equalization:

Span A - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)

Span B - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)

Span C - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)

S D D f lt (0 131 f t f T1/J1 120 Oh f E1)

Span D - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)

Span E - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)

Span F - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)

Linkspeed: Default (56K for T1 D4 AMI, 64K otherwise)

Currently, the link is running at the default rate

The actual rate is 0

NOTE

Defaults for span equalization are 0-131 feet for T1/J1 spans and 120 Ohm for E1.

Default linkspeed is 56K for T1 D4 AMI spans and 64K for all other types.

There is no need to change from defaults unless the OMC-R/CBSC span configuration requires it.

If the current MGLI2/GLI2 framing format and line code configuration does not display the correct

choice, proceed to Table 5-5.

4Repeat steps 1 through 3 for all remaining GLIs.

5Exit the GLI MMI session and HyperTerminal connection by selecting File from the connection

window menu bar, and then Exit from the drop-down menu.

Prepare to Leave the Site 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

5-6

Figure 5-2: MGLI2/GLI2 MMI Port Connection

FW00344

9-PIN TO 9- PIN

RS-232 CABLE

NULL MODEM BOARD

(PART# 8484877P01)

RS-232 CABLE

FROM LMF COM1

PORT

MMI SERIAL PORT

GLI BOARD

Set BTS Site Span Configuration

Perform the procedure in Table 5-5 to configure the Span Framing

Format and Line Build Out (LBO) parameters. ALL MGLI2/GLI2

boards in all C-CCP shelves that terminate a T1/E1 span must be

configured.

NOTE Perform the following procedure ONLY if span configurations

loaded in the MGLI2/GLI2s do not match those in the

OMCR/CBSC data base, AND ONLY when the exact

configuration data is available. Loading incorrect span

configuration data will render the site inoperable.

Table 5-5: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration

Step Action

1If not already done, connect a serial cable from the LMF COM1 port (via null modem board) to the

front panel of the MGLI2 MMI port (see Figure 5-2).

2Start an MMI communication session with CSM-1 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (see

Table 3-5 on page 3-11).

NOTE

The LMF program must not be running when a Hyperterminal session is started if COM1 is being

used for the MMI session.

. . . continued on next page

Prepare to Leave the Site68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

5-7

Table 5-5: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration

Step Action

3If required only, enter the following MMI command for each span line to set the BTS span parameters

to match that of the physical spans a - f run to the site:

span_config <option#1> <option#2> <option#3> <option#4> <option#5>

option#1 = the span to change (a - f)

option#2 = the span type (0 - 8):

0 - E1_1 (HDB3, CCS, CRC-4)

1 - E1_2 (HDB3, CCS)

2 - E1_3 (HDB3, CAS, CRC-4, TS16)

3 - E1_4 (HDB3, CAS, TS16)

4 - T1_1 (AMI, DS1 AT&T D4, without ZCS, 3 to 1 packing, Group 0 unusable)

5 - T1_2 (B8ZS, DS1 AT&T ESF, 4 to 1 packing, 64K link)

6 - J1_1 (B8ZS, J1 AT&T ESF, Japan CRC6, 4 to 1 packing)

7 - J1_2 (B8ZS, J1 AT&T ESF, US CRC6, 4 to 1 packing)

8 - T1_3 (AMI, DS1 AT&T D4, with ZCS, 3 to 1 packing, Group 0 unusable)

option#3 = the link speed (56 or 64) Kbps

option#4 = the span equalization (0 - 7):

0 - T1_6 (T1,J1:long haul)

1 - T1_4 (T1,J1:393-524 feet)

2 - T1_4 (T1,J1:131-262 feet)

3 - E1_75 (E1:75 Ohm)

4 - T1_4 (T1,J1:0-131 feet)

5 - T1_4 (T1,J1:524-655 feet)

6 - T1_4 (T1,J1:262-393 feet)

7 - E1_120 (E1:120 Ohm)

option#5 = the slot that has LAPD channel (0 - 31)

Example for setting span configuration to E1_2, 64 Kbps, E1_120-Ohm, LAPD channel 1:

span_config a 1 64 7 1

span_config f 1 64 7 1

Example for setting span configuration to T1_2, 64 Kbps, T1_4 (0-131 feet), LAPD channel 0:

span_config a 5 64 4 0

span_config f 5 64 4 0

NOTE

Make sure that spans a - f are set to the same span type and link speed. The equalization may be

different for each individual span.

After executing the span_config command, the affected MGLI2/GLI2 board MUST be reset and

re-loaded for changes to take effect.

Although defaults are shown, always consult site specific documentation for span type and rate used at

the site.

4Press the RESET button on the GLI2 for changes to take effect.

. . . continued on next page

Prepare to Leave the Site 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

5-8

Table 5-5: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration

Step Action

5This completes the site specific BTS Span setup for this GLI. Move the MMI cable to the next GLI2

and repeat steps 1 and 4 for ALL MGLI2/GLI2 boards.

6Terminate the Hyperterm session and disconnect the LMF from the MGLI/SGLI.

Updating CBSC LMF Files

Updated calibration (CAL) file information must be moved from the

LMF Windows environment back to the CBSC, which resides in a Unix

environment. The procedures that follow detail how to move files from

one environment to the other.

Backup CAL Data to a Diskette

The BLO calibration files should be backed up to a diskette (per BTS).

Follow the procedure in Table 5-6 to copy CAL files from a CDMA

LMF computer to a diskette.

Table 5-6: Backup CAL Data to a Diskette

nStep Action

1Insert a diskette into the LMF A drive.

NOTE

If your diskette has not been formatted, format it using Windows. The diskette must be DOS

formatted before copying any files. Consult your Windows/DOS documentation or on-line help

on how to format diskettes.

2Click on the Start button and launch the Windows Explorer program from the Programs menu.

3Click on your C: drive.

4Double Click on the wlmf folder.

5Double Click on the CDMA folder.

6Click on the bts-# folder for the calibration file you want to copy.

7Drag the BTS-#.cal file to the 3-1/2 floppy (A:) icon on the top left of the screen and release the

mouse button.

8Repeat steps 6 and 7 until you have copied each file desired.

9Close the Windows Explorer program by selecting Close from the File menu option.

Prepare to Leave the Site68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

5-9

LMF Removal

CAUTION DO NOT power down the LMF without performing the

procedure indicated below. Corrupted/lost data files may result,

and in some cases, the LMF may lock up.

Follow the procedure in Table 5-7 to terminate the LMF session and

remove the terminal.

Table 5-7: LMF Termination and Removal

nStep Action

1From the CDMA window select File>Exit.

2From the Windows Task Bar click Start>Shutdown.

Click Yes when the Shut Down Windows message appears.

3Disconnect the LMF terminal Ethernet connector from the BTS cabinet.

4Disconnect the LMF serial port, the RS-232 to GPIB interface box, and the GPIB cables as

required for equipment transport.

Copying CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSC

Follow the procedure in Table 5-8 to copy CAL files from a diskette to

the CBSC.

Table 5-8: Procedures to Copy CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSC

nStep Action

1Login to the CBSC on the workstation using your account name and password.

NOTE

Enter the information that appears in bold text.

2Place your diskette containing CAL file(s) in the CBSC workstation diskette drive.

3 Type eject -q and press the <Enter> key.

4 Type mount and press the <Enter> key.

Verify that floppy/no_name is displayed.

NOTE

If the eject command has been previously entered, floppy/no_name will be appended with a

number. Use the explicit floppy/no_name reference displayed.

5 Enter cd /floppy/no_name and press the <Enter> key.

6 Enter ls -lia and press the <Enter> key.

Verify that the bts-#.cal file is on the diskette.

7 Enter cd and press the <Enter> key.

8 Enter pwd and press the <Enter> key.

Verify that you are in your home directory (/home/<name>).

9 Enter dos2unix /floppy/no_name/bts-#.cal bts-#.cal and press the <Enter> key (where # is the

BTS number).

. . . continued on next page

Prepare to Leave the Site 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

5-10

Table 5-8: Procedures to Copy CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSC

nActionStep

10 Enter ls -l *.cal and press the <Enter> key.

Verify that the CAL file was successfully copied.

11 Type eject and press the <Enter> key.

12 Remove the diskette from the workstation.

Re-establish OMC-R Control/ Verifying T1/E1

NOTE After all activities at the site have been completed, and after

disconnecting the LMF, place a phone call to the OMC-R and

request the BTS be placed under control of the OMC-R.

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

6-1

Chapter 6

Basic Troubleshooting

Basic Troubleshooting Overview 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

6-2

Basic Troubleshooting Overview

Overview

The information in this section addresses some of the scenarios likely to

be encountered by Cellular Field Engineering (CFE) team members.

This troubleshooting guide was created as an interim reference document

for use in the field. It provides basic “what to do if” basic

troubleshooting suggestions when the BTS equipment does not perform

per the procedure documented in the manual.

Comments are consolidated from inputs provided by CFEs in the field

and information gained form experience in Motorola labs and

classrooms.

Troubleshooting: Installation68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

6-3

Troubleshooting: Installation

Cannot Log into Cell-Site

Follow the procedure in Table 6-1 to troubleshoot a login failure.

Table 6-1: Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedures

nStep Action

1If the MGLI LED is solid RED, it implies a hardware failure. Reset the MGLI by re-seating it. If

this persists, install a known good MGLI card in the MGLI slot and retry. A Red LED may also

indicate no Ethernet termination at top of frame.

2Verify that T1 is disconnected (see Table 3-1 on page 3-5).

If T1 is still connected, verify the CBSC has disabled the BTS.

3Try pinging the MGLI (see Table 3-6 on page 3-14).

4Verify the LMF is connected to the Primary LMF port (LAN A) in the front of the BTS (see

Table 3-2 on page 3-6).

5Verify the LMF was configured properly (see Preparing the LMF section starting on page 3-6).

6Verify the BTS-LMF cable is RG-58 [flexible black cable of less than 76 cm (2.5 feet) length].

7Verify the Ethernet ports are terminated properly (see Figure 3-4 on page 3-13).

8Verify a T-adapter is not used on the LMF side port if connected to the BTS front LMF primary

port.

9Try connecting to the I/O panel (top of frame). Use BNC T-adapters at the LMF port for this

connection.

10 Re-boot the LMF and retry.

11 Re-seat the MGLI and retry.

12 Verify IP addresses are configured properly.

Cannot Communicate to Power Meter

Follow the procedure in Table 6-2 to troubleshoot a power meter

communication failure.

Table 6-2: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication Failure

nStep Action

1Verify the Power Meter is connected to the LMF with a GPIB adapter.

2Verify the cable setup as specified in Chapter 3.

3Verify the GPIB address of the power meter is set to the same value displayed in the applicable

GPIB address box of the LMF Options window Test Equipment tab. Refer to Table 3-24 or

Table 3-25 and the GPIB Addresses section of Appendix J for details.

4Verify the GPIB adapter DIP switch settings are correct. Refer to the CDMA 2000 Test Equipment

Preparation section of Appendix F for details.

. . . continued on next page

Troubleshooting: Installation 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

6-4

Table 6-2: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication Failure

nActionStep

5Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs must be

‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, then cycle GPIB box power and

retry.

6Verify the LMF computer COM1 port is not used by another application; for example, if a

HyperTerminal window is open for MMI, close it.

7Reset all test equipment by clicking Util in the BTS menu bar and selecting

Test Equipment>Reset from the pull-down lists.

Cannot Communicate to Communications Analyzer

Follow the procedure in Table 6-3 to troubleshoot a communications

analyzer communication failure.

Table 6-3: Troubleshooting a Communications Analyzer Communication Failure

nStep Action

1Verify signal generator is connected to LMF with GPIB adapter.

2Verify cable connections as specified in Chapter 3.

3Verify the signal generator GPIB address is set to the same value displayed in the applicable GPIB

address box of the LMF Options window Test Equipment tab. Refer to Table 3-24 or Table 3-25

and the GPIB Address section of Appendix J for details.

4Verify the GPIB adapter DIP switch settings are correct. Refer to the CDMA 2000 Test Equipment

Preparation section of Appendix F for details.

5Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs must be

‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, then cycle the GPIB box power

and retry.

6Verify the LMF computer COM1 port is not used by another application; for example, if a

HyperTerminal window is open for MMI, close it.

7 Reset all test equipment by clicking Util in the BTS menu bar and selecting

Test Equipment>Reset from the pull-down lists.

Troubleshooting: Download68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

6-5

Troubleshooting: Download

Cannot Download CODE to Any Device (card)

Follow the procedure in Table 6-4 to troubleshoot a code download

failure.

Table 6-4: Troubleshooting Code Download Failure

nStep Action

1Verify T1 is disconnected from the BTS.

2Verify the LMF can communicate with the BTS device using the Status function.

3Communication to the MGLI must first be established before trying to talk to any other BTS

device.

The MGLI must be INS_ACT state (green).

4Verify the card is physically present in the cage and powered-up.

5If the card LED is solid RED, it implies hardware failure.

Reset the card by re-seating it.

If the LED remains solid red, replace with a card from another slot & retry.

NOTE

The card can only be replaced by a card of the same type.

6Re-seat the card and try again.

7If BBX reports a failure message and is OOS_RAM, the code load was OK.

8If the download portion completes and the reset portion fails, reset the device by selecting the

device and Reset.

9If a BBX or an MCC remains OOS_ROM (blue) after code download, use the LMF

Device > Status function to verify that the code load was accepted.

10 If the code load was accepted, use LMF Device > Download > Flash to load RAM code into flash

memory.

Cannot Download DATA to Any Device (Card)

Perform the procedure in Table 6-5 to troubleshoot a data download

failure.

Table 6-5: Troubleshooting Data Download Failure

nStep Action

1Re-seat the card and repeat code and data load procedure.

Troubleshooting: Download 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

6-6

Cannot ENABLE Device

Before a device can be enabled (placed in-service), it must be in the

OOS_RAM state (yellow) with data downloaded to the device. The color

of the device changes to green once it is enabled.

The three states that devices can be changed to are as follows:

SEnabled (green, INS)

SDisabled (yellow, OOS_RAM)

SReset (blue, OOS_ROM)

Follow the procedure in Table 6-6 to troubleshoot a device enable

failure.

Table 6-6: Troubleshooting Device Enable (INS) Failure

nStep Action

1Re-seat the card and repeat the code and data load procedure.

2If the CSM cannot be enabled, verify the CDF file has correct latitude and longitude data for cell

site location and GPS sync.

3Ensure the primary CSM is in INS_ACT state.

NOTE

MCCs will not go INS without the CSM being INS.

4Verify the 19.6608 MHz CSM clock; MCCs will not go INS otherwise.

5The BBX should not be enabled for ATP tests.

6If MCCs give “invalid or no system time”, verify the CSM is operable.

Miscellaneous Errors

Perform the procedure in Table 6-7 to troubleshoot miscellaneous

failures.

Table 6-7: Miscellaneous Failures

nStep Action

1If LPAs continue to give alarms, even after cycling power at the circuit breakers, then connect an

MMI cable to the LPA and set up a Hyperterminal connection (see Table 3-5 on page 3-11).

2 Enter ALARMS in the Hyperterminal window.

The resulting LMF display may provide an indication of the problem.

(Call Field Support for further assistance.)

Troubleshooting: Calibration68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

6-7

Troubleshooting: Calibration

Bay Level Offset Calibration Failure

Perform the procedure in Table 6-8 to troubleshoot a BLO calibration

failure.

Table 6-8: Troubleshooting BLO Calibration Failure

nStep Action

1Verify the Power Meter is configured correctly (see the test equipment setup section in Chapter 3)

and connection is made to the proper TX port.

2Verify the parameters in the bts-#.cdf file are set correctly for the following bands:

For 1900 MHz:

Bandclass=1; Freq_Band=16; SSType=16

For 800 MHz:

Bandclass=0; Freq_Band=8; SSType=8

For 1700 MHz:

Bandclass=4; Freq_Band=128; SSType=16

3Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED).

Reset the LPA by pulling the circuit breaker and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.

4Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with cal factors from the sensor

head.

5Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up.

Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs must be ‘ON’ (Power and Ready).

If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, power-cycle (turn power off and on) the GPIB Box and

retry.

6Verify the sensor head is functioning properly by checking it with the 1 mW (0 dBm) Power Ref

signal.

7If communication between the LMF and Power Meter is operational, the Meter display will show

“RES”.

Troubleshooting: Calibration 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

6-8

Cannot Load BLO

For Load BLO failures see Table 6-7.

Calibration Audit Failure

Follow the procedure in Table 6-9 to troubleshoot a calibration audit

failure.

Table 6-9: Troubleshooting Calibration Audit Failure

nStep Action

1Verify the Power Meter is configured correctly (refer to the test equipment setup section of

Chapter 3).

2Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with cal factors from the sensor

head.

3Verify that no LPA is in alarm state (rapidly flashing red LED).

Reset the LPA by pulling the circuit breaker and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.

4Verify that no sensor head is functioning properly by checking it with the 1 mW (0 dBm) Power

Ref signal.

5After calibration, the BLO data must be re-loaded to the BBXs before auditing.

Click on the BBX(s) and select Device>Download BLO.

Re-try the audit.

6Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up.

Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs must be “ON” (Power and Ready).

If any other LED is continuously “ON”, power-cycle (turn power off and on) the GPIB Box and

retry.

Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

6-9

Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP

BTS passed Reduced ATP tests but has forward link problem during normal

operation

Follow the procedure in Table 6-10 to troubleshoot a Forward Link

problem during normal operation.

Table 6-10: Troubleshooting Forward Link Failure (BTS Passed Reduced ATP)

nStep Action

1Perform these additional TX tests to troubleshoot a forward link problem:

- TX mask

- TX rho

- TX code domain

Cannot Perform TX Mask Measurement

Follow the procedure in Table 6-11 to troubleshoot a TX mask

measurement failure.

Table 6-11: Troubleshooting TX Mask Measurement Failure

nStep Action

1Verify that TX audit passes for the BBX(s).

2If performing manual measurement, verify analyzer setup.

3Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED).

Re-set the LPA by pulling the circuit breaker and, after 5 seconds, pushing it back in.

Cannot Perform Rho or Pilot Time Offset Measurement

Follow the procedure in Table 6-12 to troubleshoot a rho or pilot time

offset measurement failure.

Table 6-12: Troubleshooting Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement Failure

nStep Action

1Verify presence of RF signal by switching to spectrum analyzer screen.

2Verify PN offsets displayed on the analyzer is the same as the PN offset in the CDF file.

3Re-load BBX data and repeat the test.

4If performing manual measurement, verify analyzer setup.

5Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED). Reset the LPA by pulling the

circuit breaker and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.

6If Rho value is unstable and varies considerably (e.g. .95,.92,.93), this may indicate that the GPS

is still phasing (i.e., trying to reach and maintain 0 freq. error).

Go to the freq. bar in the upper right corner of the Rho meter and select Hz. Press <Shift-avg>

and enter 10, to obtain an average Rho value. This is an indication the GPS has not stabilized

before going INS and may need to be re-initialized.

Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

6-10

Cannot Perform Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement

Perform the procedure in Table 6-13 to troubleshoot a code domain and

noise floor measurement failure.

Table 6-13: Troubleshooting Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement Failure

nStep Action

1Verify presence of RF signal by switching to spectrum analyzer screen.

2Verify PN offset displayed on analyzer is same as PN offset being used in the CDF file.

3Disable and re-enable MCC (one or more MCCs based on extent of failure).

Troubleshooting: Receive ATP68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

6-11

Troubleshooting: Receive ATP

Multi-FER Test Failure

Perform the procedure in Table 6-14 to troubleshoot a Multi-FER

failure.

Table 6-14: Troubleshooting Multi-FER Failure

nStep Action

1Verify the test equipment set up is correct for an FER test.

2Verify the test equipment is locked to 19.6608 and even second clocks.

On the HP8921A test set, the yellow LED (REF UNLOCK) must be OFF.

3Verify the MCCs have been loaded with data and are INS-ACT.

4Disable and re-enable the MCC (one or more based on extent of failure).

5Disable, re-load code and data, and re-enable the MCC (one or more MCCs based on extent of

failure).

6Verify the antenna connections to frame are correct based on the directions messages.

Troubleshooting: CSM Check-list 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

6-12

Troubleshooting: CSM Check-list

Problem Description

Many of the Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM) board failures may

be resolved in the field before sending the boards to the factory for

repair. This section describes known CSM problems identified in field

returns, some of which are field-repairable. Check these problems before

returning suspect CSM boards.

Intermittent 19.6608 MHz Reference Clock/GPS Receiver Operation

If having any problems with CSM board kit numbers, SGLN1145 or

SGLN4132, check the suffix with the kit number. If the kit has version

“AB”, then replace with version “BC” or higher, and return model “AB”

to the repair center.

No GPS Reference Source

Check the CSM boards for proper hardware configuration. CSM kit

SGLN1145, in Slot l, has an on-board GPS receiver; while kit

SGLN4132, in Slot 2, does not have a GPS receiver. Any incorrectly

configured board must be returned to the repair center. Do not attempt to

change hardware configuration in the field. Also, verify the GPS

antenna is not damaged and is installed per recommended guidelines.

Checksum Failure The CSM could have corrupted data in its firmware resulting in a

non-executable code. The problem is usually caused by either electrical

disturbance or interruption of data during a download. Attempt another

download with no interruptions in the data transfer. Return the CSM

board back to the repair center if the attempt to reload fails.

GPS Bad RX Message Type

This problem is believed to be caused by a later version of CSM

software (3.5 or higher) being downloaded, via LMF, followed by an

earlier version of CSM software (3.4 or lower), being downloaded from

the CBSC. Download again with CSM software code 3.5 or higher.

Return the CSM board back to the repair center if the attempt to reload

fails.

CSM Reference Source Configuration Error

This problem is caused by incorrect reference source configuration

performed in the field by software download. CSM kits SGLN1145 and

SGLN4132 must have proper reference sources configured (as shown

below) to function correctly.

CSM Kit

No. Hardware

Configuration CSM Slot

No. Reference Source

Configuration CDF Value

SGLN1145 With GPS Receiver 1Primary = Local GPS

Backup = Either LFR or HSO 0

2 or 18

SGLN4132 Without GPS Receiver 2Primary = Remote GPS

Backup = Either LFR or HSO 1

2 or 18

Troubleshooting: CSM Check-list68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

6-13

Takes Too Long for CSM to Come INS

This problem may be caused by a delay in GPS acquisition. Check the

accuracy flag status and/or current position. Refer to the GSM system

time/GPS and LFR/HSO verification section in Chapter 3. At least one

satellite should be visible and tracked for the “surveyed” mode and four

satellites should be visible and tracked for the “estimated” mode. Also,

verify correct base site position data used in “surveyed” mode.

C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

6-14

C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting

Introduction

The C-CCP backplane is a multi-layer board that interconnects all the

C-CCP modules. The complexity of this board lends itself to possible

improper diagnoses when problems occur.

Connector Functionality

The following connector overview describes the major types of

backplane connectors along with the functionality of each. This

information allows the CFE to:

SDetermine which connector(s) is associated with a specific problem

type.

SIsolate problems to a specific cable or connector.

Primary “A” and Redundant “B” Inter Shelf Bus

Connectors

The 40 pin Inter Shelf Bus (ISB) connectors provide an interface bus

from the master GLI to all other GLIs in the modem frame. Their basic

function is to provide clock synchronization from the master GLI to all

other GLIs in the frame.

The ISB also provides the following functions:

SSpan line grooming when a single span is used for multiple cages.

SMMI connection to/from the master GLI to cell site modem.

SInterface between GLIs and the AMR (for reporting BTS alarms).

Span Line Connector

The span line input is an 8-pin RJ-45 connector that provides a primary

and secondary (if used) span line interface to each GLI in the C-CCP

shelf. The span line is used for MM/EMX switch control of the Master

GLI and also all the BBX traffic.

Primary “A” and Redundant “B” Reference Distribution

Module Input/Output

The Reference Distribution Module (RDM) connectors route the 3 MHz

reference signals from the CSMs to the GLIs and all BBXs in the

backplane. The signals are used to phase lock loop all clock circuits on

the GLIs and BBX boards to produce precise clock and signal

frequencies.

Power Input (Return A, B, and C connectors)

Provides a +27 volt or -48 volt input for use by the power supply

modules.

C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

6-15

Power Supply Module Interface

Each power supply module has a series of three different connectors to

provide the needed inputs/outputs to the C-CCP backplane. These

include a VCC/Ground input connector, a Harting style multiple pin

interface, and a +15 V/Analog Ground output connector. The C-CCP

Power Modules convert +27 or -48 Volts to a regulated +15, +6.5, and

+5.0 Volts to be used by the C-CCP shelf cards. In the -48 V BTS, the

LPA power modules convert -48 Volts to a regulated +27 Volts.

GLI Connector

This connector consists of a Harting 4SU digital connector and a

6-conductor coaxial connector for RDM distribution. The connectors

provide inputs/outputs for the GLIs in the C-CCP backplane.

GLI 10Base-2 Ethernet “A” and “B” Connections

These BNC connectors are located on the C-CCP backplane and routed

to the GLI board. This interface provides all the control and data

communications between the master GLI and the other GLI, between

gateways, and for the LMF on the LAN.

BBX Connector

Each BBX connector consists of a Harting 2SU/1SU digital connector

and two 6-conductor coaxial connectors. These connectors provide DC,

digital, and RF inputs/outputs for the BBXs in the C-CCP backplane.

CIO Connectors

SRX RF antenna path signal inputs are routed through RX Tri-Filters

(on the I/O plate), and via coaxial cables to the two MPC modules -

the six “A” (main) signals go to one MPC; the six “B” (diversity) to

the other. The MPC outputs the low-noise-amplified signals via the

C-CCP backplane to the CIO where the signals are split and sent to

the appropriate BBX.

SA digital bus then routes the baseband signal through the BBX, to the

backplane, then on to the MCC slots.

SDigital TX antenna path signals originate at the MCCs. Each output

is routed from the MCC slot via the backplane appropriate BBX.

STX RF path signal originates from the BBX, through the backplane to

the CIO, through the CIO, and via multi-conductor coaxial cabling to

the LPAs in the LPA shelf.

C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting Procedure

Table 6-15 through Table 6-24 provide procedures for troubleshooting

problems that appear to be related to a defective C-CCP backplane. The

tables are broken down into possible problems and steps that should be

taken in an attempt to find the root cause.

NOTE Table 6-15 through Table 6-24 must be completed before

replacing ANY C-CCP backplane.

C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

6-16

Digital Control Problems

No GLI Control via LMF (all GLIs)

Follow the procedure in Table 6-15 to troubleshoot a GLI control via

LMF failure.

Table 6-15: No GLI Control via LMF (all GLIs)

nStep Action

1Check the 10Base-2 ethernet connector for proper connection, damage, shorts, or opens.

2Verify the C-CCP backplane Shelf ID DIP switch is set correctly.

3Visually check the master GLI connector (both board and backplane) for damage.

4Replace the master GLI with a known good GLI.

No GLI Control through Span Line Connection (All GLIs)

Follow the procedures in Table 6-16 and Table 6-17 to troubleshoot GLI

control failures.

Table 6-16: No GLI Control through Span Line Connection (Both GLIs)

Step Action

1Verify the C-CCP backplane Shelf ID DIP switch is set correctly.

2Verify that the BTS and GLIs are correctly configured in the OMCR/CBSC data base.

3Visually check the master GLI connector (both board and backplane) for damage.

4Replace the master GLI with a known good GLI.

5Check the span line inputs from the top of the frame to the master GLI for proper connection and

damage.

6Check the span line configuration on the MGLI (see Table 5-4 on page 5-5).

Table 6-17: MGLI Control Good - No Control over Co-located GLI

Step Action

1Verify that the BTS and GLIs are correctly configured in the OMCR CBSC data base.

2Check the ethernet for proper connection, damage, shorts, or opens.

3Visually check all GLI connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.

4Replace the remaining GLI with a known good GLI.

C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

6-17

No AMR Control (MGLI good)

Perform the procedure in Table 6-18 to troubleshoot an AMR control

failure when the MGLI control is good.

Table 6-18: MGLI Control Good - No Control over AMR

Step Action

1Visually check the master GLI connector (both board and backplane) for damage.

2Replace the master GLI with a known good GLI.

3Replace the AMR with a known good AMR.

No BBX Control in the Shelf - (No Control over

Co-located GLIs)

Perform the procedure in Table 6-19 to troubleshoot a BBX control in

the shelf failure.

Table 6-19: No BBX Control in the Shelf - No Control over Co-located GLIs

Step Action

1Visually check all GLI connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.

2Replace the remaining GLI with a known good GLI.

3Visually check BBX connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.

4Replace the BBX with a known good BBX.

No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic

Perform the procedure in Table 6-20 to troubleshoot a span line traffic

failure.

Table 6-20: MGLI Control Good - No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic

Step Action

1Visually check all GLI connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.

2Replace the remaining GLI with a known good GLI.

3Visually check all span line distribution (both connectors and cables) for damage.

4If the problem seems to be limited to one BBX, replace the MGLI with a known good MGLI.

5Perform the BTS Span Parameter Configuration ( see Table 5-4 on page 5-5).

6Ensure that ISB cabling is correct.

C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

6-18

No (or Missing) MCC Channel Elements

Perform the procedure in Table 6-21 to troubleshoot a channel elements

failure.

Table 6-21: No MCC Channel Elements

Step Action

1Verify CEs on a co-located MCC (MCC24 TYPE=2).

2If the problem seems to be limited to one MCC, replace the MCC with a known good MCC.

- Check connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.

3If no CEs on any MCC:

- Verify clock reference to CIO.

4Check the CDF for MCCTYPE=2 (MCC24) or MCCTYPE=0 (MCC8).

C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

6-19

DC Power Problems

Perform the procedure in Table 6-22 to troubleshoot a DC input voltage

to power supply module failure.

WARNING Potentially lethal voltage and current levels are routed to the

BTS equipment. This test must be carried out with a second

person present, acting in a safety role. Remove all rings, jewelry,

and wrist watches prior to beginning this test.

No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module

Table 6-22: No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module

Step Action

1Verify DC power is applied to the BTS frame.

2Verify there are no breakers tripped.

* IMPORTANT

If a breaker has tripped, remove all modules from the applicable shelf supplied by the breaker and

attempt to reset it.

- If the breaker trips again, there is probably a cable or breaker problem within the frame.

- If the breaker does not trip, there is probably a defective module or sub-assembly within the shelf.

3Verify that the C-CCP shelf breaker on the BTS frame breaker panel is functional.

4Use a voltmeter to determine if the input voltage is being routed to the C-CCP backplane by

measuring the DC voltage level on the PWR_IN cable.

- If the voltage is not present, there is probably a cable or breaker problem within the frame.

- If the voltage is present at the connector, reconnect and measure the level at the “VCC” power

feed clip on the distribution backplane.

- If the voltage is correct at the power clip, inspect the clip for damage.

5If everything appears to be correct, visually inspect the power supply module connectors.

6Replace the power supply module with a known good module.

7If steps 1 through 5 fail to indicate a problem, a C-CCP backplane failure (possibly an open trace) has

occurred.

C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

6-20

No DC Voltage (+5, +6.5, or +15 Volts) to a Specific GLI,

BBX, or Switchboard

Perform the procedure in Table 6-23 to troubleshoot a DC input voltage

to GLI, BBX, or Switchboard failure.

Table 6-23: No DC Input Voltage to any C-CCP Shelf Module

Step Action

1Verify the steps in Table 6-22 have been performed.

2Inspect the defective board/module (both board and backplane) connector for damage.

3Replace suspect board/module with known good board/module.

TX and RX Signal Routing Problems

Perform the procedure in Table 6-24 to troubleshoot TX and RX signal

routing problems.

Table 6-24: TX and RX Signal Routing Problems

Step Action

1Inspect all Harting Cable connectors and back-plane connectors for damage in all the affected board

slots.

2Perform steps in the RF path troubleshooting flowchart in this manual.

Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

6-21

Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors

Module Status Indicators

Each of the non-passive plug-in modules has a bi-color (green & red)

LED status indicator located on the module front panel. The indicator is

labeled PWR/ALM. If both colors are turned on, the indicator is yellow.

Each plug-in module, except for the fan module, has its own alarm

(fault) detection circuitry that controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.

The fan TACH signal of each fan module is monitored by the AMR.

Based on the status of this signal, the AMR controls the state of the

PWR/ALM LED on the fan module.

LED Status Combinations for All Modules (except GLI, CSM, BBX, MCC)

PWR/ALM LED

The following list describes the states of the module status indicator.

SSolid GREEN - module operating in a normal (fault free) condition.

SSolid RED - module is operating in a fault (alarm) condition due to

electrical hardware failure.

Note that a fault (alarm) indication may or may not be due to a complete

module failure and normal service may or may not be reduced or

interrupted.

DC/DC Converter LED Status Combinations

The PWR CNVTR has alarm (fault) detection circuitry that controls the

state of the PWR/ALM LED. This is true for both the C-CCP and LPA

power converters.

PWR/ALM LED

The following list describes the states of the bi-color LED.

SSolid GREEN - module operating in a normal (fault free) condition.

SSolid RED - module is operating in a fault (alarm) condition due to

electrical hardware problem.

Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

6-22

CSM LED Status Combinations

PWR/ALM LED

The CSMs include on-board alarm detection. Hardware and

software/firmware alarms are indicated via the front panel indicators.

After the memory tests, the CSM loads OOS-RAM code from the Flash

EPROM, if available. If not available, the OOS-ROM code is loaded

from the Flash EPROM.

SSolid GREEN - module is INS_ACT or INS_STBY no alarm.

SSolid RED - Initial power up or module is operating in a fault (alarm)

condition.

SSlowly Flashing GREEN - OOS_ROM no alarm.

SLong RED/Short GREEN - OOS_ROM alarm.

SRapidly Flashing GREEN - OOS_RAM no alarm or INS_ACT in

DUMB mode.

SShort RED/Short GREEN - OOS_RAM alarm.

SLong GREEN/Short RED - INS_ACT or INS_STBY alarm.

SOff - no DC power or on-board fuse is open.

SSolid YELLOW - After a reset, the CSMs begin to boot. During

SRAM test and Flash EPROM code check, the LED is yellow. (If

SRAM or Flash EPROM fail, the LED changes to a solid RED and

the CSM attempts to reboot.)

Figure 6-1: CSM Front Panel Indicators & Monitor Ports

PWR/ALM

Indicator

FREQ

MONITOR

SYNC

MONITOR

FW00303

. . . continued on next page

Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

6-23

FREQ Monitor Connector

A test port provided at the CSM front panel via a BNC receptacle allows

monitoring of the 19.6608 MHz clock generated by the CSM. When

both CSM 1 and CSM 2 are in an in-service (INS) condition, the CSM 2

clock signal frequency is the same as that output by CSM 1.

The clock is a sine wave signal with a minimum amplitude of +2 dBm

(800 mVpp) into a 50 Ω load connected to this port.

SYNC Monitor Connector

A test port provided at the CSM front panel via a BNC receptacle allows

monitoring of the “Even Second Tick” reference signal generated by the

CSMs.

At this port, the reference signal is a TTL active high signal with a pulse

width of 153 nanoseconds.

MMI Connector - Only accessible behind front panel. The

RS-232 MMI port connector is intended to be used primarily in

the development or factory environment, but may be used in the

field for debug/maintenance purposes.

GLI2 LED Status Combinations

The GLI2 module has indicators, controls and connectors as described

below and shown in Figure 6-2.

The operating states of the 5 LEDs are:

ACTIVE

Solid GREEN - GLI2 is active. This means that the GLI2 has shelf

control and is providing control of the digital interfaces.

Off - GLI2 is not active (i.e., Standby). The mate GLI2 should be

active.

MASTER

SSolid GREEN - GLI2 is Master (sometimes referred to as MGLI2).

SOff - GLI2 is non-master (i.e., Slave).

ALARM

SSolid RED - GLI2 is in a fault condition or in reset.

SWhile in reset transition, STATUS LED is OFF while GLI2 is

performing ROM boot (about 12 seconds for normal boot).

SWhile in reset transition, STATUS LED is ON while GLI2 is

performing RAM boot (about 4 seconds for normal boot).

SOff - No Alarm.

Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

6-24

STATUS

SFlashing GREEN- GLI2 is in service (INS), in a stable operating

condition.

SOn - GLI2 is in OOS RAM state operating downloaded code.

SOff - GLI2 is in OOS ROM state operating boot code.

SPANS

SSolid GREEN - Span line is connected and operating.

SSolid RED - Span line is disconnected or a fault condition exists.

GLI2 Pushbuttons and Connectors

RESET Pushbutton - Depressing the RESET pushbutton

causes a partial reset of the CPU and a reset of all board devices.

The GLI2 is placed in the OOS_ROM state

MMI Connector - The RS-232MMI port connector is intended

to be used primarily in the development or factory environment

but may be used in the field for debug/maintenance purposes.

LAN Connectors (A & B) - The two 10BASE2 Ethernet circuit

board mounted BNC connectors are located on the bottom front

edge of the GLI2; one for each LAN interface, A & B. Ethernet

cabling is connected to tee connectors fastened to these BNC

connectors.

Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

6-25

Figure 6-2: GLI2 Front Panel

MMI PORT

CONNECTOR

ACTIVE LED

STATUS RESET ALARM SPANS MASTER MMI ACTIVE

STATUS LED

RESET

PUSHBUTTON

ALARM LED

SPANS LED

MASTER LED

STATUS OFF − operating normally

ON − briefly during power−up when the Alarm LED turns OFF.

SLOW GREEN − when the GLI2 is INS (in−service)

RESET

ALARM OFF − operating normally

ON − briefly during power−up when the Alarm LED turns OFF.

SLOW GREEN − when the GLI2 is INS (in−service)

SPANS

MASTER

MMI PORT

CONNECTOR

ACTIVE

LED OPERATING STATUS

All functions on the GLI2 are reset when pressing and releasing

the switch.

ON − operating normally in active mode

OFF − operating normally in standby mode

Shows the operating status of the redundant cards. The redundant

card toggles automatically if the active card is removed or fails

ON − active card operating normally

OFF − standby card operating normally

The pair of GLI2 cards include a redundant status. The card in the

top shelf is designated by hardware as the active card; the card in

the bottom shelf is in the standby mode.

OFF − card is powered down, in initialization, or in standby

GREEN − operating normally

YELLOW − one or more of the equipped initialized spans is receiving

a remote alarm indication signal from the far end

RED − one or more of the equipped initialized spans is in an alarm

state

An RS−232, serial, asynchronous communications link for use as

an MMI port. This port supports 300 baud, up to a maximum of

115,200 baud communications.

FW00225 6

Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

6-26

GLI3 Front Panel

Figure 6-3 shows the GLI3 front panel.

Figure 6-3: GLI3 Front Panel

STATUS OFF − operating normally

ON − briefly during power−up when the Alarm LED turns OFF

SLOW GREEN − when the GLI3 is INS (in−service)

RESET

ALARM OFF − operating normally

ON − briefly during power−up when the Alarm LED turns OFF

SLOW GREEN − when the GLI3 is INS (in−service)

BPR A

Span

MMI

ACTIVE

LED OPERATING STATUS

Pressing and releasing the switch resets all functions on the GLI3.

Shows the operating status of the redundant cards. The redundant

card toggles automatically if the active card is removed or fails

ON − active card operating normally

OFF − standby card operating normally

Connects to either a BPR or expansion cage and is wired as an

ethernet client.

An RS−232, serial, asynchronous communications link for use as

an MMI port. This port supports 300 baud, up to a maximum of

115,200 baud communications.

BPR B

GLI

AUX

Supports the cross−coupled ethernet circuits to the mate GLI using a

double crossover cable.

Wired as an ethernet client for direct connection to a personal com−

puter with a standard ethernet cable. It allows connection of ethernet

sniffer" when the ethernet switch is properly configured for port mon−

itoring.

Connects to either a BPR or expansion cage and is wired as an

ethernet client.

MMI Port

Reset Switch

Dual 100BASE-T

in a single RJ45

to Redundant

(Mate) GLI3

100BASE-T

Auxiliary Monitor

Port

BPR B AUX RESET

SPAN

ALARM MMI

ACT

STA

100BASE-T to

BTS Packet Router

or Expansion cage

Span (LED)

Alarm (LED)

Active (LED)

Status (LED)

GLIBPR A

ti-CDMA-WP-00064-v01-ildoc-ftw

OFF − card is powered down, in initialization, or in standby

GREEN − operating normally

YELLOW − one or more of the equipped initialized spans is receiving

a remote alarm indication signal from the far end

RED − one or more of the equipped initialized spans is in an alarm

state

Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

6-27

BBX LED Status Combinations

PWR/ALM LED

The BBX module has its own alarm (fault) detection circuitry that

controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.

The following list describes the states of the bi-color LED:

SSolid GREEN - INS_ACT no alarm

SSolid RED Red - initializing or power-up alarm

SSlowly Flashing GREEN - OOS_ROM no alarm

SLong RED/Short GREEN - OOS_ROM alarm

SRapidly Flashing GREEN - OOS_RAM no alarm

SShort RED/Short GREEN - OOS_RAM alarm

SLong GREEN/Short RED - INS_ACT alarm

MCC LED Status Combinations

The MCC module has LED indicators and connectors as described

below (see Figure 6-4). Note that the figure does not show the

connectors as they are concealed by the removable lens.

The LED indicators and their states are as follows:

PWR/ALM LED

SRED - fault on module

ACTIVE LED

SOff - module is inactive, off-line, or not processing traffic.

SSlowly Flashing GREEN - OOS_ROM no alarm.

SRapidly Flashing Green - OOS_RAM no alarm.

SSolid GREEN - module is INS_ACT, on-line, processing traffic.

PWR/ALM and ACTIVE LEDs

SSolid RED - module is powered but is in reset or the BCP is inactive.

MMI Connectors

SThe RS-232 MMI port connector (four-pin) is intended to be used

primarily in the development or factory environment but may be used

in the field for debugging purposes.

SThe RJ-11 ethernet port connector (eight-pin) is intended to be used

primarily in the development environment but may be used in the field

for high data rate debugging purposes.

Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

6-28

Figure 6-4: MCC Front Panel

PWR/ALM LED

LENS

(REMOVABLE)

ACTIVE LED

PWR/ALM ACTIVE

PWR/ALM OFF − operating normally

ON − briefly during power−up and during failure

conditions

ACTIVE

LED OPERATING STATUS

RAPIDLY BLINKING − Card is code−loaded but

not enabled

SLOW BLINKING − Card is not code−loaded

ON − card is code−loaded and enabled

(INS_ACTIVE)

COLOR

GREEN

RED

RED ON − fault condition

SLOW FLASHING (alternating with green) − CHI

bus inactive on power−up

An alarm is generated in the event of a failure

FW00224

LPA Shelf LED Status Combinations

LPA Module LED

Each LPA module contains a bi-color LED just above the MMI

connector on the front panel of the module. Interpret this LED as

follows:

SGREEN — LPA module is active and is reporting no alarms (Normal

condition).

SFlashing GREEN/RED — LPA module is active but is reporting an

low input power condition. If no BBX is keyed, this is normal and

does not constitute a failure.

Basic Troubleshooting - Span Control Link68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

6-29

Basic Troubleshooting - Span Control Link

Span Problems (No Control Link)

Perform the procedure in Table 6-25 to troubleshoot a control link

failure.

Table 6-25: Troubleshoot Control Link Failure

nStep Action

1Connect the CDMA LMF computer to the MMI port on the applicable MGLI/GLI as shown in

Figure 6-5 or Figure 6-6.

2Start an MMI communication session with the applicable MGLI/GLI by using the Windows

desktop shortcut icon.

3Once the connection window opens, press the CDMA LMF computer Enter key until the GLI>

prompt is obtained.

4At the GLI> prompt, enter:

config ni current <cr> (equivalent of span view command)

The system will respond with a display similar to the following:

The frame format in flash is set to use T1_2.

Equalization:

Span A - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)

Span B - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)

Span C - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)

Span D - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)

Span E - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)

Span F - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)

Linkspeed: Default (56K for T1 D4 AMI, 64K otherwise)

Currently, the link is running at the default rate

The actual rate is 0

NOTE

Defaults for span equalization are 0-131 feet for T1/J1 spans and 120 Ohm for E1.

Default linkspeed is 56K for T1 D4 AMI spans and 64K for all other types.

There is no need to change from defaults unless the OMC-R/CBSC span configuration requires it.

5The span configurations loaded in the GLI must match those in the OMCR/CBSC database for the

BTS. If they do not, proceed to Table 6-26.

6Repeat steps 1 through 5 for all remaining GLIs.

7If the span settings are correct, verify the edlc parameters using the show command.

Any alarm conditions indicate that the span is not operating correctly.

STry looping back the span line from the DSX panel back to the MM, and verify that the looped

signal is good.

SListen for control tone on the appropriate timeslot from the Base Site and MM.

8Exit the GLI MMI session and HyperTerminal connection by selecting File from the connection

window menu bar, and then Exit from the drop-down menu.

9If no TCHs in groomed MCCs (or in whole C-CCP shelf) can process calls, verify that the ISB

cabling is correct and that ISB A and ISB B cables are not swapped.

Basic Troubleshooting - Span Control Link 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

6-30

Figure 6-5: MGLI/GLI Board MMI Connection Detail

NULL MODEM

BOARD

(TRN9666A)

8-PIN TO 10-PIN

RS-232 CABLE

(P/N 30-09786R01)

RS-232

CABLE

8-PIN

CDMA LMF

COMPUTER

To MMI port

DB9-TO-DB25

ADAPTER

COM1 or COM2

ACTIVE LED

STATUS LED

ALARM LED

MASTER LED

MMI Port

Connector

SPANS LED

RESET

Pushbutton

GLI

ti-CDMA-WP-00079-v01-ildoc-ftw

Basic Troubleshooting - Span Control Link68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

6-31

Figure 6-6: GLI3 Board MMI Connection Detail

NULL MODEM

BOARD

(TRN9666A)

8-PIN TO 10-PIN

RS-232 CABLE

(P/N 30-09786R01)

RS-232

CABLE

8-PIN

CDMA LMF

COMPUTER

To MMI port

DB9-TO-DB25

ADAPTER

COM1 or COM2

GLI3

MMI Port

Reset Switch

Dual 100BASE-T

in a single RJ45

to Redundant

(Mate) GLI3

100BASE-T

Auxiliary Monitor

Port

BPR B AUX RESET

SPAN

ALARM MMI

ACT

STA

100BASE-T to

BTS Packet Router

or Expansion cage

Span (LED)

Alarm (LED)

Active (LED)

Status (LED)

GLIBPR A

ti-CDMA-WP-00064-v01-ildoc-ftw

REF

Basic Troubleshooting - Span Control Link 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

6-32

Set BTS Site Span Configuration

Perform the procedure in Table 6-26 to set the span parameter

configuration.

NOTE Perform the following procedure ONLY if span configurations

loaded in the MGLI/GLIs do not match those in the

OMCR/CBSC data base, AND ONLY when the exact

configuration data is available. Loading incorrect span

configuration data will render the site inoperable.

Table 6-26: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration

nStep Action

1If not previously done, connect the CDMA LMF computer to the MMI port on the applicable

MGLI/GLI as shown in Figure 6-5.

2If there is no MMI communication session in progress with the applicable MGLI/GLI, initiate one

by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon.

3At the GLI> prompt, enter:

config ni format <option> <cr>

The terminal will display a response similar to the following:

COMMAND SYNTAX: config ni format option

Next available options:

LIST - option : Span Option

E1_1 : E1_1 - E1 HDB3 CRC4 no TS16

E1_2 : E1_2 - E1 HDB3 no CRC4 no TS16

E1_3 : E1_3 - E1 HDB3 CRC4 TS16

E1_4 : E1_4 - E1 HDB3 no CRC4 TS16

T1_1 : T1_1 - D4, AMI, No ZCS

T1_2 : T1_2 - ESF, B8ZS

J1_1 : J1_1 - ESF, B8ZS (Japan) - Default

J1_2 : J1_2 - ESF, B8ZS

T1_3 : T1_3 - D4, AMI, ZCS

NOTE

With this command, all active (in-use) spans will be set to the same format.

4To set or change the span type, enter the correct option from the list at the entry prompt (>), as

shown in the following example:

> T1_2 <cr>

NOTE

The entry is case-sensitive and must be typed exactly as it appears in the list. If the entry is typed

incorrectly, a response similar to the following will be displayed:

CP: Invalid command

GLI2>

. . . continued on next page

Basic Troubleshooting - Span Control Link68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

6-33

Table 6-26: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration

nActionStep

5An acknowledgement similar to the following will be displayed:

The value has been programmed. It will take effect after the next reset.

GLI2>

6If the current MGLI/GLI span rate must be changed, enter the following MMI command:

config ni linkspeed <cr>

The terminal will display a response similar to the following:

Next available options:

LIST - linkspeed : Span Linkspeed

56K : 56K (default for T1_1 and T1_3 systems)

64K : 64K (default for all other span configurations)

NOTE

With this command, all active (in-use) spans will be set to the same linkspeed.

7To set or change the span linkspeed, enter the required option from the list at the entry prompt (>),

as shown in the following example:

> 64K <cr>

NOTE

The entry is case-sensitive and must be typed exactly as it appears in the list. If the entry is typed

incorrectly, a response similar to the following will be displayed:

CP: Invalid command

GLI2>

8An acknowledgement similar to the following will be displayed:

The value has been programmed. It will take effect after the next reset.

GLI2>

9If the span equalization must be changed, enter the following MMI command:

config ni equal <cr>

The terminal will display a response similar to the following:

COMMAND SYNTAX: config ni equal span equal

Next available options:

LIST - span : Span

a : Span A

b : Span B

c : Span C

d : Span D

e : Span E

f : Span F

. . . continued on next page

Basic Troubleshooting - Span Control Link 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

6-34

Table 6-26: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration

nActionStep

10 At the entry prompt (>), enter the designator from the list for the span to be changed as shown in

the following example:

> a <cr>

The terminal will display a response similar to the following:

COMMAND SYNTAX: config ni equal a equal

Next available options:

LIST - equal : Span Equalization

0 : 0-131 feet (default for T1/J1)

1 : 132-262 feet

2 : 263-393 feet

3 : 394-524 feet

4 : 525-655 feet

5 : LONG HAUL

6 : 75 OHM

7 : 120 OHM (default for E1)

11 At the entry prompt (>), enter the code for the required equalization from the list as shown in the

following example:

> 0 <cr>

The terminal will display a response similar to the following:

> 0

The value has been programmed. It will take effect after the next reset.

GLI2>

12 Repeat steps 9 through 11 for each in-use span.

NOTE

After executing the config ni format, config ni linkspeed, and/or config ni equal commands,

the affected MGLI/GLI board MUST be reset and reloaded for changes to take effect.

Although defaults are shown, always consult site specific documentation for span type and

linkspeed used at the site.

13 Press the RESET button on the MGLI/GLI for changes to take effect.

. . . continued on next page

Basic Troubleshooting - Span Control Link68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

6-35

Table 6-26: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration

nActionStep

14 Once the MGLI/GLI has reset, execute the following command to verify span settings are as

required:

config ni current <cr> (equivalent of span view command)

The system will respond with a display similar to the following:

The frame format in flash is set to use T1_2.

Equalization:

Span A - 0-131 feet

Span B - 0-131 feet

Span C - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)

Span D - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)

Span E - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)

Span F - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)

Linkspeed: 64K

Currently, the link is running at 64K

The actual rate is 0

15 If the span configuration is not correct, perform the applicable step from this table to change it and

repeat steps 13 and 14 to verify required changes have been programmed.

16 Return to step 6 of Table 6-25.

Basic Troubleshooting - Span Control Link 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

6-36

Notes

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

A-1

Appendix A

Data Sheets

Optimization (Pre-ATP) Data Sheets 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

A-2

Optimization (Pre-ATP) Data Sheets

Verification of Test Equipment Used

Table A-1: Verification of Test Equipment Used

Manufacturer Model Serial Number

Comments:________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

Optimization (Pre-ATP) Data Sheets68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

A-3

Site Checklist

Table A-2: Site Checklist

OK Parameter Specification Comments

-Deliveries Per established procedures

-Floor Plan Verified

Inter Frame Cables:

Ethernet

Frame Ground

Power

Per procedure

Factory Data:

BBX

Test Panel

RFDS

Per procedure

-Site Temperature

-Dress Covers/Brackets

Preliminary Operations

Table A-3: Preliminary Operations

OK Parameter Specification Comments

-Shelf ID Dip Switches Per site equipage

-BBX Jumpers Verified per procedure

-Ethernet LAN verification Verified per procedure

Comments:_________________________________________________________

Optimization (Pre-ATP) Data Sheets 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

A-4

Pre-Power and Initial Power Tests

Table A-4: Pre-power Checklist

OK Parameter Specification Comments

-Pre-power-up tests Verify power supply

output voltage at the top

of each BTS frame is

within specifications

Internal Cables:

ISB (all cages)

CSM (all cages)

Power (all cages)

Ethernet Connectors

LAN A ohms

LAN B ohms

LAN A shield

LAN B shield

Ethernet Boots

verified

isolated

installed

-Air Impedance Cage (single cage) installed

-Initial power-up tests Verify power supply

output voltage at the top

of each BTS frame is

within specifications:

Comments:_________________________________________________________

Optimization (Pre-ATP) Data Sheets68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

A-5

General Optimization Checklist

Table A-5: Pre-power Checklist

OK Parameter Specification Comments

LEDs

Frame fans

illuminated

operational

LMF to BTS Connection

Preparing the LMF

Log into the LMF PC

Create site specific BTS directory

Create master-bts-cdma directory

Download device loads

Moving/Linking files

per procedure

Ping LAN A

Ping LAN B

per procedure

Download/Enable MGLIs

Download/Enable GLIs

Set Site Span Configuration

Download CSMs

Download

Enable CSMs

Download/Enable MCCs

Download BBXs

Download TSU (in RFDS)

Program TSU NAM

per procedure

-Test Set Calibration per procedure

Comments:_________________________________________________________

Optimization (Pre-ATP) Data Sheets 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

A-6

GPS Receiver Operation

Table A-6: GPS Receiver Operation

OK Parameter Specification Comments

-GPS Receiver Control Task State:

tracking satellites

Verify parameter

-Initial Position Accuracy: Verify Estimated

or Surveyed

-Current Position:

lat

lon

height

RECORD in ms

and cm also

convert to deg

min sec

-Current Position: satellites tracked

Estimated:

(>4) satellites tracked,(>4) satellites visible

Surveyed:

(>1) satellite tracked,(>4) satellites visible

Verify parameter

as appropriate:

-GPS Receiver Status:Current Dilution of

Precision

(PDOP or HDOP): (<30)

Verify parameter

-Current reference source:

Number: 0; Status: Good; Valid: Yes Verify parameter

Comments:_________________________________________________________

Optimization (Pre-ATP) Data Sheets68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

A-7

LFR Receiver Operation

Table A-7: LFR Receiver Operation

OK Parameter Specification Comments

-Station call letters M X Y Z

assignment. as specified in site

documentation

-SN ratio is > 8 dB

-LFR Task State: lfr

locked to station xxxx

Verify parameter

-Current reference source:

Number: 1; Status: Good; Valid: Yes

Verify parameter

Comments:_________________________________________________________

Optimization (Pre-ATP) Data Sheets 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

A-8

LPA IM Reduction

Table A-8: LPA IM Reduction

Parameter Comments

CARRIER

OK LPA

#4:1 & 2:1

3-Sector 2:1

6-Sector Dual BP

3-Sector Dual BP

6-Sector

Specification

-1A C1 C1 C1 C1 No Alarms

-1B C1 C1 C1 C1 No Alarms

-1C C1 C1 C1 C1 No Alarms

-1D C1 C1 C1 C1 No Alarms

-2A C2 C2 C2 No Alarms

-2B C2 C2 C2 No Alarms

-2C C2 C2 C2 No Alarms

-2D C2 C2 C2 No Alarms

-3A C3 C1 C1 No Alarms

-3B C3 C1 C1 No Alarms

-3C C3 C1 C1 No Alarms

-3D C3 C1 C1 No Alarms

-4A C4 C2 No Alarms

-4B C4 C2 No Alarms

-4C C4 C2 No Alarms

-4D C4 C2 No Alarms

Comments:_________________________________________________________

Cx - denotes physical carriers

For applied frequency requirements, see Appendix E.

Optimization (Pre-ATP) Data Sheets68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

A-9

LPA Convergence

Table A-9: LPA Convergence

OK Parameter Specification Data

LPA # Converged

-1A Verify per procedure & upload

-1B convergence data

-1C

-1D

-2A Verify per procedure & upload

-2B convergence data

-2C

-2D

-3A Verify per procedure & upload

-3B convergence data

-3C

-3D

-4A Verify per procedure & upload

-4B convergence data

-4C

-4D

Optimization (Pre-ATP) Data Sheets 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

A-10

TX BLO/Power Output Verification for 3-Sector Configurations

1-Carrier

2-Carrier Non-adjacent Channels

4-Carrier Non-adjacent Channels

Table A-10: TX BLO Calibration (3-S: 1-C, and 2- and 4-C Non-adjacent Channels)

OK Parameter Specification Comments

-BBX-1, ANT-1 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-1 = dB

-Calibrate

carrier 1 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)

prior to calibration

BBX-2, ANT-2 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-2 = dB

-BBX-3, ANT-3 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-3 = dB

-BBX-7, ANT-1 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-1 = dB

-Calibrate

carrier 2 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)

prior to calibration

BBX-8, ANT-2 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-2 = dB

-BBX-9, ANT-3 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-3 = dB

-BBX-4, ANT-1 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-1 = dB

-Calibrate

carrier 3 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)

prior to calibration

BBX-5, ANT-2 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-2 = dB

-BBX-6, ANT-3 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-3 = dB

-BBX-10, ANT-1 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-1 = dB

-Calibrate

carrier 4 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)

prior to calibration

BBX-11, ANT-2 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-2 = dB

-BBX-12, ANT-3 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-3 = dB

-BBX-1, ANT-1 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-1 = dB

Calibration

Audit

carrier 1

0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution

post calibration

BBX-2, ANT-2 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-2 = dB

carrier 1

BBX-3, ANT-3 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-3 = dB

. . . continued on next page

Optimization (Pre-ATP) Data Sheets68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

A-11

Table A-10: TX BLO Calibration (3-S: 1-C, and 2- and 4-C Non-adjacent Channels)

OK CommentsSpecificationParameter

-BBX-7, ANT-1 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-1 = dB

Calibration

Audit

carrier 2

0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution

post calibration

BBX-8, ANT-2 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-2 = dB

carrier 2

BBX-9, ANT-3 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-3 = dB

-BBX-4, ANT-1 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-1 = dB

Calibration

Audit

carrier 3

0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution

post calibration

BBX-5, ANT-2 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-2 = dB

carrier 3

BBX-6, ANT-3 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-3 = dB

-BBX-10, ANT-1 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-1 = dB

Calibration

Audit

carrier 4

0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution

post calibration

BBX-11, ANT-2 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-2 = dB

carrier 4

BBX-12, ANT-3 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-3 = dB

Comments:________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

2-Carrier Adjacent Channel

Table A-11: TX BLO Calibration (3-S: 2-C Adjacent Channels)

OK Parameter Specification Comments

-BBX-1, ANT-1 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-1 = dB

-Calibrate

carrier 1 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),

38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration

BBX-2, ANT-2 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-2 = dB

-BBX-3, ANT-3 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-3 = dB

. . . continued on next page

Optimization (Pre-ATP) Data Sheets 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

A-12

Table A-11: TX BLO Calibration (3-S: 2-C Adjacent Channels)

OK CommentsSpecificationParameter

-BBX-7, ANT-4 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-4 = dB

-Calibrate

carrier 2 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),

38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration

BBX-8, ANT-5 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-5 = dB

-BBX-9, ANT-6 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-6 = dB

-BBX-1, ANT-1 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-1 = dB

Calibration

Audit

carrier 1

0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution

post calibration

BBX-2, ANT-2 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-2 = dB

carrier 1

BBX-3, ANT-3 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-3 = dB

-BBX-7, ANT-4 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-4 = dB

Calibration

Audit

carrier 2

0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution

post calibration

BBX-8, ANT-5 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-5 = dB

carrier 2

BBX-9, ANT-6 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-6 = dB

Comments:________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

3-Carrier Adjacent Channels

4-Carrier Adjacent Channels

Table A-12: TX BLO Calibration (3-S: 3- or 4-C Adjacent Channels)

OK Parameter Specification Comments

-BBX-1, ANT-1 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-1 = dB

-Calibrate

carrier 1 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)

prior to calibration

BBX-2, ANT-2 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-2 = dB

-BBX-3, ANT-3 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-3 = dB

. . . continued on next page

Optimization (Pre-ATP) Data Sheets68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

A-13

Table A-12: TX BLO Calibration (3-S: 3- or 4-C Adjacent Channels)

OK CommentsSpecificationParameter

-BBX-7, ANT-1 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-1 = dB

-Calibrate

carrier 2 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)

prior to calibration

BBX-8, ANT-2 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-2 = dB

-BBX-9, ANT-3 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-3 = dB

-BBX-4, ANT-4 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-4 = dB

-Calibrate

carrier 3 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)

prior to calibration

BBX-5, ANT-5 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-5 = dB

-BBX-6, ANT-6 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-6 = dB

-BBX-10, ANT-4 = dB

BBX-3, ANT-4 = dB

-Calibrate

carrier 4 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)

prior to calibration

BBX-11, ANT-5 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-5 = dB

-BBX-12, ANT-6 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-6 = dB

-BBX-1, ANT-1 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-1 = dB

Calibration

Audit

carrier 1

0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution

post calibration

BBX-2, ANT-2 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-2 = dB

carrier 1

BBX-3, ANT-3 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-3 = dB

-BBX-7, ANT-1 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-1 = dB

Calibration

Audit

carrier 2

0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution

post calibration

BBX-8, ANT-2 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-2 = dB

carrier 2

BBX-9, ANT-3 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-3 = dB

. . . continued on next page

Optimization (Pre-ATP) Data Sheets 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

A-14

Table A-12: TX BLO Calibration (3-S: 3- or 4-C Adjacent Channels)

OK CommentsSpecificationParameter

-BBX-4, ANT-4 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-4 = dB

Calibration

Audit

carrier 3

0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution

post calibration

BBX-5, ANT-5 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-5 = dB

carrier 3

BBX-6, ANT-6 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-6 = dB

-BBX-10, ANT-4 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-4 = dB

Calibration

Audit

carrier 4

0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution

post calibration

BBX-11, ANT-5 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-5 = dB

carrier 4

BBX-12, ANT-6 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-6 = dB

Comments:________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

Optimization (Pre-ATP) Data Sheets68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

A-15

TX BLO/Power Output Verification for 6-Sector Configurations

1-Carrier

2-Carrier Non-adjacent Channels

Table A-13: TX BLO Calibration (6-S: 1-C, 2-C Non-adjacent Channels)

OK Parameter Specification Comments

-BBX-1, ANT-1 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-1 = dB

-BBX-2, ANT-2 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-2 = dB

-Calibrate TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),

BBX-3, ANT-3 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-3 = dB

carrier 1 38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration BBX-4, ANT-4 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-4 = dB

-BBX-5, ANT-5 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-5 = dB

-BBX-6, ANT-6 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-6 = dB

-BBX-7, ANT-1 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-1 = dB

-BBX-8, ANT-2 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-2 = dB

-Calibrate TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),

BBX-9, ANT-3 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-3 = dB

carrier 2 38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration BBX-10, ANT-4 = dB

BBX-3, ANT-4 = dB

-BBX-11, ANT-5 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-5 = dB

-BBX-12, ANT-6 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-5 = dB

. . . continued on next page

Optimization (Pre-ATP) Data Sheets 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

A-16

Table A-13: TX BLO Calibration (6-S: 1-C, 2-C Non-adjacent Channels)

OK CommentsSpecificationParameter

-BBX-1, ANT-1 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-1 = dB

-BBX-2, ANT-2 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-2 = dB

-Calibration 0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution

BBX-3, ANT-3 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-3 = dB

Audit

carrier 1 post calibration BBX-4, ANT-4 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-4 = dB

-BBX-5, ANT-5 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-5 = dB

-BBX-6, ANT-6 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-6 = dB

-BBX-7, ANT-1 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-1 = dB

-BBX-8, ANT-2 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-2 = dB

-Calibration 0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution

BBX-9, ANT-3 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-3 = dB

Audit

carrier 2 post calibration BBX-10, ANT-4 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-4 = dB

-BBX-11, ANT-5 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-5 = dB

-BBX-12, ANT-6 = dB

BBX-r, ANT-6 = dB

Comments:________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

Optimization (Pre-ATP) Data Sheets68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

A-17

BTS Redundancy/Alarm Tests

Table A-14: BTS Redundancy/Alarm Tests

OK Parameter Specification Data

-SIF: Misc. alarm tests Verify per procedure

-MGLI redundancy test Verify per procedure

-GLI redundancy test Verify per procedure

-Power supply/converter

redundancy Verify per procedure

-Misc. alarm tests Verify per procedure

-CSM, GPS, & LFR

redundancy/alarm tests Verify per procedure

-LPA redundancy test Verify per procedure

Comments:________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

TX Antenna VSWR

Table A-15: TX Antenna VSWR

OK Parameter Specification Data

-VSWR -

Antenna 1 < (1.5 : 1)

-VSWR -

Antenna 2 < (1.5 : 1)

-VSWR -

Antenna 3 < (1.5 : 1)

-VSWR -

Antenna 4 < (1.5 : 1)

-VSWR -

Antenna 5 < (1.5 : 1)

-VSWR -

Antenna 6 < (1.5 : 1)

Comments:________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

Optimization (Pre-ATP) Data Sheets 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

A-18

RX Antenna VSWR

Table A-16: RX Antenna VSWR

OK Parameter Specification Data

-VSWR -

Antenna 1 < (1.5 : 1)

-VSWR -

Antenna 2 < (1.5 : 1)

-VSWR -

Antenna 3 < (1.5 : 1)

-VSWR -

Antenna 4 < (1.5 : 1)

-VSWR -

Antenna 5 < (1.5 : 1)

-VSWR -

Antenna 6 < (1.5 : 1)

Comments:_________________________________________________________

AMR Verification

Table A-17: AMR CDI Alarm Input Verification

OK Parameter Specification Data

Verify CDI alarm input

operation (“ALARM A”

(numbers 1 -18)

BTS Relay #XX -

Contact Alarm

Sets/Clears

Verify CDI alarm input

operation (“ALARM B”

(numbers 19 -36)

BTS Relay #XX -

Contact Alarm

Sets/Clears

Comments:_________________________________________________________

Site Serial Number Check List68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

A-19

Site Serial Number Check List

Date Site

C-CCP Shelf

Site I/O A & B

C-CCP Shelf

CSM-1

CSM-2

HSO

CCD-1

CCD-2

AMR-1

AMR-2

MPC-1

MPC-2

Fans 1-3

GLI-1

GLI-2

BBX-1

BBX-2

BBX-3

BBX-4

BBX-5

BBX-6

BBX-7

BBX-8

BBX-9

BBX-10

BBX-11

BBX-12

BBX-r

MCC-1

MCC-2

MCC-3

MCC-4

MCC-5

MCC-6

MCC-7

MCC-8

MCC-9

Site Serial Number Check List 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

A-20

MCC-1-10

MCC-1 1

MCC-1-12

CIO

SWITCH

PS-1

PS-2

PS-3

LPAs

LPA 1A

LPA 1B

LPA 1C

LPA 1D

LPA 2A

LPA 2B

LPA 2C

LPA 2D

LPA 3A

LPA 3B

LPA 3C

LPA 3D

LPA 4A

LPA 4B

LPA 4C

LPA 4D

Power Conversion Shelf (-48 V BTS Only)

AMR

PS 4

PS 5

PS 6

PS 7

PS 8

PS 9

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

B-1

Appendix B

PN Offset/I & Q Offset Register

Programming Information

PN Offset Programming Information 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

B-2

PN Offset Programming Information

PN Offset Background

All channel elements transmitted from a BTS in a particular 1.25 MHz

CDMA channel are orthonogonally spread by 1 of 128 possible Walsh

code functions; additionally, they are also spread by a quadrature pair of

PN sequences unique to each sector.

Overall, the mobile uses this to differentiate multiple signals transmitted

from the same BTS (and surrounding BTS) sectors, and to synchronize

to the next strongest sector.

The PN offset per sector is stored on the BBXs, where the corresponding

I & Q registers reside.

The PN offset values are determined on a per BTS/per sector(antenna)

basis as determined by the appropriate cdf file content. A breakdown of

this information is found in Table B-1.

PN Offset Usage

Only the 14-chip delay is currently in use. It is important to determine

the RF chip delay to be able to test the BTS functionality. This can be

done by ascertaining if the CDF file FineTxAdj value was set to “on”

when the MCC was downloaded with “image data”. The FineTxAdj

value is used to compensate for the processing delay (approximately

20 mS) in the BTS using any type of mobile meeting IS-97

specifications.

If the FineTxAdj value in the cdf file is 213 (D5 HEX), FineTxAdj has

been set for the 14 chip table.

NOTE CDF file I and Q values can be represented in DECIMAL or

HEX. If using HEX, add 0x before the HEX value. If necessary,

convert HEX values in Table B-1 to decimal before comparing

them to cdf file I & Q value assignments.

PN Offset Programming Information68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

B-3

Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn

14-Chip Delay

Pilot I Q I Q

PN (Dec.) (Hex.)

0 17523 23459 4473 5BA3

1 32292 32589 7E24 7F4D

2 4700 17398 125C 43F6

3 14406 26333 3846 66DD

4 14899 4011 3A33 0FAB

5 17025 2256 4281 08D0

6 14745 18651 3999 48DB

7 2783 1094 0ADF 0446

8 5832 21202 16C8 52D2

9 12407 13841 3077 3611

10 31295 31767 7A3F 7C17

11 7581 18890 1D9D 49CA

12 18523 30999 485B 7917

13 29920 22420 74E0 5794

14 25184 20168 6260 4EC8

15 26282 12354 66AA 3042

16 30623 11187 779F 2BB3

17 15540 11834 3CB4 2E3A

18 23026 10395 59F2 289B

19 20019 28035 4E33 6D83

20 4050 27399 0FD2 6B07

21 1557 22087 0615 5647

22 30262 2077 7636 081D

23 18000 13758 4650 35BE

24 20056 11778 4E58 2E02

25 12143 3543 2F6F 0DD7

26 17437 7184 441D 1C10

27 17438 2362 441E 093A

28 5102 25840 13EE 64F0

29 9302 12177 2456 2F91

30 17154 10402 4302 28A2

31 5198 1917 144E 077D

32 4606 17708 11FE 452C

33 24804 10630 60E4 2986

34 17180 6812 431C 1A9C

35 10507 14350 290B 380E

36 10157 10999 27AD 2AF7

37 23850 25003 5D2A 61AB

38 31425 2652 7AC1 0A5C

39 4075 19898 0FEB 4DBA

40 10030 2010 272E 07DA

41 16984 25936 4258 6550

42 14225 28531 3791 6F73

43 26519 11952 6797 2EB0

44 27775 31947 6C7F 7CCB

45 30100 25589 7594 63F5

46 7922 11345 1EF2 2C51

47 14199 28198 3777 6E26

48 17637 13947 44E5 367B

49 23081 8462 5A29 210E

50 5099 9595 13EB 257B

. . . continued on next page

PN Offset Programming Information 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

B-4

Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn

14-Chip Delay

Pilot I Q I Q

PN (Dec.) (Hex.)

51 32743 4670 7FE7 123E

52 7114 14672 1BCA 3950

53 7699 29415 1E13 72E7

54 19339 20610 4B8B 5082

55 28212 6479 6E34 194F

56 29587 10957 7393 2ACD

57 19715 18426 4D03 47FA

58 14901 22726 3A35 58C6

59 20160 5247 4EC0 147F

60 22249 29953 56E9 7501

61 26582 5796 67D6 16A4

62 7153 16829 1BF1 41BD

63 15127 4528 3B17 11B0

64 15274 5415 3BAA 1527

65 23149 10294 5A6D 2836

66 16340 17046 3FD4 4296

67 27052 7846 69AC 1EA6

68 13519 10762 34CF 2A0A

69 10620 13814 297C 35F6

70 15978 16854 3E6A 41D6

71 27966 795 6D3E 031B

72 12479 9774 30BF 262E

73 1536 24291 0600 5EE3

74 3199 3172 0C7F 0C64

75 4549 2229 11C5 08B5

76 17888 21283 45E0 5323

77 13117 16905 333D 4209

78 7506 7062 1D52 1B96

79 27626 7532 6BEA 1D6C

80 31109 25575 7985 63E7

81 29755 14244 743B 37A4

82 26711 28053 6857 6D95

83 20397 30408 4FAD 76C8

84 18608 5094 48B0 13E6

85 7391 16222 1CDF 3F5E

86 23168 7159 5A80 1BF7

87 23466 174 5BAA 00AE

88 15932 25530 3E3C 63BA

89 25798 2320 64C6 0910

90 28134 23113 6DE6 5A49

91 28024 23985 6D78 5DB1

92 6335 2604 18BF 0A2C

93 21508 1826 5404 0722

94 26338 30853 66E2 7885

95 17186 15699 4322 3D53

96 22462 2589 57BE 0A1D

97 3908 25000 0F44 61A8

98 25390 18163 632E 46F3

99 27891 12555 6CF3 310B

100 9620 8670 2594 21DE

. . . continued on next page

PN Offset Programming Information68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

B-5

Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn

14-Chip Delay

Pilot I Q I Q

PN (Dec.) (Hex.)

101 6491 1290 195B 050A

102 16876 4407 41EC 1137

103 17034 1163 428A 048B

104 32405 12215 7E95 2FB7

105 27417 7253 6B19 1C55

106 8382 8978 20BE 2312

107 5624 25547 15F8 63CB

108 1424 3130 0590 0C3A

109 13034 31406 32EA 7AAE

110 15682 6222 3D42 184E

111 27101 20340 69DD 4F74

112 8521 25094 2149 6206

113 30232 23380 7618 5B54

114 6429 10926 191D 2AAE

115 27116 22821 69EC 5925

116 4238 31634 108E 7B92

117 5128 4403 1408 1133

118 14846 689 39FE 02B1

119 13024 27045 32E0 69A5

120 10625 27557 2981 6BA5

121 31724 16307 7BEC 3FB3

122 13811 22338 35F3 5742

123 24915 27550 6153 6B9E

124 1213 22096 04BD 5650

125 2290 23136 08F2 5A60

126 31551 12199 7B3F 2FA7

127 12088 1213 2F38 04BD

128 7722 936 1E2A 03A8

129 27312 6272 6AB0 1880

130 23130 32446 5A5A 7EBE

131 594 13555 0252 34F3

132 25804 8789 64CC 2255

133 31013 24821 7925 60F5

134 32585 21068 7F49 524C

135 3077 31891 0C05 7C93

136 17231 5321 434F 14C9

137 31554 551 7B42 0227

138 8764 12115 223C 2F53

139 15375 4902 3C0F 1326

140 13428 1991 3474 07C7

141 17658 14404 44FA 3844

142 13475 17982 34A3 463E

143 22095 19566 564F 4C6E

144 24805 2970 60E5 0B9A

145 4307 23055 10D3 5A0F

146 23292 15158 5AFC 3B36

147 1377 29094 0561 71A6

148 28654 653 6FEE 028D

149 6350 19155 18CE 4AD3

150 16770 23588 4182 5C24

. . . continued on next page

PN Offset Programming Information 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

B-6

Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn

14-Chip Delay

Pilot I Q I Q

PN (Dec.) (Hex.)

151 14726 10878 3986 2A7E

152 25685 31060 6455 7954

153 21356 30875 536C 789B

154 12149 11496 2F75 2CE8

155 28966 24545 7126 5FE1

156 22898 9586 5972 2572

157 1713 20984 06B1 51F8

158 30010 30389 753A 76B5

159 2365 7298 093D 1C82

160 27179 18934 6A2B 49F6

161 29740 23137 742C 5A61

162 5665 24597 1621 6015

163 23671 23301 5C77 5B05

164 1680 7764 0690 1E54

165 25861 14518 6505 38B6

166 25712 21634 6470 5482

167 19245 11546 4B2D 2D1A

168 26887 26454 6907 6756

169 30897 15938 78B1 3E42

170 11496 9050 2CE8 235A

171 1278 3103 04FE 0C1F

172 31555 758 7B43 02F6

173 29171 16528 71F3 4090

174 20472 20375 4FF8 4F97

175 5816 10208 16B8 27E0

176 30270 17698 763E 4522

177 22188 8405 56AC 20D5

178 6182 28634 1826 6FDA

179 32333 1951 7E4D 079F

180 14046 20344 36DE 4F78

181 15873 26696 3E01 6848

182 19843 3355 4D83 0D1B

183 29367 11975 72B7 2EC7

184 13352 31942 3428 7CC6

185 22977 9737 59C1 2609

186 31691 9638 7BCB 25A6

187 10637 30643 298D 77B3

188 25454 13230 636E 33AE

189 18610 22185 48B2 56A9

190 6368 2055 18E0 0807

191 7887 8767 1ECF 223F

192 7730 15852 1E32 3DEC

193 23476 16125 5BB4 3EFD

194 889 6074 0379 17BA

195 21141 31245 5295 7A0D

196 20520 15880 5028 3E08

197 21669 20371 54A5 4F93

198 15967 8666 3E5F 21DA

199 21639 816 5487 0330

200 31120 22309 7990 5725

. . . continued on next page

PN Offset Programming Information68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

B-7

Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn

14-Chip Delay

Pilot I Q I Q

PN (Dec.) (Hex.)

201 3698 29563 0E72 737B

202 16322 13078 3FC2 3316

203 17429 10460 4415 28DC

204 21730 17590 54E2 44B6

205 17808 20277 4590 4F35

206 30068 19988 7574 4E14

207 12737 6781 31C1 1A7D

208 28241 32501 6E51 7EF5

209 20371 6024 4F93 1788

210 13829 20520 3605 5028

211 13366 31951 3436 7CCF

212 25732 26063 6484 65CF

213 19864 27203 4D98 6A43

214 5187 6614 1443 19D6

215 23219 10970 5AB3 2ADA

216 28242 5511 6E52 1587

217 6243 17119 1863 42DF

218 445 16064 01BD 3EC0

219 21346 31614 5362 7B7E

220 13256 4660 33C8 1234

221 18472 13881 4828 3639

222 25945 16819 6559 41B3

223 31051 6371 794B 18E3

224 1093 24673 0445 6061

225 5829 6055 16C5 17A7

226 31546 10009 7B3A 2719

227 29833 5957 7489 1745

228 18146 11597 46E2 2D4D

229 24813 22155 60ED 568B

230 47 15050 002F 3ACA

231 3202 16450 0C82 4042

232 21571 27899 5443 6CFB

233 7469 2016 1D2D 07E0

234 25297 17153 62D1 4301

235 8175 15849 1FEF 3DE9

236 28519 30581 6F67 7775

237 4991 3600 137F 0E10

238 7907 4097 1EE3 1001

239 17728 671 4540 029F

240 14415 20774 384F 5126

241 30976 24471 7900 5F97

242 26376 27341 6708 6ACD

243 19063 19388 4A77 4BBC

244 19160 25278 4AD8 62BE

245 3800 9505 0ED8 2521

246 8307 26143 2073 661F

247 12918 13359 3276 342F

248 19642 2154 4CBA 086A

249 24873 13747 6129 35B3

250 22071 27646 5637 6BFE

. . . continued on next page

PN Offset Programming Information 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

B-8

Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn

14-Chip Delay

Pilot I Q I Q

PN (Dec.) (Hex.)

251 13904 1056 3650 0420

252 27198 1413 6A3E 0585

253 3685 3311 0E65 0CEF

254 16820 4951 41B4 1357

255 22479 749 57CF 02ED

256 6850 6307 1AC2 18A3

257 15434 961 3C4A 03C1

258 19332 2358 4B84 0936

259 8518 28350 2146 6EBE

260 14698 31198 396A 79DE

261 21476 11467 53E4 2CCB

262 30475 8862 770B 229E

263 23984 6327 5DB0 18B7

264 1912 7443 0778 1D13

265 26735 28574 686F 6F9E

266 15705 25093 3D59 6205

267 3881 6139 0F29 17FB

268 20434 22047 4FD2 561F

269 16779 32545 418B 7F21

270 31413 7112 7AB5 1BC8

271 16860 28535 41DC 6F77

272 8322 10378 2082 288A

273 28530 15065 6F72 3AD9

274 26934 5125 6936 1405

275 18806 12528 4976 30F0

276 20216 23215 4EF8 5AAF

277 9245 20959 241D 51DF

278 8271 3568 204F 0DF0

279 18684 26453 48FC 6755

280 8220 29421 201C 72ED

281 6837 24555 1AB5 5FEB

282 9613 10779 258D 2A1B

283 31632 25260 7B90 62AC

284 27448 16084 6B38 3ED4

285 12417 26028 3081 65AC

286 30901 29852 78B5 749C

287 9366 14978 2496 3A82

288 12225 12182 2FC1 2F96

289 21458 25143 53D2 6237

290 6466 15838 1942 3DDE

291 8999 5336 2327 14D8

292 26718 21885 685E 557D

293 3230 20561 0C9E 5051

294 27961 30097 6D39 7591

295 28465 21877 6F31 5575

296 6791 23589 1A87 5C25

297 17338 26060 43BA 65CC

298 11832 9964 2E38 26EC

299 11407 25959 2C8F 6567

300 15553 3294 3CC1 0CDE

. . . continued on next page

PN Offset Programming Information68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

B-9

Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn

14-Chip Delay

Pilot I Q I Q

PN (Dec.) (Hex.)

301 17418 30173 440A 75DD

302 14952 15515 3A68 3C9B

303 52 5371 0034 14FB

304 27254 10242 6A76 2802

305 15064 28052 3AD8 6D94

306 10942 14714 2ABE 397A

307 377 19550 0179 4C5E

308 14303 8866 37DF 22A2

309 24427 15297 5F6B 3BC1

310 26629 10898 6805 2A92

311 20011 31315 4E2B 7A53

312 16086 19475 3ED6 4C13

313 24374 1278 5F36 04FE

314 9969 11431 26F1 2CA7

315 29364 31392 72B4 7AA0

316 25560 4381 63D8 111D

317 28281 14898 6E79 3A32

318 7327 23959 1C9F 5D97

319 32449 16091 7EC1 3EDB

320 26334 9037 66DE 234D

321 14760 24162 39A8 5E62

322 15128 6383 3B18 18EF

323 29912 27183 74D8 6A2F

324 4244 16872 1094 41E8

325 8499 9072 2133 2370

326 9362 12966 2492 32A6

327 10175 28886 27BF 70D6

328 30957 25118 78ED 621E

329 12755 20424 31D3 4FC8

330 19350 6729 4B96 1A49

331 1153 20983 0481 51F7

332 29304 12372 7278 3054

333 6041 13948 1799 367C

334 21668 27547 54A4 6B9B

335 28048 8152 6D90 1FD8

336 10096 17354 2770 43CA

337 23388 17835 5B5C 45AB

338 15542 14378 3CB6 382A

339 24013 7453 5DCD 1D1D

340 2684 26317 0A7C 66CD

341 19018 5955 4A4A 1743

342 25501 10346 639D 286A

343 4489 13200 1189 3390

344 31011 30402 7923 76C2

345 29448 7311 7308 1C8F

346 25461 3082 6375 0C0A

347 11846 21398 2E46 5396

348 30331 31104 767B 7980

349 10588 24272 295C 5ED0

350 32154 27123 7D9A 69F3

. . . continued on next page

PN Offset Programming Information 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

B-10

Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn

14-Chip Delay

Pilot I Q I Q

PN (Dec.) (Hex.)

351 29572 5578 7384 15CA

352 13173 25731 3375 6483

353 10735 10662 29EF 29A6

354 224 11084 00E0 2B4C

355 12083 31098 2F33 797A

356 22822 16408 5926 4018

357 2934 6362 0B76 18DA

358 27692 2719 6C2C 0A9F

359 10205 14732 27DD 398C

360 7011 22744 1B63 58D8

361 22098 1476 5652 05C4

362 2640 8445 0A50 20FD

363 4408 21118 1138 527E

364 102 22198 0066 56B6

365 27632 22030 6BF0 560E

366 19646 10363 4CBE 287B

367 26967 25802 6957 64CA

368 32008 2496 7D08 09C0

369 7873 31288 1EC1 7A38

370 655 24248 028F 5EB8

371 25274 14327 62BA 37F7

372 16210 23154 3F52 5A72

373 11631 13394 2D6F 3452

374 8535 1806 2157 070E

375 19293 17179 4B5D 431B

376 12110 10856 2F4E 2A68

377 21538 25755 5422 649B

378 10579 15674 2953 3D3A

379 13032 7083 32E8 1BAB

380 14717 29096 397D 71A8

381 11666 3038 2D92 0BDE

382 25809 16277 64D1 3F95

383 5008 25525 1390 63B5

384 32418 20465 7EA2 4FF1

385 22175 28855 569F 70B7

386 11742 32732 2DDE 7FDC

387 22546 20373 5812 4F95

388 21413 9469 53A5 24FD

389 133 26155 0085 662B

390 4915 6957 1333 1B2D

391 8736 12214 2220 2FB6

392 1397 21479 0575 53E7

393 18024 31914 4668 7CAA

394 15532 32311 3CAC 7E37

395 26870 11276 68F6 2C0C

396 5904 20626 1710 5092

397 24341 423 5F15 01A7

398 13041 2679 32F1 0A77

399 23478 15537 5BB6 3CB1

400 1862 10818 0746 2A42

. . . continued on next page

PN Offset Programming Information68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

B-11

Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn

14-Chip Delay

Pilot I Q I Q

PN (Dec.) (Hex.)

401 5850 23074 16DA 5A22

402 5552 20250 15B0 4F1A

403 12589 14629 312D 3925

404 23008 29175 59E0 71F7

405 27636 13943 6BF4 3677

406 17600 11072 44C0 2B40

407 17000 29492 4268 7334

408 21913 5719 5599 1657

409 30320 7347 7670 1CB3

410 28240 12156 6E50 2F7C

411 7260 25623 1C5C 6417

412 17906 27725 45F2 6C4D

413 5882 28870 16FA 70C6

414 22080 31478 5640 7AF6

415 12183 28530 2F97 6F72

416 23082 24834 5A2A 6102

417 17435 9075 441B 2373

418 18527 32265 485F 7E09

419 31902 3175 7C9E 0C67

420 18783 17434 495F 441A

421 20027 12178 4E3B 2F92

422 7982 25613 1F2E 640D

423 20587 31692 506B 7BCC

424 10004 25384 2714 6328

425 13459 18908 3493 49DC

426 13383 25816 3447 64D8

427 28930 4661 7102 1235

428 4860 31115 12FC 798B

429 13108 7691 3334 1E0B

430 24161 1311 5E61 051F

431 20067 16471 4E63 4057

432 2667 15771 0A6B 3D9B

433 13372 16112 343C 3EF0

434 28743 21062 7047 5246

435 24489 29690 5FA9 73FA

436 249 10141 00F9 279D

437 19960 19014 4DF8 4A46

438 29682 22141 73F2 567D

439 31101 11852 797D 2E4C

440 27148 26404 6A0C 6724

441 26706 30663 6852 77C7

442 5148 32524 141C 7F0C

443 4216 28644 1078 6FE4

444 5762 10228 1682 27F4

445 245 23536 00F5 5BF0

446 21882 18045 557A 467D

447 3763 25441 0EB3 6361

448 206 27066 00CE 69BA

449 28798 13740 707E 35AC

450 32402 13815 7E92 35F7

. . . continued on next page

PN Offset Programming Information 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

B-12

Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn

14-Chip Delay

Pilot I Q I Q

PN (Dec.) (Hex.)

451 13463 3684 3497 0E64

452 15417 23715 3C39 5CA3

453 23101 15314 5A3D 3BD2

454 14957 32469 3A6D 7ED5

455 23429 9816 5B85 2658

456 12990 4444 32BE 115C

457 12421 5664 3085 1620

458 28875 7358 70CB 1CBE

459 4009 27264 0FA9 6A80

460 1872 28128 0750 6DE0

461 15203 30168 3B63 75D8

462 30109 29971 759D 7513

463 24001 3409 5DC1 0D51

464 4862 16910 12FE 420E

465 14091 20739 370B 5103

466 6702 10191 1A2E 27CF

467 3067 12819 0BFB 3213

468 28643 19295 6FE3 4B5F

469 21379 10072 5383 2758

470 20276 15191 4F34 3B57

471 25337 27748 62F9 6C64

472 19683 720 4CE3 02D0

473 10147 29799 27A3 7467

474 16791 27640 4197 6BF8

475 17359 263 43CF 0107

476 13248 24734 33C0 609E

477 22740 16615 58D4 40E7

478 13095 20378 3327 4F9A

479 10345 25116 2869 621C

480 30342 19669 7686 4CD5

481 27866 14656 6CDA 3940

482 9559 27151 2557 6A0F

483 8808 28728 2268 7038

484 12744 25092 31C8 6204

485 11618 22601 2D62 5849

486 27162 2471 6A1A 09A7

487 17899 25309 45EB 62DD

488 29745 15358 7431 3BFE

489 31892 17739 7C94 454B

490 23964 12643 5D9C 3163

491 23562 32730 5C0A 7FDA

492 2964 19122 0B94 4AB2

493 18208 16870 4720 41E6

494 15028 10787 3AB4 2A23

495 21901 18400 558D 47E0

496 24566 20295 5FF6 4F47

497 18994 1937 4A32 0791

498 13608 17963 3528 462B

499 27492 7438 6B64 1D0E

500 11706 12938 2DBA 328A

. . . continued on next page

PN Offset Programming Information68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

B-13

Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn

14-Chip Delay

Pilot I Q I Q

PN (Dec.) (Hex.)

501 14301 19272 37DD 4B48

502 23380 29989 5B54 7525

503 11338 8526 2C4A 214E

504 2995 18139 0BB3 46DB

505 23390 3247 5B5E 0CAF

506 14473 28919 3889 70F7

507 6530 7292 1982 1C7C

508 20452 20740 4FE4 5104

509 12226 27994 2FC2 6D5A

510 1058 2224 0422 08B0

511 12026 6827 2EFA 1AAB

PN Offset Programming Information 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

B-14

Notes

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

C-1

Appendix C

FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix

FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

C-2

FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix

Usage & Background

Periodic maintenance of a site may also may mandate re-optimization of

specific portions of the site. An outline of some basic guidelines is

included in the following tables.

NOTE Re-optimization steps listed for any assembly detailed in the

tables below must be performed anytime an RF cable associated

with it is replaced.

BTS Frame

Table C-1: When RF Optimization Is required on the BTS

Item Replaced Optimize:

C-CCP Shelf All sector TX and RX paths to all

Combined CDMA Channel Processor

(C-CCP) shelves.

Multicoupler/

Preselector Card The three or six affected sector RX paths for

the C-CCP shelf in the BTS frames.

BBX board RX and TX paths of the affected C-CCP

shelf / BBX board.

CIO Card All RX and TX paths of the affected

CDMA carrier.

Any LPA Module The affected sector TX path.

LPA Backplane The affected sector TX path.

LPA Filter The affected sector TX path.

Ancillary Frame

Item Replaced Optimize:

Directional Coupler All affected sector RX and TX paths to all

BTS frame shelves.

Site filter All affected RX sector paths in all shelves

in all BTS frames.

Any RFDS component

or TSU. The RFDS calibration RX & TX paths

(MONFWD/GENFWD).

FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

C-3

Inter-frame Cabling

Optimization must be performed after the replacement of any RF cabling

between BTS frames.

Table C-2: When to Optimize Inter-frame Cabling

Item Replaced Optimize:

Ancillary frame to BTS

frame (RX) cables The affected sector/antenna RX

paths.

BTS frame to ancillary frame

(TX) cables The affected sector/antenna TX paths.

Detailed Optimization/ATP Test Matrix

Table C-3 outlines in more detail the tests that would need to be

performed if one of the BTS components were to fail and be replaced. It

is also assumes that all modules are placed OOS-ROM via the LMF

until full redundancy of all applicable modules is implemented.

The following guidelines should also be noted when using this table.

NOTE Not every procedure required to bring the site back on line is

indicated in Table C-3. It is meant to be used as a guideline

ONLY. The table assumes that the user is familiar enough with

the BTS Optimization/ATP procedure to understand which test

equipment set ups, calibrations, and BTS site preparation will be

required before performing the Table # procedures referenced.

Various passive BTS components (such as the TX and RX directional

couplers, Preselector IO, CIO; etc.) only call for a TX or RX calibration

audit to be performed in lieu of a full path calibration. If the RX or TX

path calibration audit fails, the entire RF path calibration will need to be

repeated. If the RF path calibration fails, further troubleshooting is

warranted.

Whenever any C-CCP BACKPLANE is replaced, it is assumed that

only power to the C-CCP shelf being replaced is turned off via the

breaker supplying that shelf.

Whenever any DISTRIBUTION BACKPLANE is replaced it is assumed

that the power to the entire RFM frame is removed and the Preselector

I/O is replaced. The modem frame should be brought up as if it were a

new installation.

NOTE If any significant change in signal level results from any

component being replaced in the RX or TX signal flow paths, it

would be identified by re-running the RX and TX calibration

audit command.

When the CIO is replaced, the C-CCP shelf remains powered up. The

BBX boards may need to be removed, then re-installed into their

original slots, and re-downloaded (code and BLO data). RX and TX

calibration audits should then be performed.

FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

C-4

Table C-3: SC 4812T BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix

Doc

Tbl

#page

Description

Directional Coupler (RX)

Directional Coupler (TX)

RX Filter

RX Cables

TX Cables

MPC/EMPC

CIO

C-CCP Backplane

BBX

MCC

CSM

LFR/HSO

GPS

GLI

LPA Trunking Backplane

LPA

LPA Bandpass Filter

Power Supply Modules**

Switch Card

RFDS

Table 2-1 2-3 Initial Boards/Modules Install,

Preliminary Operations, CDF

Site Equipage; etc.

DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD

Table 2-2

Table 2-5 2-6

2-14 DC Power Pre-Test Physical

Inspect D D

Table 2-7 2-15 Initial Power-up D D D D D

Table 3-6 3-14 Ping the Processors D D D D D D

Table 3-12 3-26 Download/Enable MGLIs D D D

Table 3-12 3-26 Download/Enable GLIs D D D

Table 3-13 3-27 Download CSMs D D D D

Table 3-13 3-27 Download MCCs D D D D

Table 3-13 3-27 Download BBXs D D D

Table 3-15 3-29 Enable CSMs D D

Table 3-16 3-30 Enable MCCs D D

Table 3-19 3-36 GPS Initialization / Verification D D D

Table 3-20 3-40 LFR Initialization / Verification D D

Table 3-21 3-42 HSO Initialization/Verification D D

Table 3-36 3-74 TX Path Calibration 4 4 4 114*3347

Table 3-37 3-76 Download Offsets to BBX 4 4 1 4 *

Table 3-38 3-77 TX Path Calibration Audit 44 4 1 1 4 * 3 3 4 7

Table 3-46 3-88 RFDS Calibration Procedure 6 6 545116*3346

Table 4-1 4-5 Spectral Purity TX Mask ATP 4 4 14**** *

Table 4-1 4-5 Waveform Quality (rho) ATP 4 4 *14* *****

Table 4-1 4-5 Pilot Time Offset ATP 4 4 *14* *****

Table 4-1 4-5 Code Domain Power / Noise

Floor 4 4 148888****

Table 4-1 4-5 FER Test 55 5 52258888* 7

FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

C-5

Table C-3: SC 4812T BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix

Doc

Tbl

RFDS

Switch Card

Power Supply Modules**

LPA Bandpass Filter

LPA

LPA Trunking Backplane

GLI

GPS

LFR/HSO

CSM

MCC

BBX

C-CCP Backplane

CIO

MPC/EMPC

TX Cables

RX Cables

RX Filter

Directional Coupler (TX)

Directional Coupler (RX)

Description

page

OPTIMIZATION AND TEST LEGEND

DRequired

*Perform if necessary for additional fault isolation, repair assurance, or site certification.

** Replace power converters one card at a time so that power to the C-CCP or LPA shelf is not lost. If

power to the C-CCP shelf is lost, all cards in the shelf must be downloaded again.

1Perform on all carrier and sector TX paths to the C-CCP cage.

2Perform on all carrier and sector RX paths to the C-CCP cage.

3Perform on all primary and redundant TX paths of the affected carrier.

4Perform on the affected carrier and sector TX paths. (BBXR replacement affects all carrier and

sector TX paths.)

5Perform on the affected carrier and sector RX paths. (BBXR replacement affects all carrier and

sector RX paths.)

6Perform on all RF paths of the affected carrier and sector (RFDS replacement affects all carriers.)

7Perform with redundant BBX for all sectors on all carriers.

8Verify performance by performing on one sector of one carrier only.

FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

C-6

Notes

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

D-1

Appendix D

BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output

BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

D-2

BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations

Usage & Background

Table D-1 outlines the relationship between the total of all code domain

channel element gain settings (digital root sum of the squares) and the

BBX Gain Set Point between 33.0 dBm and 44.0 dBm. The resultant RF

output (as measured at the top of the BTS in dBm) is shown in the table.

The table assumes that the BBX Bay Level Offset (BLO) values have

been calculated.

As an illustration, consider a BBX keyed up to produce a CDMA carrier

with only the Pilot channel (no MCCs forward link enabled). Pilot gain

is set to 262. In this case, the BBX Gain Set Point is shown to correlate

exactly to the actual RF output anywhere in the 33 to 44 dBm output

range. (This is the level used to calibrate the BTS).

Table D-1: BBX Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm)

dBm'

Gainb

44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

541 - - - - - - - 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3

533 - - - - - - - 43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2

525 - - - - - - 44 43 42 41 40 39

517 - - - - - - 43.9 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9

509 - - - - - - 43.8 42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8

501 - - - - - - 43.6 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6

493 - - - - - - 43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5

485 - - - - - - 43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4

477 - - - - - - 43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2

469 - - - - - - 43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1

461 - - - - - 43.9 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9

453 - - - - - 43.8 42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8 37.8

445 - - - - - 43.6 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6 37.6

437 - - - - - 43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4 37.4

429 - - - - - 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3

421 - - - - - 43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1 37.1

413 - - - - 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37

405 - - - - 43.8 42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8 37.8 36.8

397 - - - - 43.6 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6 37.6 36.6

389 - - - - 43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4 37.4 36.4

. . . continued on next page

BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

D-3

Table D-1: BBX Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm)

dBm'

Gainb

333435363738394041424344

381 - - - - 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3 36.3

374 - - - - 43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1 37.1 36.1

366 - - - 43.9 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9 36.9 35.9

358 - - - 43.7 42.7 41.7 40.7 39.7 38.7 37.7 36.7 35.7

350 - - - 43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5 37.5 36.5 35.5

342 - - - 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3 36.3 35.3

334 - - - 43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1 37.1 36.1 35.1

326 - - 43.9 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9 36.9 35.9 34.9

318 - - 43.7 42.7 41.7 40.7 39.7 38.7 37.7 36.7 35.7 34.7

310 - - 43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5 37.5 36.5 35.5 34.5

302 - - 43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2 37.2 36.2 35.2 34.2

294 - 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34

286 - 43.8 42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8 37.8 36.8 35.8 34.8 33.8

278 - 43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5 37.5 36.5 35.5 34.5 33.5

270 - 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3 36.3 35.3 34.3 33.3

262 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

254 43.7 42.7 41.7 40.7 39.7 38.7 37.7 36.7 35.7 34.7 33.7 -

246 43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4 37.4 36.4 35.4 34.4 33.4 -

238 43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2 37.2 36.2 35.2 34.2 33.2 -

230 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9 36.9 35.9 34.9 33.9 - -

222 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6 37.6 36.6 35.6 34.6 33.6 - -

214 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2 37.2 36.2 35.2 34.2 33.2 - -

BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

D-4

Notes

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

E-1

Appendix E

CDMA Operating Frequency E

Operating Frequency - North American PCS Bands 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

E-2

Operating Frequency - North American PCS Bands

Introduction

Programming of each of the BTS BBX synthesizers is performed by the

BTS GLIs via the CHI bus. This programming data determines the

transmit and receive transceiver operating frequencies (channels) for

each BBX.

1900 MHz PCS Channels

Figure E-1 shows the valid channels for the North American PCS

1900 MHz frequency spectrum. There are 10 CDMA wireline or

non-wireline band channels used in a CDMA system (unique per

customer operating system).

Figure E-1: North American PCS 1900 MHz Frequency Spectrum

FREQ (MHz)

RX TX

275

1175

CHANNEL

1863.75

925

1851.2525

1871.25425

675 1883.75

1896.25

1908.75

1943.75

1931.25

1951.25

1963.75

1976.25

1988.75

. . . continued on next page

Operating Frequency - North American PCS Bands68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

E-3

Calculating 1900 MHz Center Frequencies

Table E-1 shows selected 1900 MHz CDMA candidate operating

channels, listed in both decimal and hexadecimal, and the corresponding

transmit, and receive frequencies. Center frequencies (in MHz) for

channels not shown in the table may be calculated as follows:

STX = 1930 + 0.05 * Channel#

Example: Channel 262

TX = 1930 + 0.05*262 = 1943.10 MHz

SRX = TX - 80

Example: Channel 262

RX = 1943.10 - 80 = 1863.10 MHz

Actual frequencies used depend on customer CDMA system frequency

plan.

Each CDMA channel requires a 1.77 MHz frequency segment. The

actual CDMA carrier is 1.23 MHz wide, with a 0.27 MHz guard band on

both sides of the carrier.

Minimum frequency separation required between any CDMA carrier and

the nearest NAMPS/AMPS carrier is 900 kHz (center-to-center).

Table E-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel

Channel Number

Decimal Hex Transmit Frequency (MHz)

Center Frequency Receive Frequency (MHz)

Center Frequency

25 0019 1931.25 1851.25

50 0032 1932.50 1852.50

75 004B 1933.75 1853.75

100 0064 1935.00 1855.00

125 007D 1936.25 1856.25

150 0096 1937.50 1857.50

175 00AF 1938.75 1858.75

200 00C8 1940.00 1860.00

225 00E1 1941.25 1861.25

250 00FA 1942.50 1862.50

275 0113 1943.75 1863.75

300 012C 1945.00 1865.00

325 0145 1946.25 1866.25

350 015E 1947.50 1867.50

375 0177 1948.75 1868.75

400 0190 1950.00 1870.00

425 01A9 1951.25 1871.25

450 01C2 1952.50 1872.50

475 01DB 1953.75 1873.75

500 01F4 1955.00 1875.00

525 020D 1956.25 1876.25

550 0226 1957.50 1877.50

575 023F 1958.75 1878.75

. . . continued on next page

Operating Frequency - North American PCS Bands 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

E-4

Table E-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel

Channel Number

Decimal Hex Receive Frequency (MHz)

Center Frequency

Transmit Frequency (MHz)

Center Frequency

600 0258 1960.00 1880.00

625 0271 1961.25 1881.25

650 028A 1962.50 1882.50

675 02A3 1963.75 1883.75

700 02BC 1965.00 1885.00

725 02D5 1966.25 1886.25

750 02EE 1967.50 1887.50

775 0307 1968.75 1888.75

800 0320 1970.00 1890.00

825 0339 1971.25 1891.25

850 0352 1972.50 1892.50

875 036B 1973.75 1893.75

900 0384 1975.00 1895.00

925 039D 1976.25 1896.25

950 03B6 1977.50 1897.50

975 03CF 1978.75 1898.75

1000 03E8 1980.00 1900.00

1025 0401 1981.25 1901.25

1050 041A 1982.50 1902.50

1075 0433 1983.75 1903.75

1100 044C 1985.00 1905.00

1125 0465 1986.25 1906.25

1150 047E 1987.50 1807.50

1175 0497 1988.75 1908.75

Operating Frequency - North American PCS Bands68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

E-5

800 MHz CDMA Channels

Figure E-2 shows the valid channels for the North American cellular

telephone frequency spectrum. There are 10 CDMA wireline or

non-wireline band channels used in a CDMA system (unique per

customer operating system).

Figure E-2: North American Cellular Telephone System Frequency Spectrum

RX FREQ

(MHz)

991

1023

333

334

666

667

716

717

799

CHANNEL

OVERALL NON-WIRELINE (A) BANDS

OVERALL WIRELINE (B) BANDS

824.040

825.000

825.030

834.990

835.020

844.980

845.010

846.480

846.510

848.970

869.040

870.000

870.030

879.990

880.020

889.980

890.010

891.480

891.510

893.970

TX FREQ

(MHz)

1013

694

689

311

356

644

739

777

CDMA NON-WIRELINE (A) BAND

CDMA WIRELINE (B) BAND

FW00402

Calculating 800 MHz Center Frequencies

Table E-2 shows selected 800 MHz CDMA candidate operating

channels, listed in both decimal and hexadecimal, and the corresponding

transmit, and receive frequencies. Center frequencies (in MHz) for

channels not shown in the table may be calculated as follows:

SChannels 1-777

TX = 870 + 0.03 * Channel#

Example: Channel 262

TX = 870 + 0.03*262 = 877.86 MHz

SChannels 1013-1023

TX = 870 + 0.03 * (Channel# - 1023)

Example: Channel 1015

TX = 870 +0.03 *(1015 - 1023) = 869.76 MHz

SRX = TX - 45 MHz

Example: Channel 262

RX = 877.86 -45 = 832.86 MHz

Table E-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel

Channel Number

Decimal Hex Transmit Frequency (MHz)

Center Frequency Receive Frequency (MHz)

Center Frequency

1 0001 870.0300 825.0300

25 0019 870.7500 825.7500

50 0032 871.5000 826.5000

. . . continued on next page

Operating Frequency - North American PCS Bands 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

E-6

Table E-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel

Channel Number

Decimal Hex Receive Frequency (MHz)

Center Frequency

Transmit Frequency (MHz)

Center Frequency

75 004B 872.2500 827.2500

100 0064 873.0000 828.0000

125 007D 873.7500 828.7500

150 0096 874.5000 829.5000

175 00AF 875.2500 830.2500

200 00C8 876.0000 831.0000

225 00E1 876.7500 831.7500

250 00FA 877.5000 832.5000

275 0113 878.2500 833.2500

300 012C 879.0000 834.0000

325 0145 879.7500 834.7500

350 015E 880.5000 835.5000

375 0177 881.2500 836.2500

400 0190 882.0000 837.0000

425 01A9 882.7500 837.7500

450 01C2 883.5000 838.5000

475 01DB 884.2500 839.2500

500 01F4 885.0000 840.0000

525 020D 885.7500 840.7500

550 0226 886.5000 841.5000

575 023F 887.2500 842.2500

600 0258 888.0000 843.0000

625 0271 888.7500 843.7500

650 028A 889.5000 844.5000

675 02A3 890.2500 845.2500

700 02BC 891.0000 846.0000

725 02D5 891.7500 846.7500

750 02EE 892.5000 847.5000

775 0307 893.2500 848.2500

NOTE

Channel numbers 778 through 1012 are not used.

1013 03F5 869.7000 824.7000

1023 03FF 870.0000 825.0000

Operating Frequency - Korean Bands68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

E-7

Operating Frequency - Korean Bands

1700 MHz PCS Channels

Figure E-3 shows the valid channels for the 1700 MHz PCS frequency

spectrum. The CDMA channels are spaced in increments of 25 (25, 50,

75, . . . 575) across the CDMA band.

Figure E-3: 1700 MHz PCS Frequency Spectrum

FREQ (MHz)

RX TX

575

CHANNEL 1751.2525

1778.75

1841.25

1868.75

Operating Frequency - Korean Bands 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

E-8

Calculating 1700 MHz Center Frequencies

Center frequency for channels may be calculated as follows:

Direction Formula Example

TX 1840 + (0.05 * Channel#) Channel: 1840 + (0.05 + 25) = 1841.25

RX 1750 + (0.05 * Channel#) Channel: 1750 + (0.05 + 25) = 1751.25

- Actual frequencies used depend on customer CDMA system

frequency plan.

- Each CDMA channel requires a 1.77 MHz frequency segment. The

actual CDMA carrier is 1.23 MHz wide, with a 0.27 MHz guard

band on both sides of the carrier

- Minimum frequency separation required between any CDMA

carrier and the nearest NAMPS/AMPS carrier is 900 kHz (center to

center).

Table E-3: 1700 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel (Korean Bands)

Channel Number

Decimal Hex Transmit Frequency (MHz)

Center Frequency Receive Frequency (MHz)

Center Frequency

25 0019 1841.25 1751.25

50 0032 1842.50 1752.50

75 004B 1843.75 1753.75

100 0064 1845.00 1755.00

125 007D 1846.25 1756.25

150 0096 1847.50 1757.50

175 00AF 1848.75 1758.75

200 00C8 1850.00 1760.00

225 00E1 1851.25 1761.25

250 00FA 1852.50 1762.50

275 0113 1853.75 1763.75

300 012C 1855.00 1765.00

325 0145 1856.25 1766.25

350 015E 1857.50 1767.50

375 0177 1858.75 1768.75

400 0190 1860.00 1770.00

425 01A9 1861.25 1771.25

450 01C2 1862.50 1772.50

475 01DB 1863.75 1773.75

500 01F4 1865.00 1775.00

525 020D 1866.25 1776.25

550 0226 1867.50 1777.50

575 023F 1868.75 1778.75

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

F-1

Appendix F

PCS Interface Setup for Manual

Testing F

Test Equipment Set-up 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

F-2

Test Equipment Set-up

Purpose

This section covers other test equipment and peripherals not covered in

Chapter 3. Procedures for the manual testing are covered here, along

with procedures to calibrate the TX and RX cables using the signal

generator and spectrum analyzer.

Equipment Warm up

NOTE Warm-up BTS equipment for a minimum of 60 minutes prior to

performing the BTS optimization procedure. This assures BTS

site stability and contributes to optimization accuracy. (Time

spent running initial power-up, hardware/

firmware audit, and BTS download counts as warm-up time.)

CAUTION If any piece of test equipment (i.e., test cable, RF adapter) has

been replaced, re-calibration must be performed. Failure to do so

could introduce measurement errors, resulting in incorrect

measurements and degradation to system performance.

NOTE Calibration of the communications test set (or equivalent test

equipment) must be performed at the site before calibrating the

overall test set. Calibrate the test equipment after it has been

allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.

Prerequisites

Prior to performing any of these procedures, all preparations for

preparing the LMF, updating LMF files, and any other pre-calibration

procedures, as stated in Chapter 3, must have been completed.

Test Equipment Set-up68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

F-3

HP8921A System Connectivity Test

Follow the steps in Table F-1 to verify that the connections between the

PCS Interface and the HP8921A are correct, and cables are intact. The

software also performs basic functionality checks of each instrument.

NOTE Disconnect other GPIB devices, especially system controllers,

from the system before running the connectivity software.

Table F-1: System Connectivity

Step Action

NOTE

- Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a

minimum of 60 minutes.

1Insert HP 83236A Manual Control/System card into memory card slot.

2Press the [PRESET] pushbutton.

3Press the Screen Control [TESTS] pushbutton to display the “Tests” Main Menu screen.

4Position the cursor at Select Procedure Location and select by pressing the cursor control knob.

In the Choices selection box, select Card.

5Position the cursor at Select Procedure Filename and select by pressing the cursor control knob.

In the Choices selection box, select SYS_CONN.

6Position the cursor at RUN TEST and select it.

The software will prompt you through the connectivity setup.

7When the test is complete, position the cursor on STOP TEST and select it; OR press the [K5]

pushbutton.

8To return to the main menu, press the [K5] pushbutton. F

Test Equipment Set-up 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

F-4

Manual Cable Calibration using HP8921 with HP PCS Interface (HP83236)

Perform the procedure in Table F-2 to calibrate the test equipment using

the HP8921 Cellular Communications Analyzer equipped with the

HP83236 PCS Interface.

NOTE This calibration method must be executed with great care. Some

losses are measured close to the minimum limit of the power

meter sensor (-30 dBm).

Prerequisites

Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:

STest equipment to be calibrated has been connected correctly for cable

calibration.

STest equipment has been selected and calibrated.

Refer to Figure F-1 for location of the components on the PCS Interface

and Communications Test Set.

Table F-2: Manual Cable Calibration Test Equipment Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)

Step Action

NOTE

Verify that GPIB controller is turned off.

1Insert HP 83236A Manual Control System card into memory card slot (see Figure F-1).

2Press the Preset pushbutton.

3 Under Screen Controls, press the TESTS pushbutton to display the TESTS (Main Menu) screen.

4Position the cursor at Select Procedure Location and select it. In the Choices selection box, select

CARD.

5Position the cursor at Select Procedure Filename and select it. In the Choices selection box, select

MANUAL.

6Position the cursor at RUN TEST and select it. HP must be in Control Mode Select YES.

7If using HP 83236A:

Set channel number=<chan#>:

- Position cursor at Channel

Number and select it.

- Enter the chan# using the numeric

keypad; press [Enter] and the

screen will go blank.

- When the screen reappears, the

chan# will be displayed on the

channel number line.

If using HP 83236B:

Set channel frequency:

- Position cursor at Frequency Band and press Enter.

- Select User Defined Frequency.

- Go Back to Previous Menu.

- Position the cursor to 83236 generator frequency and

enter actual RX frequency.

- Position the cursor to 83236 analyzer frequency and

enter actual TX frequency.

8Set RF Generator level:

- Position the cursor at RF Generator Level and select it.

- Enter -10 using the numeric keypad; press [Enter] and the screen will go blank.

- When the screen reappears, the value -10 dBm will be displayed on the RF Generator Level line.

. . . continued on next page

Test Equipment Set-up68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

F-5

Table F-2: Manual Cable Calibration Test Equipment Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)

Step Action

9Set the user fixed Attenuation Setting to 0 dBm:

- Position cursor at Analyzer Attenuation and select it

- Position cursor at User Fixed Atten Settings and select it.

- Enter 0 (zero) using the numeric keypad and press [Enter].

10 Select Back to Previous Menu.

11 Record the HP83236 Generator Frequency Level:

Record the HP83236B Generator Frequency Level:

- Position cursor at Show Frequency and Level Details and select it.

- Under HP83236 Frequencies and Levels, record the Generator Level.

- Under HP83236B Frequencies and Levels, record the Generator Frequency Level

(1850 - 1910 MHz for 1.9 GHz or 1750 - 1780 for 1.7 GHz).

- Position cursor at Prev Menu and select it.

12 Click on Pause for Manual Measurement.

13 Connect the power sensor directly to the RF OUT ONLY port of the PCS Interface.

14 On the HP8921A, under To Screen, select CDMA GEN.

15 Move the cursor to the Amplitude field and click on the Amplitude value.

16 Increase the Amplitude value until the power meter reads 0 dBm ±0.2 dB.

NOTE

The Amplitude value can be increased coarsely until 0 dBM is reached; then fine tune the amplitude

by adjusting the Increment Set to 0.1 dBm and targeting in on 0 dBm.

17 Disconnect the power sensor from the RF OUT ONLY port of the PCS Interface.

NOTE

The Power Meter sensor’s lower limit is -30 dBm. Thus, only components having losses ≤30 dB

should be measured using this method. For further accuracy, always re-zero the power meter

before connecting the power sensor to the component being calibrated. After connecting the

power sensor to the component, record the calibrated loss immediately.

18 Disconnect all components in the test setup and calibrate each one separately by connecting each

component, one-at-a-time, between the RF OUT ONLY PORT and the power sensor (see Figure F-1,

Setups A, B, or C). Record the calibrated loss value displayed on the power meter.

SExample: (A) Test Cable(s) = -1.4 dB

(B) 20 dB Attenuator = -20.1 dB

(B) Directional Coupler = -29.8 dB

19 After all components are calibrated, reassemble all components together and calculate the total test

setup loss by adding up all the individual losses:

SExample: Total test setup loss = -1.4 -29.8 -20.1 = -51.3 dB.

This calculated value will be used in the next series of tests.

20 Under Screen Controls press the TESTS button to display the TESTS (Main Menu) screen.

21 Select Continue (K2).

22 Select RF Generator Level and set to -119 dBm.

. . . continued on next page

Test Equipment Set-up 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

F-6

Table F-2: Manual Cable Calibration Test Equipment Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)

Step Action

23 Click on Pause for Manual Measurement.

24 Verify the HP8921A Communication Analyzer/83203A CDMA interface setup is as follows (fields

not indicated remain at default):

SVerify the GPIB (HP-IB) address:

- under To Screen, select More

- select IO CONFIG

- Set HP-IB Adrs to 18

- set Mode to Talk&Lstn

SVerify the HP8921A is displaying frequency (instead of RF channel)

- Press the blue [SHIFT] button, then press the Screen Control [DUPLEX] button; this switches to

the CONFIG (CONFIGURE) screen.

- Use the cursor control to set RF Display to Freq

25 Refer to Table 3-31 for assistance in manually setting the cable loss values into the LMF.

Test Equipment Set-up68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

F-7

Figure F-1: Calibrating Test Setup Components

(A)

(C)

POWER

SENSOR

(A)

POWER

SENSOR

(C)

30 dB

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

150 W

NON-RADIATING

RF LOAD

POWER

SENSOR

(B)

POWER

SENSOR

(B)

MEMORY

CARD

SLOT

20 dB / 20 WATT

ATTENUATOR

FW00292

Test Equipment Set-up 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

F-8

HP PCS Interface Test Equipment Setup for Manual Testing

Follow the procedure in Table F-3 to setup the HP PCS Interface Box for

manual testing.

Table F-3: HP PCS Interface Test Equipment Setup for Manual Testing

nStep Action

NOTE

Verify GPIB controller is turned off.

1Insert HP83236B Manual Control/System card into the memory card slot.

2 Under Screen Controls, press the [TESTS] push-button to display the TESTS (Main Menu)

screen.

3Position the cursor at Select Procedure Location and select. In the Choices selection box, select

CARD.

4Position the cursor at Select Procedure Filename and select. In the Choices selection box, select

MANUAL.

5Position the cursor at RUN TEST and select OR press the K1 push-button.

6Set channel number=<chan#>:

- Position cursor at Channel Number and select.

- Enter the chan# using the numeric keypad and then press [Enter] (the screen will blank).

- When the screen reappears, the chan# will be displayed on the channel number line.

NOTE

If using a TMPC with Tower Top Amplifier (TTA) skip Step 7.

7SSet RF Generator level= -119 dBm + Cal factor

Example: -119 dBm + 2 dB = -117 dBm

SContinue with Step 9 (skip Step 8).

8Set RF Generator level= -116 dBm + Cal factor.

Example: -116 dBm + 2 dB = -114 dBm

9Set the user fixed Attenuation Setting to 0 dB:

- Position cursor at RF Generator Level and select.

- Position cursor at User Fixed Atten Settings and select.

- Enter 0 (zero) using the numeric keypad and press [Enter].

10 Select Back to Previous Menu.

11 Select Quit, then select Yes.

Test Equipment Set-up68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

F-9

Calibrating Test Cable Setup using Advantest R3465

NOTE Be sure the GPIB Interface is OFF for this procedure.

Perform the procedure in Table F-4 to calibrate the test cable setup using

the Advantest R3465. Advantest R3465 Manual Test setup and

calibration must be performed at both the TX and RX frequencies.

Table F-4: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465

Step Action

NOTE

- This procedure can only be performed after test equipment has been allowed to warm-up and

stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.

1Press the SHIFT and the PRESET keys located below the display.

2Press the ADVANCE key in the MEASUREMENT area of the control panel.

3Select the CDMA Sig CRT menu key.

4Select the Setup CRT menu key.

5Using the vernier knob and the cursor keys set the following parameters:

NOTE

Fields not listed remain at default.

Generator Mode: SIGNAL

Link: FORWARD

Level Unit: dBm

CalCorrection: ON

Level Offset: OFF

6Select the return CRT menu key.

7 Press FREQ key in the ENTRY area.

8Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad entry keys.

9Verify that the Mod CRT menu key is highlighting OFF; if not, press the Mod key to toggle it OFF.

10 Verify that the Output CRT menu key is highlighting OFF; if not, press the Output key to toggle it

OFF.

11 Press the LEVEL key in the ENTRY area.

12 Set the LEVEL to 0 dBm using the key pad entry keys.

13 Zero power meter. Next connect the power sensor directly to the “RF OUT” port on the R3561L

CDMA Test Source Unit.

14 Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle Output to ON.

15 Record the power meter reading ________________________

16 Disconnect the power meter sensor from the R3561L RF OUT jack.

. . . continued on next page

Test Equipment Set-up 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

F-10

Table F-4: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465

Step Action

NOTE

The Power Meter sensor lower limit is -30 dBm. Thus, only components having losses < 30 dB

should be measured using this method. For best accuracy, always re-zero the power meter before

connecting the power sensor to the component being calibrated. Then, after connecting the

power sensor to the component, record the calibrated loss immediately.

17 Disconnect all components in the the test setup and calibrate each one separately. Connect each

component one-at-a-time between the “RF OUT” port and the power sensor (see Figure F-2, “Setups

A, B, and C”). Record the calibrated loss value displayed on the power meter for each connection.

Example: (A) 1st Test Cable = -0.5 dB

(B) 2nd Test Cable = -1.4 dB

(D) 30 dB Directional Coupler = -29.8 dB

18 Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle Output OFF.

19 Calculate the total test setup loss by adding up all the individual losses:

Example: Total test setup loss = 0.5 + 1.4 + 20.1 + 29.8 = 51.8 dB

This calculated value will be used in the next series of tests.

20 Press the FREQ key in the ENTRY area.

21 Using the keypad entry keys, set the test frequency to the RX frequency.

22 Repeat steps 9 through 19 for the RX frequency.

23 Refer to Table 3-31 for assistance in manually setting the cable loss values into the LMF.

Test Equipment Set-up68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

F-11

Figure F-2: Cable Calibration using Advantest R3465

POWER

SENSOR

20 DB / 2 WATT

ATTENUATOR

(A)

(C)

POWER

SENSOR

(D)

30 DB

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

(C)

100 W

NON-RADIATING

RF LOAD

POWER

SENSOR

RF OUT

POWER

SENSOR

& (B)

FW00320

Test Equipment Set-up 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

F-12

Notes

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

G-1

Appendix G

VSWR

Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

G-2

Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR

Purpose

The following procedures will verify that the Voltage Standing Wave

Ratio (VSWR) of all antennas and associated feed lines fall within

acceptable limits. The tests will be performed on all antennas in a

sequential manner (i.e., ANT 1, then ANT 2) until all antennas/feedlines

have been verified.

These procedures should be performed periodically by measuring each

respective antenna’s VSWR (reflected power) to verify that the antenna

system is within acceptable limits. This will ensure continued peak

system performance.

The antenna VSWR will be calculated at the CDMA carrier frequency

assigned to each antenna. Record and verify that they meet the test

specification of less than or equal to 1.5:1.

NOTE Motorola recommends that the installer be familiar with the

following procedure in its entirety before beginning the actual

procedure. Ensure that the entire site is currently not in service.

This test is used to test RX antennas by substituting RX

frequencies for TX frequencies.

Study the site engineering documents and perform the following tests

only after first verifying that the RF cabling configuration required to

interconnect the BTS frames and antennas meet requirements called out

in the BTS Installation Manual.

Test equipment

The following pieces of test equipment will be required to perform this

test:

SLMF

SDirectional coupler

SCommunications test set

WARNING Prior to performing antenna tests, insure that no CDMA BBX

channels are keyed. Failure to do so could result in personal

injury or serious equipment damage.

Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

G-3

Equipment Setup - HP Test Set

Follow the procedure in Table G-1 to set up test equipment required to

measure and calculate the VSWR for each antenna.

Table G-1: VSWR Measurement Procedure - HP Test Set

Step Action HP TEST SET

1If you have not already done so, refer to the procedure in Table 3-2 on page 3-6 to set up test

equipment & interface the LMF computer to the BTS.

2For manual VSWR testing, using external directional coupler, refer to Figure G-1 (1700/1900 MHz)

or Figure G-2 (800 MHz).

- Connect the communications test set RF OUT ONLY port to the INPUT port of the directional

coupler.

- Connect the RF IN/OUT port of the communication test set to the reverse (RVS) port on the

directional coupler. Terminate the forward port with a 50 ohm load.

- Install the antenna feed line to the output port on the directional coupler.

NOTE

Manual Communications Analyzer test setup (fields not indicated remain at default):

SSet screen to RF GEN.

- For 1900 MHz systems, set the RF Gen Freq to center frequency of actual CDMA carrier

between 1930-1990 MHz for TX and 1850-1910 MHz for RX. For 800 MHz systems, set the

RF Gen Freq to center frequency of actual CDMA carrier between 869-894 MHz for TX and

824-849 MHz for RX. For 1700 MHz systems, set the RF Gen Freq to center frequency of

actual CDMA carrier between 1840-1870 MHz for TX and 1750-1780 MHz for RX.

- Set Amplitude to -30 dBm.

- Set Output Port to RF OUT.

- Set AFGen1 & AFGen2 to OFF.

3Remove the antenna feed line and install an “RF short” onto the directional coupler output port.

NOTE

Set-up communication test set as follows (fields not indicated remain at default):

SSet screen to SPEC ANL.

- Under Controls, set input port to ANT.

-Set Ref Level to -40 dBm.

- Under Controls, select Main, select Auxiliary.

- Under Controls, select AVG. Set Avg = 20.

4- Record the reference level on the communications analyzer and Note as PS for reference.

- Replace the short with the antenna feedline. Record the reference level on the communications

analyzer and Note for as PA reference.

- Record the difference of the two readings in dB.

. . . continued on next page

Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

G-4

Table G-1: VSWR Measurement Procedure - HP Test Set

Step HP TEST SETAction

5Calculate the VSWR per the equation shown to the right.

Where:

RL(dB) =PA(dBm) - PS(dBm)

PA = Power reflected from antenna

PS = Power reflected from short

A calculated value of -13.98 dB equates to VSWR of better than 1.5:1.

VSWR +ȧ

1)10

1–10

6If the readings indicate a potential problem, verify the physical integrity of all cables (including any

in-line components, pads, etc.) and associated connections up to the antenna. If problem still persists,

consult antenna OEM documentation for additional performance verification tests or replacement

information.

7Repeat steps 2 through 6 for all remaining TX sectors/antennas.

8Repeat steps 2 through 6 for all remaining RX sectors/antennas.

Figure G-1: Manual VSWR Test Setup Using HP8921 Test Set (1700/1900 MHz)

RF OUT

ONLY

PORT

IN/OUT

PORT

RVS

(REFLECTED)

PORT

FEED LINE TO

ANTENNA

UNDER TEST

RF SHORT

30 DB

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

OUTPUT

PORT

FWD (INCIDENT)

PORT 50-OHM

TERMINATED LOAD

INPUT

PORT

FW00342

Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

G-5

Figure G-2: Manual VSWR Test Setup Using HP8921 Test Set (800 MHz)

FWD (INCIDENT)

PORT 50-OHM

TERMINATED LOAD

RVS

(REFLECTED)

PORT

FEED LINE TO

ANTENNA

UNDER TEST

SHORT

30 DB

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER OUTPUT

PORT

INPUT

PORT

FW00343

Equipment Setup - Advantest Test Set

Follow the steps in Table G-2 to set up test equipment required to

measure and calculate the VSWR for each antenna.

Table G-2: VSWR Measurement Procedure - Advantest Test Set

Step Action ADVANTEST

1If you have not already done so, refer to the procedure in Table 3-2 on page 3-6 to set up test

equipment and interface the LMF computer to the BTS.

2For manual VSWR testing using external directional coupler, refer to Figure G-3.

- Connect the communications test set RF OUT port to the input port of the directional coupler.

- Connect the INPUT port of the communication test set to the forward port on the directional

coupler. Terminate the forward port with a 50 Ohm load.

- Connect the RF short to the directional coupler output port.

. . . continued on next page

Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

G-6

Table G-2: VSWR Measurement Procedure - Advantest Test Set

Step ADVANTESTAction

3Preform the following to instruct the calibrated test set to generate a CDMA RF carrier (RVL call)

with all zero longcode at the assigned RX frequency at -10 dBm:

SPush the ADVANCE Measurement key.

SPush the CDMA Sig CRT menu key.

SPush the FREQ Entry key:

- For 1900 MHz systems, set RF Gen Freq to center frequency of actual CDMA carrier between

1930-1990 MHz for TX and 1850-1910 MHz for RX.

- For 800 MHz systems, set RF Gen Freq to center frequency of actual CDMA carrier between

869-894 MHz for TX and 824-849 MHz for RX.

- For 1700 MHz systems, set RF Gen Freq to center frequency of actual CDMA carrier between

1840-1870 MHz for TX and 1750-1780 MHz for RX.

SPush the LEVEL Entry key; set to 0 dBm (by entering 0 and pushing the -dBm key).

SVerify that ON is active in the Output CRT menu key.

SVerify that OFF is active in the Mod CRT menu key.

SPush the CW Measurement key.

SPush the FREQ Entry key.

- Push the more 1/2 CRT menu key.

- Set Preselect CRT menu key to 3.0G.

SPush the Transient Measurement key.

- Push the Tx Power CRT menu key.

- Push the LEVEL entry key (set to 7 dBm by entering 7 and pushing the the dBm key).

- Set Avg Times CRT menu key to ON. Set to 20 (by entering 20 and pushing the Hz ENTER

key).

SPush the REPEAT Start key to take the measurement.

4Record the Burst Power display on the communications analyzer and Note as PS for reference.

5Install the antenna feedline to the output port of the directional coupler.

6SPush the Auto Level Set CRT menu key.

SPush the REPEAT Start key to take the measurement.

7Record the Burst Power on the communications analyzer and Note as PA level for reference.

Record the difference of the two readings in dBm.

8Calculate the VSWR per the equation shown to the right.

Where:

RL(dB) =PA(dBm) - PS(dBm)

PA = Power reflected from antenna

PS = Power reflected from short

A calculated value of -13.98 dB equates to VSWR of better than 1.5:1.

VSWR +ȧ

1)10

1–10

. . . continued on next page

Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

G-7

Table G-2: VSWR Measurement Procedure - Advantest Test Set

Step ADVANTESTAction

9If the readings indicate a potential problem, verify the physical integrity of all cables (including any

in-line components, pads, etc.) and associated connections up to the antenna. If problem still persists,

consult antenna OEM documentation for additional performance verification tests or replacement

information.

10 Repeat steps 2 through 9 for all remaining TX sectors/antennas.

11 Repeat steps 2 through 9 for all remaining RX sectors/antennas.

Figure G-3: Manual VSWR Test Setup Using Advantest R3465

RVS

(REFLECTED)

PORT

FEED LINE TO

ANTENNA

UNDER TEST

SHORT

30 DB

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

OUTPUT

PORT

FWD (INCIDENT)

PORT 50-OHM

TERMINATED LOAD

INPUT

PORT

RF OUT

RF IN

FW00332

Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

G-8

Notes

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

H-1

Appendix H

Download ROM Code

Download ROM Code 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

H-2

Download ROM Code

ROM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After the

download is started, the device being downloaded changes to

OOS_ROM (blue) and remains OOS_ROM (blue). The same R-level

RAM code must then be downloaded to the device. This procedure

includes steps for both the ROM code download and the RAM code

download.

ROM code files cannot be selected automatically. The ROM code file

must be selected manually. Follow the procedure in Table H-1 to

download ROM code.

Prerequisite

SROM and RAM code files exist for the device to be downloaded.

CAUTION The R-level of the ROM code to be downloaded must be the

same as the R-level of the ROM code for other devices in the

BTS. Code must not be mixed in a BTS. This procedure should

only be used to upgrade replacement devices for a BTS and it

should not be used to upgrade all devices in a BTS. If a BTS is

to be upgraded from one R-level to another, the optimization

and ATP procedures must first be performed with the BTS in the

original configuration. The upgrade should then be done by the

CBSC.

Table H-1: Download ROM Code

Step Action

1Click on the device to be downloaded.

NOTE

More than one device of the same type can be selected for download by either clicking on each one to

be downloaded or from the BTS menu bar Select pull-down menu, select the device item that applies.

Where: device = the type of device to be loaded (BBX, CSM, GLI, MCC)

2Click on the Device menu.

3Click on the Status menu item.

A status report window appears.

4Make a note of the number in the HW Bin Type column.

NOTE

“HW Bin Type” is the Hardware Binary Type for the device. This code is used as the last four digits in

the filename of a device’s binary ROM code file. Using this part of the filename, the ROM code file

can be matched to the device in which it is to be loaded.

5Click on the OK button to dismiss the status report window.

NOTE

ROM code is automatically selected for download from the <x>:\<lmf home

directory>\version folder>\<code folder> specified by the NextLoad property in

the bts-#.cdf file. To check the value of the NextLoad property, click on Util > Examine >

Display Nextload. A pop-up message will show the value of the NextLoad.

. . . continued on next page

Download ROM Code68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

H-3

Table H-1: Download ROM Code

Step Action

6From the BTS menu bar Device pull-down menus, select Download > ROM.

- If the file matching the Hardware Binary Type of the device is found in the code folder, a status

report shows the result of the download. Proceed to Step 12.

- If a file selection window appears, select the ROM code file manually.

7Double-click on the version folder that contains the desired ROM code file.

8Double-click on the Code folder.

A list of ROM and RAM code files is displayed.

! CAUTION

A ROM code file having the correct hardware binary type (HW Bin Type) needs to be chosen. The

hardware binary type (last four digits in the file name) was determined in step 4. Unpredictable results

can happen and the device may be damaged (may have to be replaced) if a ROM code file with wrong

binary type is downloaded.

9Choose a ROM code file having the correct hardware binary type (HW Bin Type).

The hardware binary type (last four digits in the file name) was determined in step 4.

10 Click on the ROM code file that matches the device type and HW Bin Type (e.g., bbx_rom.bin.0604

for a BBX having a HW Bin Type of 0604).

The file should be highlighted.

11 Click on the Load button.

A status report window displays the result of the download.

NOTE

If the ROM load failed for some devices, load them individually by clicking on one device, perform

steps 6 through 11 for it, and repeat the process for each remaining device.

12 Click on the Ok button to close the status report window.

13 Click on the Util menu.

14 Select the Tools menu item.

15 Click on the Update NextLoad>CDMA menu item.

16 Select the version number of the folder that was used for the ROM code download.

17 Click on the Save button.

A pop-up message indicates that the CDF file has been updated.

18 Click on the OK button to dismiss the pop-up message.

19 Click on the device that was downloaded with ROM code.

20 Click on the Device menu.

21 Click on the Download Code menu item to download RAM code.

A status report window displays the result of the download.

NOTE

Data is automatically downloaded to GLI devices when the RAM code is downloaded. Use the

Download Data procedure to download data to other device types after they have been upgraded.

22 Click on the Ok button to close the status report window.

The downloaded device should be OOS_RAM (yellow) unless it is a GLI in which case it should be

INS (green).

. . . continued on next page

Download ROM Code 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

H-4

Table H-1: Download ROM Code

Step Action

23 Click on the device that was downloaded.

24 Click on the Device menu.

25 Click on the Status menu item.

Verify that the status report window displays the correct ROM and RAM version numbers.

26 Click on the Ok button to close the status report window.

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

I-1

Appendix I

In-Service Calibration

Introduction 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

I-2

Introduction

Purpose

This procedure is a guide to expanding your system with multiple

carriers while the system remains in service. This procedure also allows

you to perform on site maintenance (replace defective boards and

recalibrate) while the remainder of the site stays in service.

Motorola recommends that you perform this procedure during a

maintenance window.

This procedure cannot be performed on BTSs with 4-to-1 combiners.

The procedure can only be performed on one side of the BTS at one

time. That is, LPAs 1, 2 ,3, 7, 8, 9 (feed antennas 1, 2, 3) can be

calibrated while LPAs 6, 7, 8, 10, 11, 12 (feed antennas 4, 5, 6) remain

in service and vice versa.

Equipment Warm up

NOTE Calibration of the communications test set (or equivalent test

equipment) must be performed at the site before calibrating the

overall test set. Calibrate the test equipment after it has been

allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.

CAUTION If any piece of test equipment (i.e., test cable, RF adapter) has

been replaced, re-calibration must be performed. Failure to do so

could introduce measurement errors, causing incorrect

measurements and degradation to system performance.

Power Delta Calibration68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

I-3

Power Delta Calibration

Power Delta Calibration Introduction

The In-service calibration procedure has several differences from a

normal calibration procedure. One of these is the use of a spectrum

analyzer instead of a power meter to measure power. Power meters are

broadband measurement devices and cannot be used to measure power

during In-service Calibration since other carriers are operating. A

spectrum analyzer can be used because it measures power at a given

frequency. However, measuring power using a spectrum analyzer is less

accurate than using a power meter. Therefore, you must compensate for

the difference (delta) between the power meter and the spectrum

analyzer.

HP8921A Power Delta Calibration

Use the HP8921A Spectrum Analyzer to measure power during

In-Service Calibration for 800 MHz systems. After the offset value has

been calculated, add it to the TX cable loss value.

Follow the procedure in Table I-1 to perform the HP8921A Power Delta

Calibration procedure.

NOTE This procedure requires two HP8921As.

Table I-1: HP8921A Power Delta Calibration Procedure

Step Action

NOTE

Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimum

of 60 minutes.

1Connect a short RF cable between the HP8921A Duplex Out port and the HP437B power sensor (see

Figure I-1).

2Set the HP8921A signal source as follows:

- Measure mode to CDMA Generator

- Frequency to the CDMA Calibration target frequency

- CW RF Path to IQ

- Output Port to Dupl

- Data Source to Random

- Amplitude to 0 dBm

3Measure and record the power value reading on the HP437B Power Meter.

4Record the Power Meter reading as result A ________________________.

5Turn off the source HP8921A signal output, and disconnect the HP437B.

NOTE

Leave the settings on the source HP8921A for convenience in the following steps.

6Connect the short RF cable between the source HP8921A Duplex Out port and the measuring

HP8921A RF-IN port (see Figure I-2).

. . . continued on next page

Power Delta Calibration 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

I-4

Table I-1: HP8921A Power Delta Calibration Procedure

Step Action

7Ensure that the source HP8921A settings are the same as in Step 2.

8Set the measuring HP8921A as follows:

- Measure mode to CDMA Anl

- Frequency to the CDMA calibration target frequency

- Input Attenuation to 0 dB

- Input port to RF-IN

- Gain to Auto

- Analyzer Direction to Fwd

9Turn on the source HP8921A signal output.

10 Measure and record the channel power reading on the measuring HP8921A as result

B ________________________.

11 Turn off the source HP8921A signal output and disconnect the equipment.

12 Compute the delta between HP437B and HP8921A using the following formula:

Delta = A - B

Example: Delta = -0.70 dBm - (-1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBm

Example: Delta = 0.26 dBm - 0.55 dBm = -0.29 dBm

These examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.

NOTE

Add this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In-Service Calibration (see Step 4 in

Table I-5).

Figure I-1: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8921A to HP437B

Short RF Cable

HP 8921A

DUPLEX

OUT

HP437B

Power

Sensor

SENSOR

FW00801

Power Delta Calibration68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

I-5

Figure I-2: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8921A to HP8921A

Measurement HP8921A Source HP8921A

Short RF Cable

DUPLEX

OUT

IN/OUT

FW00802

Advantest R3465 Power Delta Calibration

Follow the procedure in Table I-2 to perform the Advantest R3465

Power Delta Calibration procedure.

Table I-2: Advantest Power Delta Calibration Procedure

Step Action

NOTE

Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimum

of 60 minutes.

On the Advantest R3465:

1Press the SHIFT and the PRESET keys located below the CRT display.

2Press the ADVANCE key in the Measurement area of the control panel.

3Press the CDMA Sig CRT menu key.

4Press the FREQ key in the Entry area of the control panel.

5Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad entry keys.

6Press the LEVEL key in the Entry area of the control panel.

7Set the LEVEL to 0 dBm using the keypad entry keys.

8Verify the Mod CRT menu key is highlighting OFF, if not press the Mod key to toggle it OFF.

9Verify the Output CRT menu key is highlighting OFF. If not, press the Output key to toggle it OFF.

On the HP 437 Power Meter:

10 Zero the Power Meter prior to connecting the power sensor to the RF cable from the signal generator.

NOTE

For best accuracy, always re-zero the power meter before connecting the power sensor to the

component being calibrated.

11 Connect the RF cable from the R3561L CDMA Test Source Unit RF OUT port to the power sensor

(see Figure I-3).

12 Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle the Output to ON.

. . . continued on next page

Power Delta Calibration 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

I-6

Table I-2: Advantest Power Delta Calibration Procedure

Step Action

13 Record the Power Meter reading as result A ________________________.

14 Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle the Output to OFF.

15 Connect the RF cable from the R3561L CDMA Test Source Unit RF OUT port to the Spectrum

Analyzer INPUT Port (see Figure I-4).

16 Press the Output CRT menu key to change the Output to ON.

17 Press the CW key in the Measurement area of the control panel.

18 Press the LEVEL key in the Entry area of the control panel.

19 Set the REF LEVEL to 10 dBm using the keypad entry keys.

20 Press the dB/div CRT menu key.

21 Press the 10 dB/div CRT menu key.

22 Press the FREQ key in Entry area of the control panel.

23 Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad entry keys.

24 Press the more 1/2 CRT menu key.

25 Press the Preselector CRT menu key to highlight 3.0G.

26 Press the FORMAT key in the Display Control area of the control panel.

27 Press the TRACE CRT menu key.

28 Press the AVG A CRT menu key.

29 Set AVG to 20 using keypad entry keys.

30 Press the return CRT menu key.

31 Press the SPAN key in the Entry area of the control panel.

32 Press the Zero Span CRT menu key.

33 Press the BW key in the Entry area of the control panel.

34 Press the RBW CRT menu key to highlight MNL.

35 Set RBW to 30 kHz using keypad entry keys.

36 Press the VBW CRT menu key to highlight MNL.

37 Set VBW to 1 MHz using keypad entry keys.

38 Press the Marker ON key in the Display Control area of the control panel.

39 Record the Marker Level reading as result B ________________________.

. . . continued on next page

Power Delta Calibration68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

I-7

Table I-2: Advantest Power Delta Calibration Procedure

Step Action

40 Calculate the Power Calibration Delta value. The delta value is the power meter measurement minus

the Advantest measurement.

Delta = A - B

Example: Delta = -0.70 dBm - (-1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBm

Example: Delta = 0.26 dBm - 0.55 dBm = -0.29 dBm

These examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.

NOTE

Add this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In-Service Calibration (see Step 4 in

Table I-5).

Figure I-3: Delta Calibration Setup - R3561L to HP437B

Advantest Power

Sensor

RF OUT

Short RF Cable

HP437B

SENSOR

R3561L

FW00803

Figure I-4: Delta Calibration Setup - R3561L to R3465

R3561L

RF OUT

INPUT

Short RF Cable

R3465

FW00804

Power Delta Calibration 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

I-8

HP8935 Power Delta Calibration

Follow the procedure in Table I-3 to perform the HP8935 Power Delta

Calibration procedure.

Table I-3: HP8935 Power Delta Calibration Procedure

Step Action

NOTE

Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimum

of 60 minutes.

1Connect a short RF cable between the HP8935 Duplex Out port and the HP437B power sensor (see

Figure I-5).

2Set the HP8935 signal source as follows:

- Measure mode to CDMA Gen

- Frequency to the CDMA Calibration target frequency

- CW RF Path to IQ

- Output Port to Dupl

- Data Source to Random

- Amplitude to 0 dBm

3Measure and record the power value reading on the HP437B Power Meter.

4Record the Power Meter reading as result A ________________________.

5Turn off the source HP8935 signal output, and disconnect the HP437B.

NOTE

Leave the settings on the source HP8935 for convenience in the following steps.

6Connect the short RF cable between the source HP8935 Duplex Out port and the RF-IN/OUT port

(see Figure I-6).

7Ensure that the source HP8935 settings are the same as in Step 2.

8Set the measuring HP8935 as follows:

- Measure mode to CDMA Anl

- Frequency to the CDMA calibration target frequency

- Input Attenuation to 0 dB

- Input port to RF-IN

- Gain to Auto

- Anl Dir to Fwd

9Turn on the source HP8935 signal output.

10 Set the Chn Pwr Cal to Calibrate and select to calibrate.

11 Measure and record the channel power reading on the measuring HP8935 as result

B ________________________.

12 Turn off the source HP8935 signal output and disconnect the equipment.

. . . continued on next page

Power Delta Calibration68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

I-9

Table I-3: HP8935 Power Delta Calibration Procedure

Step Action

13 Calculate the Power Calibration Delta value. The delta value is the power meter measurement minus

the Advantest measurement.

Delta = A - B

Example: Delta = -0.70 dBm - (-1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBm

Example: Delta = 0.26 dBm - 0.55 dBm = -0.29 dBm

These examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.

NOTE

Add this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In-Service Calibration (see Step 4 in

Table I-5).

Figure I-5: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8935 to HP437B

Power

Sensor

Hewlett-Packard Model HP 8935

DUPLEX OUT

Short RF Cable

HP437B

SENSOR

FW00805

Figure I-6: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8935 to HP8935

Hewlett-Packard Model HP 8935

Short RF Cable

DUPLEX OUT RF IN/OUT

FW00806

Power Delta Calibration 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

I-10

Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration

The Agilent E4406A transmitter tester and E4432B signal generator test

equipment combination can be used for ISC of IS-2000 CDMA 1X as

well as IS-95A/B operation modes. The power delta calibration is

performed on the E4406A, but the E4432B is required to generate the

reference signal used to calculate the power delta offset. After the offset

value has been calculated, add it to the TX cable loss value in the LMF.

Follow the procedure in Table I-4 to perform the Agilent E4406A Power

Delta Calibration procedure.

Table I-4: Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration Procedure

Step Action

NOTE

Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimum

of 60 minutes. After it is warmed up and stabilized, calibrate the test equipment as described in the

“Test Set Calibration” section of the Optimization/Calibration chapter in the SC 4812T

Optimization/ATP manual.

1Zero the Power Meter prior to connecting the power sensor to the RF cable from the signal generator.

NOTE

For best accuracy, always re-zero the power meter before connecting the power sensor to the

component being calibrated.

2Connect a short RF cable from the E4432B RF OUTPUT connector the HP437 power meter power

sensor (see Figure I-7).

3Set the E4432B signal generator as follows:

- Press Preset to exit any modes for which the signal generator is configured.

- Press Frequency and enter the frequency of the channel to be calibrated using the numeric

keypad.

- Using the soft keys to the right of the screen, select the frequency range to be measured (for

example, MHz).

- Press Amplitude and, using the numeric keypad, set signal amplitude to 0 (zero).

- Using the soft keys, set the measurement type to dBm.

4On the E4432B, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF output to RF ON.

- Note that the RF On/Off status in the screen display changes.

5Measure and record the value reading on the HP437 power meter as result A____________________.

6On the E4432B, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF output to RF OFF.

- Note that the RF On/Off status in the screen display changes.

7Disconnect the short RF cable from the HP437 power meter power sensor, and connect it to the

RF INPUT connector on the E4406A transmitter tester (see Figure I-8).

. . . continued on next page

Power Delta Calibration68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

I-11

Table I-4: Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration Procedure

Step Action

NOTE

Do not change the frequency and amplitude settings on the E4432B when performing the following

steps.

8Set the E4406A as follows:

- Press Preset to exit any modes for which the transmitter tester is configured.

- Press MODE and, using the soft keys to the right of the screen, select cdmaOne.

- Press MEASURE and, using the soft keys, select spectrum.

- Press Frequency and, using the soft keys, select Center Frequency.

- Using the numeric keypad. enter the frequency of the channel to be calibrated.

- Using the soft keys, select the frequency range to be measured (for example, MHz).

- Press Input/Output and, using the soft keys, select Input Atten.

- Using the numeric keypad, set Input Atten to 0 (zero) and, using the soft keys, select dB.

- Using the soft keys, select External Atten and then select Mobile.

- Using the numeric keypad, set Mobile to 0 (zero) and, using the soft keys, select dB.

- Using the soft keys, select Base.

- Using the numeric keypad, set Base to 0 (zero) and, using the soft keys, select dB.

- Press MEASURE and, using the soft keys, select Channel Power.

9On the E4432B signal generator, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF output to RF ON.

- Note that the RF On/Off status in the screen display changes.

10 Read the measured Channel Power from the E4406A screen display and record it as

result B____________________.

11 On the E4432B, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF output to RF OFF.

- Note that the RF On/Off status in the screen display changes.

12 Calculate the Power Calibration Delta value. The delta value is the power meter measurement minus

the Agilent measurement.

Delta = A - B

Example: Delta = -0.70 dBm - (-1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBm

Example: Delta = 0.26 dBm - 0.55 dBm = -0.29 dBm

These examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.

NOTE

Add this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In-Service Calibration (see step 4 in

Table I-5).

Power Delta Calibration 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

I-12

Figure I-7: Delta Calibration Setup - Agilent E4432B to HP437

Power

Sensor

AGILENT E4432B AND E4406A

Short RF Cable

HP437B

SENSOR

RF OUTPUT

FW00858

Figure I-8: Delta Calibration Setup - Agilent E4432B to Agilent E4406A

Short RF

Cable

RF INPUT

AGILENT E4432B AND E4406A

RF OUTPUT

FW00859

In-Service Calibration68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

I-13

In-Service Calibration

CAUTION This feature does NOT have fault tolerance at this time. The

system has no safe-guards to stop you from doing something

that will take the BTS out of service. If possible, perform this

procedure during a maintenance window.

Follow the procedures in this section precisely, otherwise the

entire BTS will most likely go OUT OF SERVICE.

At the CBSC, only perform operations on expansion hardware

when it is in the OOS_MANUAL state.

The operator must be trained in the LMF operation prior to

performing this procedure.

Prerequisites

SExpansion hardware has been added in the CBSC database, and the

CDF file has been generated.

SThe expansion devices have been inserted into the C-CCP cage and

are in the OOS_MANUAL state at the CBSC.

SThe site specific cdf (with the expansion hardware) and cal files have

been loaded onto the LMF.

SThe LMF has the same code and dds files as the CBSC to download.

CAUTION Do not download code or data to any cards other than those you

are working on. Downloading code or data to other cards will

take the site OUT OF SERVICE.

The code file version numbers must match the version numbers

on the other cards in the frame. If the numbers do not match, the

site may go OUT OF SERVICE.

The BTS-#.cdf, CBSC-#.cdf, and CAL files for this BTS must

have come from the CBSC.

STest equipment has been configured per Figure I-9 and Figure I-10.

SAn RFDS (or at a minimum a directional coupler), whose loss is

already known, must be in line to perform the in-service calibration.

STest equipment has been calibrated after 1 hour warm up.

SA short RF cable and two BNC-N adapters are available to perform

Cable Calibration.

SThe Power Delta Calibration has been performed (see Table I-1,

Table I-2, or Table I-3).

In-Service Calibration 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

I-14

Figure I-9: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using RFDS

TEST

CABLE

Hewlett-Packard Model HP 8935

DUPLEX OUT

TEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UP

RF IN/OUT

HP-IB

TO GPIB

BOX

RX ANTENNA

PORT TX ANTENNA

PORT

RS232-GPIB

INTERFACE BOX

INTERNAL PCMCIA

ETHERNET CARD

GPIB

CABLE

UNIVERSAL TWISTED

PAIR (UTP) CABLE

(RJ45 CONNECTORS)

RS232 NULL

MODEM

CABLE

S MODE

DATA FORMAT

BAUD RATE

GPIB ADRS G MODE

BTS

TEST

CABLE

CDMA

LMF

DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

10BASET/

10BASE2

CONVERTER

LAN

TEST

CABLE

COMMUNICATIONS

TEST SET

IEEE 488

GPIB BUS

TEST SET

INPUT/

OUTPUT

PORTS

OUT

NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE

DUPLEXED: BOTH THE TX AND RX TEST

CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED

ANTENNA GROUP.

ANTENNA

RFDS

DUPLEXER

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

EVEN

SECOND/

SYNC IN

EXT

REF

FREQ

MONITOR

SYNC

MONITOR

CSM

REF FW00759

SYNC MONITOR

EVEN SEC TICK

PULSE REFERENCE

FROM CSM BOARD

FREQ MONITOR

19.6608 MHZ CLOCK

REFERENCE FROM

CSM BOARD

TEST

CABLE

FWD

COUPLED

PORT

20 DB PAD

(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)

10 DB PAD

(FOR 800 MHZ)

20 DB PAD

(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)

10 DB PAD

(FOR 800 MHZ)

In-Service Calibration68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

I-15

Figure I-10: IS-95 A/B/C Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using RFDS

TEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UP

INPUT

OUTPUT

Agilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)

FREQ MONITOR

19.6608 MHZ CLOCK

REFERENCE FROM

CSM BOARD

SYNC MONITOR

EVEN SEC TICK

PULSE REFERENCE

FROM CSM BOARD

BNC

“T”

TO TRIGGER IN

ON REAR OF

TRANSMITTER

TESTER

TO PATTERN TRIG IN

ON REAR OF SIGNAL

GENERATOR

TO 10 MHZ IN

(EXT REF IN)

ON REAR OF

TRANSMITTER

TESTER

RF IN

RF OUT

Advantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)

FREQ MONITOR

19.6608 MHZ CLOCK

REFERENCE FROM

CSM BOARD

SYNC MONITOR

EVEN SEC TICK

PULSE REFERENCE

FROM CSM BOARD

BNC

“T”

NOTE:

SYNTHE REF IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS

CONNECTED TO 10 MHZ OUT ON REAR OF SPECTRUM

ANALYZER

TO EXT TRIG

ON REAR OF

SPECTRUM

ANALYZER

TEST

CABLE

RX ANTENNA

PORT TX ANTENNA

PORT

RS232-GPIB

INTERFACE BOX

INTERNAL PCMCIA

ETHERNET CARD

GPIB

CABLE

UNIVERSAL TWISTED

PAIR (UTP) CABLE

(RJ45 CONNECTORS)

RS232 NULL

MODEM

CABLE

S MODE

DATA FORMAT

BAUD RATE

GPIB ADRS G MODE

BTS

CABLE

CDMA

LMF

DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

10BASET/

10BASE2

CONVERTER

LAN

TEST

CABLE

COMMUNICATIONS

TEST SET

IEEE 488

GPIB BUS

TEST SET

INPUT/

OUTPUT

PORTS

OUT

NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE

DUPLEXED: BOTH THE TX AND RX TEST

CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED

ANTENNA GROUP.

ANTENNA

RFDS

DUPLEXER

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

EVEN

SECOND/

SYNC IN

EXT

REF

FREQ

MONITOR

SYNC

MONITOR

CSM

REF FW00759

CABLE

FWD

COUPLED

PORT SIGNAL

GENERATOR

EXT TRIG IN

MOD TIME BASE IN

(EXT REF IN)

19.6608

MHZ

CLOCK

BNC

“T”

20 DB PAD

(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)

10 DB PAD

(FOR 800 MHZ)

In-Service Calibration 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

I-16

Follow the procedure in Table I-5 to perform the In-Service Calibration.

Table I-5: In-Service Calibration

Step Action

NOTE

Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimum

of 60 minutes.

1Set up the LMF for In-Service Calibration:

- Start the LMF by double-clicking the LMF icon on the Windows desktop.

- Click Tools>Options from the menu bar at the login screen.

- Check the applicable spectrum analyzer check box and the signal generator check box on the Test

Equipment tab.

Ensure that the GPIB address is 18 for the CDMA analyzer and 1 for the signal generator.

- Uncheck any other other equipment that is selected.

- Click the Apply button.

- Select the BTS Options tab in the LMF Option window.

- Check the In-Service Calibration check box.

- Click the Apply button.

- Click the Dismiss button to close the LMF Option window.

2Login to the target BTS:

- Select the target BTS icon.

- Click the Login button at the login screen.

3Measure the Cable Loss using the Cable Calibration function:

- Click Util>Cable Calibration from the menu bar at the main window.

- Set the desired channel(s) and select TX and RX CABLE CAL at the cable calibration pop up

window.

- Click the OK button to perform cable calibration.

- Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the cable loss measurement.

NOTE

- The measured value is input automatically to the cable loss file.

- To view the cable loss file, click Util>Examine>Cable Loss>TX or RX.

4Add the spectrum analyzer power delta to the Cable Loss.

- To view the cable loss file, click Util>Examine>Cable Loss>TX or RX.

- Add the value computed in Table I-1, Table I-2, or Table I-3 to the TX Cable Loss.

NOTE

Be sure to include the sign of the value. The following examples are included to show the mathematics

and do not represent actual readings:

- Example: 5.65 dBm + 0.55 dBm = 6.20 dBm

- Example: 5.65 dBm + (-0.29 dBm) = 5.36 dBm

- Example: -5.65 dBm + 0.55 dBm = -5.10 dBm

- Example: -5.65 dBm + (-0.29 dBm) = -5.94 dBm

. . . continued on next page

In-Service Calibration68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

I-17

Table I-5: In-Service Calibration

Step Action

5Input the Coupler Loss for the TX and RX tests:

- Click Util>Edit>Coupler Loss>TX or RX from the menu bar at the main window.

- Input the appropriate coupler loss for the target carrier(s) by referring to the information taken at

the time of BTS installation.

- Click the Save button.

- Click the Dismiss button to close the window.

- To view the coupler loss file, click Util>Examine>Coupler Loss>TX or RX.

6Have the CBSC operator put the redundant BBX OOS_MANUAL.

! CAUTION

Be sure to download OOS devices only. Loading in-service devices takes them OUT OF SERVICE

and can result in dropped calls.

The code file version numbers must match the version numbers on the other cards in the frame. If the

numbers do not match, the site may go OUT OF SERVICE.

NOTE

Be sure to include the redundant BBX in steps 7, 8, and 9.

7Download code and data to the target devices:

- Click Tools>Update NextLoad>CDMA to set the code version that will be downloaded.

- Select the BTS(s) you need, check the appropriate code version in the pop up window, and click

the Save button to close.

- Select the target BBX(s) on the C-CCP cage picture.

- Click Device>Download>Code/Data to start downloading code.

- Select the target BBX(s) on the C-CCP cage picture.

- Click Device>Download>Data to start downloading data.

. . . continued on next page

In-Service Calibration 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

I-18

Table I-5: In-Service Calibration

Step Action

! CAUTION

Perform the In-service Calibration procedure on OOS devices only.

8Select the desired test:

- Select the target BBX(s) on the C-CCP cage picture.

- Click Tests>[desired test] from the menu bar at the main window.

- Select the target carrier and confirm the channel number in the pop up window.

- Leave the Verify BLO check box checked.

- From the Test Pattern pick list, select a test pattern.

- Click the OK button to start calibration.

- Follow the on-screen instructions, except, do not connect to the BTS antenna port, connect to the

directional coupler (fwd) port associated with the on screen prompt antenna port.

NOTE

SSelecting Pilot (default) performs tests using a pilot signal only.

SSelecting Standard performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels. This requires

an MCC to be selected.

SSelecting CDFPilot performs tests using a pilot signal, however, the gain for the channel elements

is specified in the CDF file.

SSelecting CDF performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels, however, the gain

for the channel elements is specified in the CDF file.

9Save the result and download the BLO data to the target BBX(s):

- Click the Save Result button on the result screen.

The window closes automatically.

10 Logout from the BTS and close the LMF session:

- Click BTS>Logout to close the BTS connection.

- Close the LMF window.

11 Restore the new “bts-*.cal” file to the CBSC.

12 Enable the target device(s) from the CBSC.

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

J-1

Appendix J

GPIB Addresses

GPIB Addresses 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

J-2

GPIB Addresses

Introduction

Use the procedures in this appendix to verify and/or change the GPIB

addresses of the applicable test equipment.

HP437 Power Meter GPIB Address

Follow the steps in Table J-1 to verify and, if necessary, change the

HP437 GPIB address.

NOTE This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up and

ready for testing.

Table J-1: Verify and/or Change HP437 Power Meter GPIB Address

Step Action

1 Press Shift and PRESET (see Figure J-1).

2Use the y arrow key to navigate to HP-IB ADRS and press ENTER.

The HP-IB address is displayed.

NOTE

HP-IB is the same as GPIB.

3If the current GPIB address is not set to 13, perform the following to change it:

- Use the y b arrow keys to change the HP-IB ADRS to 13.

- Press ENTER to set the address.

4 Press Shift and ENTER to return to a standard configuration.

Figure J-1: HP437 Power Meter

ENTER

PRESET

SHIFT (BLUE) PUSHBUTTON -

ACCESSES FUNCTION AND

DATA ENTRY KEYS IDENTIFIED

WITH LIGHT BLUE TEXT ON

THE FRONT PANEL ABOVE

THE BUTTONS

FW00308REF

GPIB Addresses68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

J-3

Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB Address

Follow the steps in Table J-2 to verify and, if necessary, change the

Gigatronics 8541C power meter GPIB address.

NOTE This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up and

ready for testing.

Table J-2: Verify and/or Change Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB Address

Step Action

! CAUTION

Do not connect/disconnect the power meter sensor cable with AC power applied to the meter.

Disconnection could result in destruction of the sensing element or miscalibration.

1 Press MENU (see Figure J-2).

2Use the b arrow key to select CONFIG MENU and press ENTER.

3Use the b arrow key to select GPIB and press ENTER.

The current Mode and GPIB Address are displayed.

4If the Mode is not set to 8541C, perform the following to change it:

Use the a ' arrow keys as required to select MODE.

Use the by arrow keys as required to set MODE to 8541C.

5If the GPIB address is not set to 13, perform the following to change it:

Use the ' arrow key to select ADDRESS.

Use the by arrow keys as required to set the GPIB address to 13.

6 Press ENTER to return to normal operation.

Figure J-2: Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter Detail

MENU ENTER ARROW

KEYS REF FW00564

GPIB Addresses 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

J-4

Motorola CyberTest GPIB Address

Follow the steps in Table J-3 to verify and, if necessary, change the

GPIB address on the Motorola CyberTest. Changing the GPIB address

requires the following items:

SMotorola CyberTest communications analyzer

SComputer running Windows 98SE or Windows 2000

SMotorola CyberTAME software program “TAME”

SParallel printer port cable (shipped with CyberTest)

NOTE This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up and

ready for testing.

Table J-3: Verify and/or Change Motorola CyberTest GPIB Address

Step Action

1On the LMF desktop, locate the CyberTAME icon. Double click on the icon to run the CyberTAME

application.

2In the CyberTAME window taskbar, under Special, select IEEE.488.2.

3CyberTAME software will query the CyberTest Analyzer for its current GPIB address. It then will

open the IEEE 488.2 dialog box. If the current GPIB address is not 18, perform the following

procedure to change it:

- Use the up or down increment arrows, or double-click in the field and type the number.

- Click on the OK button.

The new address will be written to the CyberTest via the parallel port and saved.

NOTE

Verify that the address has been set by repeating steps 2 and 3. The new address should now appear in

the IEEE 488.2 dialog box Address field.

GPIB Addresses68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

J-5

HP8935 Test Set GPIB Address

Follow the procedure in Table J-4 to verify and, if necessary, change the

HP8935 GPIB address.

NOTE This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up and

ready for testing.

Table J-4: Verify and/or Change HP8935 GPIB Address

Step Action

* IMPORTANT

The HP I/O configuration MUST be set to Talk & Listen, or NO device on the GPIB bus will be

accessible. (Consult test equipment OEM documentation for additional information as required.)

1To verify that the GPIB addresses are set correctly, press Shift and LOCAL on the HP8935 (see

Figure J-3). The current HP-IB address is displayed at the top of the screen.

NOTE

HP-IB is the same as GPIB.

2If the current GPIB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it:

- Press Shift and Inst Config.

- Turn the Cursor Control knob to move the cursor to the HP-IB Adrs field.

- Press the Cursor Control knob to select the field.

- Turn the Cursor Control knob as required to change the address to 18.

- Press the Cursor Control knob to set the address.

3SPress Preset to return to normal operation.

Figure J-3: HP8935 Test Set

FW00885

Preset

Cursor Control

Shift

Inst Config

Local

GPIB Addresses 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

J-6

Setting HP8921A and HP83236A/B GPIB Address

Follow the procedure in Table J-5 to verify and, if necessary, change the

HP8921A HP83236A GPIB addresses.

NOTE This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up and

ready for testing.

Table J-5: Verify and/or Change HP8921A and HP83236A GPIB Addresses

Step Action

1To verify that the GPIB addresses are set correctly, press Shift and LOCAL on the HP8921A (see

Figure J-4). The current HP-IB address is displayed at the top of the screen.

NOTE

HP-IB is the same as GPIB.

2If the current HP-IB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it:

- Turn the Cursor Control knob to move the cursor to More and press the knob to select the field.

- Turn the Cursor Control knob to move the cursor to I/O Config and press the knob to select the

field.

- Turn the Cursor Control knob to move the cursor to Adrs and press the knob to select the field.

- Turn the Cursor Control knob to change the HP-IB address to 18 and press the knob to set the

address.

- Press Shift and Preset to return to normal operation.

3To set the HP83236A (or B) PCS Interface GPIB address=19, set the dip switches as follows:

- A1=1, A2=1, A3=0, A4=0, A5=1, HP-IB/Ser = 1

GPIB Addresses68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

J-7

Figure J-4: HP8921A and HP83236A/B

Preset

Cursor ControlShift

Local

GPIB Addresses 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

J-8

Advantest R3465 GPIB Address

Table J-6 describes the steps to verify and, if necessary, change the GPIB

address for the Advantest R3465.

NOTE This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up and

ready for testing.

Table J-6: Verify and/or Change Advantest R3465 GPIB Address

Step Action

1To verify that the GPIB address is set correctly, perform the following procedure:

- Press SHIFT then PRESET (see Figure J-5).

- Press LCL.

- Press the GPIB and Others CRT menu key to view the current address.

2If the current GPIB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it:

- Turn the vernier knob as required to select 18.

- Press the vernier knob to set the address.

3To return to normal operation, press Shift and Preset.

Figure J-5: R3465 Communications Test Set

BNC

“T”

REF UNLOCK EVEN

SEC/SYNC IN CDMA

TIME BASE IN

POWER

OFF ON

REF FW00337

LCL Shift Preset

GPIB and others

Vernier

Knob

GPIB Addresses68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

J-9

RS232 GPIB Interface Box

Ensure that the RS232 GPIB interface box dip switches are set as shown

in Figure J-6.

Figure J-6: RS232 GPIB Interface Box

RS232-GPIB

INTERFACE BOX

S MODE

DATA FORMAT

BAUD RATE

GPIB ADRS

DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

G MODE

CDMA 2000 Test Equipment Preparation 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

J-10

CDMA 2000 Test Equipment Preparation

Advantest R3267 Spectrum Analyzer GPIB Address

Perform the procedure in Table J-7 and refer to Figure J-7 to verify and,

if necessary, change the Advantest R3267 spectrum analyzer GPIB

address.

Table J-7: Verify and Change Advantest R3267 GPIB Address

Step Action

1If the REMOTE LED is lighted, press the LCL key.

- The LED extinguishes.

2Press the CONFIG key.

- The CONFIG softkey labels will appear in the softkey label display area of the instrument

display.

- The current GPIB address will be displayed below the GPIB Address softkey label.

3If the current GPIB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it:

3a - Press the GPIB Address softkey.

-- A GPIB Address entry window will open in the instrument display showing the current

GPIB address.

3b - Enter 18 on the keypad in the ENTRY section of the instrument front panel.

-- Characters typed on the keypad will replace the address displayed in the GPIB Address

entry window.

NOTE

To correct an entry, press the BS (backspace) key at the lower right of the keypad to delete one

character at a time.

3c - Press the ENTER key to the lower right of the keypad to enter the address.

-- The GPIB Address entry window closes.

-- The new address is displayed in the bottom portion of the GPIB Address softkey label.

CDMA 2000 Test Equipment Preparation68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

J-11

Figure J-7: Setting Advantest R3267 GPIB Address

onREMOTE LED

LCL Key

CONFIG Key

Softkey Lable

Display Area Softkey

Buttons

Keypad BS Key ENTR Key

ti-CDMA-WP-00083-v01-ildoc-ftw

Advantest R3562 Signal Generator GPIB Address

Set the GP-IB ADDRESS switch on the rear of the Advantest R3562

signal generator to address 1 as shown in Figure J-8.

Figure J-8: Advantest R3562 GPIB Address Switch Setting

123 4567 8

54321

GP-IP ADDRESS

GPIB Address set to “1”

ti-CDMA-WP-00084-v01-ildoc-ftw

CDMA 2000 Test Equipment Preparation 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

J-12

Agilent E4406A Transmitter Tester GPIB Address

Follow the procedure in Table J-8 and refer to Figure J-9 to verify and,

if necessary, change the Agilent E4406A GPIB address.

Table J-8: Verify and Change Agilent E4406A GPIB Address

Step Action

1In the SYSTEM section of the instrument front panel, press the System key.

- The softkey labels displayed on the right side of the instrument screen will change.

2Press the Config I/O softkey button to the right of the instrument screen.

- The softkey labels will change.

- The current instrument GPIB address will be displayed below the GPIB Address softkey label.

3If the current GPIB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it:

3a - Press the GPIB Address softkey button.

-- In the on-screen Active Function Area, GPIB Address will be displayed followed by the

current GPIB address.

3b - On the front panel Data Entry keypad, enter the communications system analyzer GPIB address of

18.

-- The GPIB Address label will change to Enter.

-- Digits entered with the keypad will replace the current GPIB address in the display.

NOTE

To correct an entry, press the Bk Sp key at the upper right of the keypad to delete one character at a

time.

3c - Press the Enter softkey button or the keypad Enter key to set the new GPIB address.

-- The Config I/O softkey labels will reappear.

-- The new GPIB address will be displayed under the GPIB Address softkey label.

CDMA 2000 Test Equipment Preparation68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

J-13

Figure J-9: Setting Agilent E4406A GPIB Address

System Key Bk Sp Key

Enter Key

Data Entry

Keypad

Softkey

Buttons

Softkey Label

Display Area

Active Function

Area

ti-CDMA-WP-00085-v01-ildoc-ftw

Agilent E4432B Signal Generator GPIB Address

Follow the procedure in Table J-9 and refer to Figure J-10 to verify and,

if necessary, change the Agilent E4432B GPIB address.

Table J-9: Verify and Change Agilent E4432B GPIB Address

Step Action

1In the MENUS section of the instrument front panel, press the Utility key.

- The softkey labels displayed on the right side of the instrument screen will change.

2Press the GPIB/RS232 softkey button to the right of the instrument screen.

- The softkey labels will change.

- The current instrument GPIB address will be displayed below the GPIB Address softkey label.

3If the current GPIB address is not set to 1, perform the following to change it:

3a - Press the GPIB Address softkey button.

-- The GPIB Address label and current GPIB address will change to boldface.

-- In the on-screen Active Entry Area, Address: will be displayed followed by the current

GPIB address.

. . . continued on next page

CDMA 2000 Test Equipment Preparation 68P09255A61-4

Aug 2002

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

J-14

Table J-9: Verify and Change Agilent E4432B GPIB Address

Step Action

3b - On the front panel Numeric keypad, enter the signal generator GPIB address of 1.

-- The GPIB Address label will change to Enter.

-- Digits entered with the keypad will replace the current GPIB address in the Active Entry

display.

NOTE

To correct an entry, press the backspace key at the lower right of the keypad to delete one character at

a time.

3c - Press the Entr softkey button to set the new GPIB address.

-- The new GPIB address will be displayed under the GPIB Address softkey label.

Figure J-10: Setting Agilent E4432B GPIB Address

Numeric

Keypad

Softkey

Buttons

Softkey Label

Display Area

Active Entry

Area

Backspace

Key

Utility Key

ti-CDMA-WP-00086-v01-ildoc-ftw

FIELD TRIAL

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x Index-1

Index

Index 68P09255A61-4

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

Aug 2002

Index-2

Numbers

10BaseT/10Base2 Converter, 1-10

LMF to BTS connection, 3-5

1700 MHz Center Frequencies, Calculating, E-7

1700 MHz PCS Channels, E-6

1900 MHz Center Frequencies, Calculating, E-2

1900 MHz PCS Channels, E-1

2-way Splitter, 1-13

3C-PC-COMBO CBL, 1-10

800 MHz CDMA Channels, E-4

800 MHz Center Frequencies, Calculating, E-4

Abbreviations and Acronyms, 1-6

ACTIVE LED

GLI2, 6-22

MCC, 6-26

Advantest R3465, 3-43

Calibrating Test Cable, F-8

GPIB, J-7

Agilent E4406A, calibration, 3-61

Alarm Connector Location/Pin Numbering SC

4850/4850E, 3-100

ALARM LED, GLI2, 6-22

Alarm Monitor window, 3-99

alarm redundancy tests, BBX2, 3-93

Alarm Reporting Display, 3-99

Alarm tests, redundancy, 3-88

Alarm/Redundancy Tests, Distribution Shelf, 3-91

All Cal/Audit Test, 3-77, 3-78

All RX, 4-2

All TX, 4-2

All TX/RX, 4-2

AMR, No control, 6-16

AMR CDI Alarm Input Verification, test data sheets,

A-17

Ancillary Equipment Frame identification, 1-15

Ancillary frame, when to optimize, C-1

Antenna Map, 3-84

ATP, 4-1

Code Domain Power, 4-11

Frame Error Rate (FER), 4-13

generate report, 4-14

Pilot Time Offset, 4-10

Report, 4-14

Spectral Purity Transmit Mask, 4-7

test matrix/detailed optimization, C-2

Test Prerequisites, 4-3

Test Procedure, 4-4

testing options, 4-4

Waveform Quality (rho), 4-9

Automated Acceptance Test Procedure, 4-1

Backplane DIP switch settings, 2-3

Bay Level Offset calibration failure, 6-6

BBX2

alarm redundancy tests, 3-93

Connector, 6-14

gain set point vs BTS output considerations, D-1

No control in the shelf, 6-16

BLO

Calibration, 3-68

Calibration Audit, 3-76

calibration data file, 3-69

Calibration Failure, 6-6

Download, 3-75

BTS

Ethernet LAN interconnect diagram, 3-13

LMF connection, 3-5

system software download, 3-3

test data sheets, redundancy/alarm tests, A-16

when to optimize, C-1

BTS frame

DC Distribution Pre-test, 2-9

DC Power Pre-test, 2-7

initial power-up, 2-14

Create CAL File, 3-79

C-CCP Backplane, Troubleshooting, 6-13, 6-14

Index

68P09255A61-4

FIELD TRIAL

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x Index-3

C-CCP Shelf, 1-21

Site Serial Number Check List, A-18

Cable

GPIB, 1-11

LAN Cable, 1-12

Calibrating, 3-47, 3-62

Null Modem, 3-33

Setting Loss Values, 3-66

Timimg Reference, 1-11

Cable Calibration

HP8921 with HP PCS Interface (HP83236), F-3

Manual, F-3

CAL File, 3-79

Calculating Center Frequencies

1700 MHz, E-7

1900 MHz, E-2

800 MHz, E-4

Calibrating

Cables, 3-62

RX, 3-64

TX, 3-63

Test Equipment, 3-60

Calibrating Test Cable, Advantest R3465, F-8

Calibration

BLO, 3-68

Cable, 1-8

data file, BLO, 3-69

In-Service, I-15

RF Path, Test Equipment Setup, 3-72

RFDS, 3-86

Test Equipment, 1-8

TX Path, 3-69, 3-72

Test Cable Calibration, 1-8

Test Equipment Calibration, 1-8

Calibration Audit Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-7

Cannot communicate to Communications Analyzer,

6-3

Cannot communicate to Power Meter, 6-2

Cannot download CODE to any device card, 6-4

Cannot Download DATA to any device card, 6-4

Cannot ENABLE device, 6-5

Cannot load BLO, 6-7

Cannot Log into cell-site, 6-2

Cannot perform carrier measurement, 6-9

Cannot perform Code Domain Noise Power

measurement, 6-9

Cannot perform Rho or pilot time offset

measurement, 6-8

Cannot perform Txmask measurement, 6-8

Carrier Measurement Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-9

CDF

site configuration, 3-2

site equipage verification, 3-3

site type and equipage data information, 2-1

CDF Files, Copy from CBSC, 3-8

CDI Alarm

with Alarms Test Box, 3-101

without Alarms Test Box, 3-103

CDMA LMF, Product Description, 1-3

Cell Site

equipage verification, 2-1

preliminary operations, 2-1

types, 3-2

Cell Site Data File. See CDF

Channel elements, No or missing, 6-17

Channels

1700 MHz, E-6

1900 MHz, E-1

800 MHz, E-4

Checksum Failure, 6-11

CIO, Connectors, 6-14

CLI, 1-3, 3-17

Command Line Interface, 3-16

Format Conventions, 3-17

Logging Out, 3-22

Cobra RFDS

external housing, 1-35

RF connector panel detail, 1-35

Code Domain Power, 4-6

ATP, 4-11

Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement

Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-9

Code Domain Power Test, 4-11

Code Download Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-4

Command Line Interface, 1-3, 3-17

Common power supply verification, 2-13

Communications Analyzer Communication Failure,

Troubleshooting, 6-3

Index 68P09255A61-4

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

Aug 2002

Index-4

Communications System Analyzer, 1-11

Advantest, 1-11

HP8921A/600, 1-11

CyberTest, 1-11

Connector Functionality, Backplane,

Troubleshooting, 6-13

Copy CAL files from CDMA LMF to the CBSC, 5-7

Copy CAL Files From Diskette to the CBSC, 5-8

Copy CDF Files from CBSC, 3-8

Copy Files to a Diskette, 5-7

Copy CAL files to the CBSC, 5-8

Coupler, Setting Loss Value, 3-67

CSM

Clock Source, 3-27

Enable, 3-28

frequency verification, 3-33

functions, 3-31

LEDs, 3-32

MMI terminal connection, illustration, 3-34

redundancy/alarm tests, 3-94

Reference Source Configuration Error, 6-11

Troubleshooting, 6-11, 6-12

CyberTest, 3-43

Data Download Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-4

DC Power Pre-test

+27 V BTS frame detail, 2-7

-48 V BTS frame detail, 2-9

BTS Frame, 2-5

RFDS, 2-11

RFDS detail, 2-11

DC Power Problems, 6-18

DC/DC Converter, LED Status Combinations, 6-20

Device Enable (INS) Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-5

Digital Control Problems, C-CCP Backplane

Troubleshooting, 6-15

Digital Multimeter, 1-11

Directional Coupler, 1-12

Distribution shelf, alarm/redundancy tests, 3-91

Download

BLO, 3-75

BTS, 3-24

BTS system software, 3-3

MGLI, 3-25

Non-MGLI2 Devices, 3-26

ROM Code, H-1

E1, isolate BTS from the E1 spans, 3-4

E4406A, calibration, 3-61

Enable

CSMs, 3-28

MCCs, 3-30

Redundant GLIs, 3-30

Enabling Devices, 5-2

Equipment setup, VSWR, HP Test Set, G-2

Ethernet LAN

interconnect diagram, 3-13

Transceiver, 1-9

Ethernet maintenance connector interface, illustration,

3-6

FER test, 4-13

Folder Structure Overview, 3-12

Foreword, xvi

Frame Error Rate, 4-6

ATP, 4-13

FREQ Monitor Connector, CSM, 6-22

Frequency counter, optional test equipment, 1-12

Frequency Spectrum

Korean PCS (1700 MHz), E-6

North American Cellular Telephone System (800

MHz), E-4

North American PCS (1900 MHz), E-1

Full Optimization, 4-2

Gain set point, BBX, D-1

General Safety, xix

Generating an ATP Report, 4-14

General optimization checklist, test data sheets, A-4

Gigatronics 8542B power meter, illustration, J-2

Index

68P09255A61-4

FIELD TRIAL

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x Index-5

Gigatronics Power Meter, 3-43

GLI. See Master (MGLI2) and Slave (SGLI2) Group

Line Interface

GLI2

Connector, 6-14

Ethernet Connections, 6-14

LED Status, 6-22

No Control through span line connection, 6-15

No Control via LMF, 6-15

GPIB

Advantest R3465, J-7

HP83236A/B, J-5

HP8921A, J-5

HP8935, J-4

power meter

Gigatronics 8542B, J-2

HP437B, J-1

set address, Motorola CyberTest, J-3

GPIB Cable, 1-11

GPS

Initialization/Verification, 3-35

receiver operation, test data sheets, A-5

redundancy alarm tests, 3-94

satellite system, 3-29

Test Equipment Setup, 3-33

GPS Bad RX Message Type, 6-11

Graphical User Interface, 1-3, 3-16

GUI, 1-3, 3-16

Graphical User Interface, 3-16

Logging Out, 3-21

LMF Hardware Requirements, 1-9

High Stability 10 MHz Rubidium Standard, 1-13

High Stability Oscillator, 3-32

High-impedance Conductive Wrist Strap, 1-12

HP 437B, 3-43

HP 83236 A, F-3

HP 83236A, F-2

HP 8921, 3-43

HP 8921A, System Connectivity Test, F-2

HP 8935, 3-43

HP PCS Interface Test Equipment Setup for Manual

Testing, F-7

HP Test Set, VSWR, G-2

HP83236A/B, GPIB, J-5

HP8921A, GPIB, J-5

HP8935, GPIB, J-4

HSO

Initialization/Verification, 3-41

redundancy/alarm tests, 3-94

HyperTerminal Connection, Creating, 3-10

I and Q values, B-1

In-Service Calibration, I-15

Initial Installation of Boards/Modules, preliminary

operations, 2-2

Initial power tests, test data sheets, A-3

Initial power-up

BTS frame, 2-14

RFDS, 2-14

Initialization/Verification

GPS, 3-35

HSO, 3-41

LFR, 3-39

Intended reader profile, 1-14

Inter-frame cabling, when to optimize, C-2

IS-97 specification, B-1

ISB connectors, 6-13

Isolation, T1/E1 Span, 3-4

Itasca Alarms Test Box, 1-13

LAN

BTS frame interconnect, illustration, 3-13

Tester, 1-12

LAN Connectors, GLI2, 6-23

LED, CSM, 3-32

Index 68P09255A61-4

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

Aug 2002

Index-6

LED Status, 6-20

BBX2, 6-26

CSM, 6-21

DC/DC Converter, 6-20

GLI2, 6-22

LPA, 6-27

MCC, 6-26

LFR

Initialization / Verification, 3-39

receiver operation, test data sheets, A-6

redundancy/alarm tests, 3-94

LFR/HSO, Test Equipment Setup, 3-33

Line Build Out parameters

configure, 5-5

verify, 5-4

LMF, 1-8, 3-7

Ethernet maintenance connector interface detail,

illustration, 3-6

Installation and Update Procedures, 3-8

Termination and Removal, 5-8

to BTS connection, 3-5

LMF Operation, 3-16

LMF Removal, 5-8

Loading Code, 3-24

Logging In to a BTS, 3-18

Logging Out, 3-21

CLI, 3-22

GUI, 3-21

Logical BTS, 1-15

Numbering, 1-16

CLI, 3-20

GUI, 3-18

Low Frequency Receiver, 3-32

LPA

redundancy test, 3-97

test data sheets

convergence, A-8

IM Reduction, A-7

LPA Module LED, 6-27

LPAs, Site Serial Number Check List, A-19

Manual

layout, 1-1

overview, 1-2

MASTER LED, GLI2, 6-22

MCC, Enable, 3-30

MGLI, redundancy test RFM frame, 3-98

MGLI2

board detail, MMI port connections, 5-5

Download, 3-25

Miscellaneous errors, Troubleshooting, 6-5

MMI Connection, 3-23

MMI Connector

CSM, 6-22

GLI2, 6-23

MCC, 6-26

MMI equipment setup, 3-23

MMI Interface Kit, 1-10

Module status indicators, 6-20

Multi-FER test Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-10

NAM, Valid Ranges, 3-84

No DC input voltage to Power Supply Module, 6-18

No DC voltage +5 +65 or +15 Volts to a specific

GLI2 BBX2 or Switch board, 6-19

No GPS Reference Source, 6-11

Non-MGLI2, Download, 3-26

Null Modem Cable, 3-33

Online Help, 1-3

Optimization

Process, 3-1

purpose, 1-4

When, 1-5

Optional Test Equipment, 1-12

frequency counter, 1-12

Oscilloscope, 1-13

PA Shelves, 1-22

Index

68P09255A61-4

FIELD TRIAL

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x Index-7

Patent Notification, xxii

path

RX, 1-4

TX, 1-5

PCMCIA, Ethernet adapter, LMF to BTS connection,

3-5

Pilot Gain, 4-9, 4-10, 4-11, 4-13

Pilot Offset Acceptance test, 4-10

Pilot Time Offset, 4-6, 4-10

Pin/Signal Information for ARM A Cable, 3-104

Ping, 3-13

PN Offset

programming information, B-1

usage, B-1

PnMask, I and PnMask Q Values, B-2

Power Conversion Shelf (-48 V BTS Only), Site

Serial Number Check List, A-19

Power Delta Calibration

Advantest, I-4

HP8921A, I-2

HP8935, I-7

Power Input, 6-13

Power Meter, 1-11

illustration, J-1

Power meter

GPIB

Gigatronics 8542B, J-2

HP437B, J-1

illustration, Gigatronics 8542B, J-2

Power Meter Communication Failure,

Troubleshooting, 6-2

Power supply, converter redundancy, 3-89

Power Supply Module Interface, 6-14

power supply/converter redundancy, 3-89

Pre-power tests, test data sheets, A-3

Preliminary operations

cell Site types, 2-1

test data sheets, A-2

Prepare to Leave the Site

external test equipment removal, 5-1

LMF Removal, 5-8

re-connect BTS IFM connector, 5-3

re-connect BTS T1 spans, 5-3

Reestablish OMC-R control, 5-9

Verify T1/E1, 5-9

Pushbuttons and Connectors, GLI2, 6-23

PWR/ALM LED

BBX2, 6-26

CSM, 6-21

DC/DC Converter, 6-20

generic, 6-20

MCC, 6-26

RDM, 6-13

Re-connect BTS IFM connector, 5-3

Re-connect BTS T1 Spans, 5-3

Reduced ATP, 4-2, 6-8

redundancy/alarm tests, 3-88

Redundant GLIs, Enable, 3-30

Reestablish OMC-R control, 5-9

Reference Distribution Module, 6-13

Required documents, 1-14

RESET Pushbutton, GLI2, 6-23

Resetting BTS modules, 5-2

Revision History, xxi

Adapters, 1-12

Attenuators, 1-12

Load, 1-12

RF Path Calibration, 3-72

RFDS

Calibration, 3-86

DC Power Pre-test, 2-11

Description, 3-80

initial power-up, 2-14

Layout, 1-35

Parameter Settings, 3-81

Set Configuration Data, 3-85

rho, 4-6

Index 68P09255A61-4

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

Aug 2002

Index-8

rho test, 4-9

ROM Code, Download, H-1

RS-232 to GPIB Interface, 1-10

RX, antenna VSWR, test data sheets, A-17

RX Acceptance Tests, Frame Error Rate, 4-6

RX path, 1-4

Sector Configuration, 1-30

Set Antenna Map Data, 3-84

Set Span Parameter Configuration, procedure, 5-5

Setting Cable Loss Values, 3-66

Setting TX Coupler Loss Value, 3-67

SGLI2, board detail, MMI port connections, 5-5

Shelf Configuration Switch, 2-3

Signal Generator, 3-63, 3-64

Site, equipage verification, 3-3

Site checklist, data sheets, A-2

Site equipage, CDF file, 3-2

Site I/O board, T1 span cable connection, 5-3

Site Serial Number Check List, A-18

Span Framing Format

configure, 5-5

verify, 5-4

Span I/O board

E1 span isolation, illustration, 3-5

T1 span isolation, illustration, 3-5

Span Line

connector , 6-13

T1/E1 Verification Equipment, 1-13

Span line, troubleshooting, 6-28

Span line configuration, troubleshooting, 6-30

Span line traffic, No or missing, 6-16

Span Parameter Configuration

set, procedure, 5-5

verification, procedure, 5-4

SPANS LED, GLI2, 6-23

Spectral Purity Transmit Mask ATP, 4-7

Spectral Purity TX Mask, 4-6

Spectrum Analyzer, 1-12, 3-63, 3-64

Spectrum Analyzer , HP8594E, 3-44

STATUS LED, GLI2, 6-23

SYNC Monitor Connector, CSM, 6-22

System Connectivity Test, HP8921A, F-2

isolate BTS from the T1 spans, 3-4

span connection, 5-3

Test data sheets

AMR CDI Alarm Input Verification, A-17

BTS redundancy/alarm tests, A-16

general optimization checklist, A-4

GPS receiver operation, A-5

initial power tests, A-3

LFR receiver operation, A-6

LPA

convergence, A-8

IM Reduction, A-7

pre-power tests, A-3

preliminary operations, A-2

RX antenna VSWR, A-17

site checklist, A-2

TX antenna VSWR, A-16

TX BLO

Offset/Power Output Verification, A-9

Power Output Verification, A-14

Test Equipment

Automatically Selecting, 3-59

Calibrating, 3-60

Connecting test equipment to the BTS, 3-43

Manually Selecting, 3-58

Reference Chart, 3-45

Selecting, 3-57

verification data sheets, A-1

VSWR, G-1

Test Equipment Setup, 3-43

GPS & LFR/HSO, 3-33

HP PCS Interface, F-7

RF path calibration, 3-72

Test Matrix, C-3

ATP optimization, C-2

Test Set, Calibration, 3-57

Timing Reference Cables, 1-11

Top Interconnect Plate, 1-21

Index

68P09255A61-4

FIELD TRIAL

Aug 2002 1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x Index-9

Troubleshooting

BBX2 Control Good - No (or Missing) Span Line

Traffic, 6-16

BLO Calibration Failure, 6-6

C-CCP Backplane, 6-13, 6-14

Calibration Audit Failure, 6-7

Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement

Failure, 6-9

Code Download Failure, 6-4

Communications Analyzer Communication Failure,

6-3

CSM Checklist, 6-11

Data Download Failure, 6-4

DC Power Problems, 6-18

Device Enable (INS) Failure, 6-5

MGLI2 Control Good - No Control over AMR,

6-16

MGLI2 Control Good - No Control over

Co-located GLI2, 6-15

Miscellaneous Failures, 6-5

Multi-FER Failure, 6-10

No BBX2 Control in the Shelf - No Control over

Co-located GLI2s, 6-16

No DC Input Voltage to any C-CCP Shelf Module,

6-19

No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module,

6-18

No GLI2 Control through Span Line Connection,

6-15

No GLI2 Control via LMF, 6-15

No MCC24 Channel Elements, 6-17

Power Meter Communication Failure, 6-2

Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement Failure,

6-8

Set span configuration, 6-30

span problems, 6-28

TX and RX Signal Routing, 6-19

TX Mask Measurement Failure, 6-8

TSU NAM

Parameters, 3-83

Program, 3-87

TX, antenna VSWR, test data sheets, A-16

TX & RX Path Calibration, 3-68

TX and RX Frequency vs Channel

1700 MHz, E-7

1900 MHz, E-2

800 MHz, E-4

TX and RX Signal Routing, C-CCP Backplane

Troubleshooting, 6-19

TX Audit Test, 3-76

TX BLO, test data sheets

Offset/Power Output Verification, A-9

Power Output Verification, A-14

TX Mask test, 4-7

TX Mask Verification, spectrum analyzer display,

illustration, 4-8

TX OUT connection, 4-3

TX Output Acceptance Tests

Code domain power, 4-6, 4-11

introduction, 4-6

Pilot Time Offset, 4-6, 4-10

Spectral purity TX mask, 4-6

Waveform quality (rho), 4-6, 4-9

TX Path, calibration, 3-69

TX path, 1-5

audit, 3-76

calibration, 3-72

Updating LMF Files, 5-7

UTP, LMF to BTS connection, 3-5

Verification of Test Equipment, data sheets, A-1

Verify Span Parameter Configuration, procedure, 5-4

Voltage Standing Wave Ratio. See VSWR

VSWR

Advantest Test Set, G-4

Calculation, G-3, G-5

Equation, G-3, G-5

manual test setup detail

Advantest illustration, G-6

HP illustration, G-3, G-4

required test equipment, G-1

transmit and receive antenna, G-1

Walsh channels, 4-11

Index 68P09255A61-4

1X SCt 4812T BTS Optimization/ATP Software Release 2.16.1.x

FIELD TRIAL

Aug 2002

Index-10

Warm-up, 1-8

Waveform Quality (rho), 4-6

Waveform Quality (rho) ATP, 4-9

When to optimize

Ancillary - table, C-1

BTS, C-1

inter-frame cabling, C-2

Xircom Model PE3-10B2, LMF to BTS connection,

3-5

Nokia Solutions and Networks T5CR1 48V SC4812T 800 MHz CDMA BTS Frame User Manual Exhibit

Nokia Solutions and Networks 48V SC4812T 800 MHz CDMA BTS Frame Users Manual Exhibit

Users Manual Exhibit

Navigation menu

Namespaces

Views

Navigation